computer_fundamentals_and desk top publishing
TRANSCRIPT
1
Some Precautions while working with computers By using some common sense and by following these handling tips, you will get the most use and enjoyment out of your computer. Computers are designed and tested to be durable and function reliably in normal environments.
Do not subject your computer to physical punishment, such as dropping or bumping.
Do not place heavy objects on your computer.
Do not spill or allow liquids into your computer.
Do not pack your computer in tightly packed suitcases, bags, or backpacks. The compression might cause internal damage.
Use the bag issued to you or a backpack specifically designed for carrying laptop computers.
Do not scratch, twist, hit, or push the surface of your computer display.
Do not place objects between the keyboard and screen.
Do not pick up or hold your computer by the display. When picking up your open computer, hold it by the lower half (the keyboard side).
Do not turn your computer over while the AC adapter is plugged in. This could break the adapter plug.
Do not store your computer where the temperatures are below 41°F or above 95°F (5°C and 35°C).
Do not place your computer closer than 5 in. (13 cm) from any electrical appliance that generates a strong magnetic field, such as a motor, magnet, TV, refrigerator, or large audio speakers.
Do not hard-mount your computer in a vehicle or anywhere that is subject to strong vibration.
Do not touch the lens on the DVD/CD-ROM tray. You should hold the disc by the edges and not touch the recorded surface.
Transport your laptop in a safe manner.
Do not connect your modem to a digital phone line (such as most of the lines around campus).
Doing so could possibly damage your modem. The phone lines in most dorm rooms are analog but you should always plug into the Ethernet port (it's faster).
You should occasionally clean your computer as follows:
Use a soft lint-free cloth moistened with non-alkaline detergent to wipe the exterior of the computer
Don't spray cleaner directly on the display or keyboard.
Gently wipe the LCD with a dry, soft lint-free cloth. If a stain remains, moisten the cloth with LCD cleaner and wipe it again. Be sure to dry the LCD before closing it.
Note: A 50/50 mixture of Isopropyl alcohol and water or water alone may be used as an LCD cleaner to moisten your cloth. Antistatic LCD cleaning cloths and Kim Wipes are also acceptable alternatives.
Warning: Isopropyl Alcohol is a flammable liquid. Do not use this cleaner near an exposed flame or when the system is on.
processall kinds of information, includ ing, p ictures, letters, numbers, and sounds. There are two main parts of computers, Software is the instructions that a computer uses to do what you ask it to. Pieces of software are often called programs
displays things is the computer. This is not true. That is the mon1.1). The computer is usually a box (see Figure 1.2). Also, you may call the whole assembly of all the hardware (the computer and the monitor, for example) the computer. There are d ifferent styles of monitors. One of these is the one alreashown. It is called a CRT monitor. It takes more power than the other popular kind , called LCDs (see Figure 1.3). However, CRT monitors work faster, which makes them better for fast games because the movement will blur less. LCDs are
(see Figure 1.6) is used to enter (type) letters, numbers, and other symbols into a computer.that only uses ones called a byte. A byte is the amountletters are formatted specially they get bigger, andcomputer are thousands of bytes incomputers. The ones that most people use are called
where there is no power. They usewill last longer.or a house
Turn 1
23
A computer processes (does something to or with) it. Afterwards it all kinds of information, including, pictures, letters, numbers, and sounds. There are two main parts of computers, hardware Software is the instructions that a computer uses to do what you ask it to. Pieces of software are often called programs.
Many people mistakenly think that where the computer normally d isplays things is the computer. This is not true. That is the mon1.1). The computer is usually a box (see Figure 1.2). Also, you may call the whole assembly of all the hardware (the computer and the monitor, for example) the computer. There are d ifferent styles of monitors. One of these is the one alreashown. It is called a CRT monitor. It takes more power than the other popular kind , called LCDs (see Figure 1.3). However, CRT monitors work faster, which makes them better for fast games because the movement will blur less. LCDs are
(see Figure 1.6) is used to enter (type) letters, numbers, and other symbols into a computer.
Computers store all data in binary code, which is a number system that only uses ones called a byte. A byte is the amountletters are formatted specially they get bigger, andcomputer are thousands of bytes incomputers. The ones that most people use are called
where there is no power. They usewill last longer.
There are also much more powerful computers called mainframes that can be as big as a roomor a house!
urn a computer1. First, turn
computer), 2. Turn the monitor on too. 3. After awhile a d ialogue
to worry much about what it is for now. It will probably look something like whole screen.
computer is a machine that es (does something to or with) it. Afterwards it
all kinds of information, includ ing, pictures, letters, numbers, and sounds. There are two main parts of hardware and software
Software is the instructions that a computer uses to do what you ask it to. Pieces of software are often called
Many people mistakenly think that where the computer normally displays things is the computer. This is not true. That is the mon1.1). The computer is usually a box (see Figure 1.2). Also, you may call the whole assembly of all the hardware (the computer and the monitor, for example) the computer. There are different styles of monitors. One of these is the one alreashown. It is called a CRT monitor. It takes more power than the other popular kind, called LCDs (see Figure 1.3). However, CRT monitors work faster, which makes them better for fast games because the movement will blur less. LCDs are
thinner than CRTs, only one output device is called a printer (see Figure 1.4). Printers are used to put data on paper. This is called harcan also output sounds. This is also soft copy.There are also d ifferent kinds of input hardware. The two most important of which are the mouse and the keyboard. A mouse looks like Figure 1.5 it icursor around the screen (monitor display). A keyboard
(see Figure 1.6) is used to enter (type) letters, numbers, and other symbols into a Computers store all data in binary code, which is a number system
that only uses ones and zeros. One digit in binary code is called a bit, eight bits is called a byte. A byte is the amountletters are formatted specially they get bigger, andcomputer are thousands of bytes incomputers. The ones that most people use are called
Smaller computers that are about the size of a briefcase are callednotebooks. There are also new computers out that are the sno keyboard . Text (letters and numbers) is written d irectly on the screen, these are calledhand . Notebooks,
where there is no power. They useThere are also much more powerful computers called mainframes that can be as big as a room
a computer
on and back off again! First, turn the power
computer),
urn the monitor on too. After awhile a d ialogueto worry much about what it is for now. It will probably look something like Figure 1.7. It may not appear at all, or it may be in another variation that uses the whole screen.
is a machine that input
es (does something to or with) it. Afterwards it all kinds of information, includ ing, pictures, letters, numbers, and sounds. There are two main parts of
software. Hardware is all of the parts of the computer you can see and toucSoftware is the instructions that a computer uses to do what you ask it to. Pieces of software are often called
Many people mistakenly think that where the computer normally d isplays things is the computer. This is not true. That is the mon1.1). The computer is usually a box (see Figure 1.2). Also, you may call the whole assembly of all the hardware (the computer and the monitor, for example) the computer. There are d ifferent styles of monitors. One of these is the one alreashown. It is called a CRT monitor. It takes more power than the other popular kind , called LCDs (see Figure 1.3). However, CRT monitors work faster, which makes them better for fast games because the movement will blur less. LCDs are
thinner than CRTs, only one way the computer can output information for you to see. Another popular output device is called a printer (see Figure 1.4). Printers are used to put data on paper. This is called harcan also output sounds. This is also soft copy.There are also d ifferent kinds of input hardware. The two most important of which are the mouse and the keyboard . A mouse looks like Figure 1.5 it icursor around the screen (monitor d isplay). A keyboard
(see Figure 1.6) is used to enter (type) letters, numbers, and other symbols into a Computers store all data in binary code, which is a number system
zeros. One digit in binary code is called a bit, eight bits is called a byte. A byte is the amount
of space one letter takes up. However when letters are formatted specially they get bigger, andcomputer are thousands of bytes in
size.computers. The ones that most people use are called
Smaller computers that are about the size of a briefcase are callednotebooks. There are also new computers out that are the sno keyboard . Text (letters and numbers) is written d irectly on the screen, these are called
Tablet PCs. PDAs are computers so small that you can hold them in one hand . Notebooks,
where there is no power. They use
LCD screens because LCDs are thinner and take less power, so the batteries There are also much more powerful computers called mainframes that can be as big as a room
and back off again!
on (using the button or switch on the
urn the monitor on too.
After awhile a d ialogue-box should come up. You do not need to worry much about what it is for now. It will probably look
Figure 1.7. It may not appear at all, or it may be in another variation that uses the
3
Chapter 1
inputs (takes in) facts and information (known as es (does something to or with) it. Afterwards it output
all kinds of information, includ ing, pictures, letters, numbers, and sounds. There are two main parts of . Hardware is all of the parts of the computer you can see and touc
Software is the instructions that a computer uses to do what you ask it to. Pieces of software are often called
Many people mistakenly think that where the computer normally d isplays things is the computer. This is not true. That is the mon1.1). The computer is usually a box (see Figure 1.2). Also, you may call the whole assembly of all the hardware (the computer and the monitor, for example) the computer. There are d ifferent styles of monitors. One of these is the one alreashown. It is called a CRT monitor. It takes more power than the other popular kind , called LCDs (see Figure 1.3). However, CRT monitors work faster, which makes them better for fast games because the movement will blur less. LCDs are
thinner than CRTs, but they are more expensive. Figure 1.4 way the computer can output information for you to see. Another popular
output device is called a printer (see Figure 1.4). Printers are used to put data on paper. This is called hard copy, what monitors show is called soft copy. Computers can also output sounds. This is also soft copy.There are also d ifferent kinds of input hardware. The two most important of which are the mouse and the keyboard . A mouse looks like Figure 1.5 it icursor around the screen (monitor d isplay). A keyboard
(see Figure 1.6) is used to enter (type) letters, numbers, and other symbols into a Computers store all data in binary code, which is a number system
zeros. One d igit in binary code is called a bit, eight bits is of space one letter takes up. However when
letters are formatted specially they get bigger, and
size.
There are many d ifferent kinds of computers. The ones that most people use are called
Personal Computers (PCs).
Smaller computers that are about the size of a briefcase are callednotebooks. There are also new computers out that are the sno keyboard . Text (letters and numbers) is written d irectly on the screen, these are
Tablet PCs. PDAs are computers so small that you can hold them in one hand . Notebooks,
PDAs, and Tablets have batteries so that you can use LCD screens because LCDs are thinner and take less power, so the batteries
There are also much more powerful computers called mainframes that can be as big as a room
and back off again!
on (using the button or switch on the
box should come up. You do not need to worry much about what it is for now. It will probably look
Figure 1.7. It may not appear at all, or it may be in another variation that uses the
Introduction to Computers
Chapter 1
- Input and Output Devices
s (takes in) facts and information (known as outputs, or d isplays, the results for you to see. Data is
all kinds of information, includ ing, pictures, letters, numbers, and sounds. There are two main parts of . Hardware is all of the parts of the computer you can see and touc
Software is the instructions that a computer uses to do what you ask it to. Pieces of software are often called
Many people mistakenly think that where the computer normally d isplays things is the computer. This is not true. That is the monitor (see Figure 1.1). The computer is usually a box (see Figure 1.2). Also, you may call the whole assembly of all the hardware (the computer and the monitor, for example) the computer. There are d ifferent styles of monitors. One of these is the one alreashown. It is called a CRT monitor. It takes more power than the other popular kind , called LCDs (see Figure 1.3). However, CRT monitors work faster, which makes them better for fast games because the movement will blur less. LCDs are
but they are more expensive. Figure 1.4 way the computer can output information for you to see. Another popular
output device is called a printer (see Figure 1.4). Printers are used to put data on d copy, what monitors show is called soft copy. Computers
can also output sounds. This is also soft copy.There are also d ifferent kinds of input hardware. The two most important of which are the mouse and the keyboard . A mouse looks like Figure 1.5 it icursor around the screen (monitor d isplay). A keyboard
(see Figure 1.6) is used to enter (type) letters, numbers, and other symbols into a Computers store all data in binary code, which is a number system
zeros. One digit in binary code is called a bit, eight bits is of space one letter takes up. However when
so usually things on a There are many d ifferent kinds of
Personal Computers (PCs).
Smaller computers that are about the size of a briefcase are callednotebooks. There are also new computers out that are the sno keyboard . Text (letters and numbers) is written d irectly on the screen, these are
Tablet PCs. PDAs are computers so small that you can hold them in one PDAs, and Tablets have batteries so that you can use
LCD screens because LCDs are thinner and take less power, so the batteries There are also much more powerfu l computers called mainframes that can be as big as a room
on (using the button or switch on the
box should come up. You do not need to worry much about what it is for now. It will probably look
Figure 1.7. It may not appear at all, or it may be in another variation that uses the
Desktop Publishing
Introduction to ComputersInput and Output Devices
s (takes in) facts and information (known as s, or d isplays, the results for you to see. Data is
all kinds of information, includ ing, pictures, letters, numbers, and sounds. There are two main parts of . Hardware is all of the parts of the computer you can see and touc
Software is the instructions that a computer uses to do what you ask it to. Pieces of software are often called
Many people mistakenly think that where the computer normally itor (see Figure
1.1). The computer is usually a box (see Figure 1.2). Also, you may call the whole assembly of all the hardware (the computer and the monitor, for example) the computer. There are d ifferent styles of monitors. One of these is the one already shown. It is called a CRT monitor. It takes more power than the other popular kind, called LCDs (see Figure 1.3). However, CRT monitors work faster, which makes them better for fast games because the movement will blur less. LCDs are
but they are more expensive. Figure 1.4 way the computer can output information for you to see. Another popular
output device is called a printer (see Figure 1.4). Printers are used to put data on d copy, what monitors show is called soft copy. Computers
can also output sounds. This is also soft copy.
There are also d ifferent kinds of input hardware. The two most important of which are the mouse and the keyboard . A mouse looks like Figure 1.5 it icursor around the screen (monitor d isplay). A keyboard
(see Figure 1.6) is used to enter (type) letters, numbers, and other symbols into a Computers store all data in binary code, which is a number system
zeros. One digit in binary code is called a bit, eight bits is of space one letter takes up. However when
so usually things on a There are many d ifferent kinds of
Personal Computers (PCs).
Smaller computers that are about the size of a briefcase are callednotebooks. There are also new computers out that are the sno keyboard . Text (letters and numbers) is written d irectly on the screen, these are
Tablet PCs. PDAs are computers so small that you can hold them in one PDAs, and Tablets have batteries so that you can use
LCD screens because LCDs are thinner and take less power, so the batteries There are also much more powerful computers called mainframes that can be as big as a room
on (using the button or switch on the
box should come up. You do not need to worry much about what it is for now. It will probably look
Figure 1.7. It may not appear at all, or it may be in another variation that uses the
Desktop Publishing
Introduction to ComputersInput and Output Devices
s (takes in) facts and information (known as datas, or d isplays, the results for you to see. Data is
all kinds of information, includ ing, pictures, letters, numbers, and sounds. There are two main parts of . Hardware is all of the parts of the computer you can see and touc
Software is the instructions that a computer uses to do what you ask it to. Pieces of software are often called
but they are more expensive. Figure 1.4 - A Printer way the computer can output information for you to see. Another popular
output device is called a printer (see Figure 1.4). Printers are used to put data on d copy, what monitors show is called soft copy. Computers
There are also d ifferent kinds of input hardware. The two most important of which are the mouse and the keyboard . A mouse looks like Figure 1.5 it is used to move the
Smaller computers that are about the size of a briefcase are callednotebooks. There are also new computers out that are the same size, but they haveno keyboard . Text (letters and numbers) is written d irectly on the screen, these are
Tablet PCs. PDAs are computers so small that you can hold them in one PDAs, and Tablets have batteries so that you can use
LCD screens because LCDs are thinner and take less power, so the batteries There are also much more powerful computers called mainframes that can be as big as a room
Figure 1.7. It may not appear at all, or it may be in another variation that uses the
Desktop Publishing
2009
Introduction to Computers
Input and Output Devices
data), and then s, or d isplays, the results for you to see. Data is
all kinds of information, including, pictures, letters, numbers, and sounds. There are two main parts of . Hardware is all of the parts of the computer you can see and touc
Software is the instructions that a computer uses to do what you ask it to. Pieces of software are often called
A Printer Monitors are way the computer can output information for you to see. Another popular
output device is called a printer (see Figure 1.4). Printers are used to put data on d copy, what monitors show is called soft copy. Computers
There are also d ifferent kinds of input hardware. The two most important of which s used to move the
Smaller computers that are about the size of a briefcase are called
laptops or ame size, but they have
no keyboard . Text (letters and numbers) is written d irectly on the screen, these are Tablet PCs. PDAs are computers so small that you can hold them in one
PDAs, and Tablets have batteries so that you can use them LCD screens because LCDs are thinner and take less power, so the batteries
There are also much more powerful computers called mainframes that can be as big as a room
Figure 1.7. It may not appear at all, or it may be in another variation that uses the
Introduction to Computers
Input and Output Devices
), and then
s, or d isplays, the results for you to see. Data is all kinds of information, includ ing, pictures, letters, numbers, and sounds. There are two main parts of
. Hardware is all of the parts of the computer you can see and touch. Software is the instructions that a computer uses to do what you ask it to. Pieces of software are often called
Monitors are way the computer can output information for you to see. Another popular
output device is called a printer (see Figure 1.4). Printers are used to put data on d copy, what monitors show is called soft copy. Computers
There are also different kinds of input hardware. The two most important of which s used to move the
laptops or ame size, but they have
no keyboard. Text (letters and numbers) is written directly on the screen, these are Tablet PCs. PDAs are computers so small that you can hold them in one
them LCD screens because LCDs are thinner and take less power, so the batteries
There are also much more powerful computers called mainframes that can be as big as a room
Figure 1.7. It may not appear at all, or it may be in another variation that uses the
4. If it comes up, and it is like this one, you must type the correct username and password in boxes (1)
and (2), respectively. Then click on (put the cursor button (3).
5. If the box does not come up, do not worry, nothing is wrong. to have a password.
6. We will learn more about this later. If this box d id not come up, but ‘Welcome’ somewhere came up, click the picture with the correct user name beside it, type in the password (if there is one), and push the key on your keyboard that says ‘Enter’ or ‘Return’.
NOTE: For the rest of this book we will only be saying ‘Enter’, if your keyboard says ‘Return’, just remember that they are the same thing.
To turn the computer off:1. Move your mouse to the bottom of the screen. 2. In the bottom left
should pop up. 3. In the bottom of
button4. A box like Figure 1.8 will come up, just click on (1). 5. If a screen comes up that says ‘It is now safe to turn off your computer’,
then flip the powerautomatically.
If you do not follow these steps before turning the computer off, it may
There are two kinds of software: 1. The Operating System (OS) 2. Applications Software.
Operating System Abbreviated OS, the Operating e.g. Window 98.
Applications Software Applications Software Operating System runs the compapplications computer.
The Operating System also comes with utilities.managing data. You can alsomade the Operating System.set comes
Whereas thesoftware is specific instructio
There are as many different kinds of computer;
Word processing software is used to write documents,essays. Spreadsheet software accounting and hvirtual (or,you just can’t do in a normal slide show. Database softinformation in simple formats.
If it comes up, and it is like this one, you must type the correct username and password in boxes (1) and (2), respectively. Then click on (put the cursor button (3).
If the box does not come up, do not worry, nothing is wrong. to have a password. We will learn more about this later. If this box d id not come up, but ‘Welcome’ somewhere came up, click the picture with the correct user name beside it, type in the password (if there is one), and push the key on your keyboard that says ‘Enter’ or ‘Return’.
For the rest of this book we will only be saying ‘Enter’, if your keyboard says ‘Return’, just remember that they are the same thing.
To turn the computer off:ove your mouse to the bottom of the screen.
In the bottom leftshould pop up. In the bottom of button. A box like Figure 1.8 will come up, just click on (1). If a screen comes up that says ‘It is now safe to turn off your computer’, then flip the powerautomatically.
If you do not follow these steps before turning the computer off, it may
There are two kinds of software: he Operating System (OS)
Applications Software.
Operating System
Abbreviated OS, the Operating .g. Window 98.
Applications Software Applications Software isOperating System runs the comppplications software understand each other. This makes it the most
computer.
The Operating System also comes with utilities.managing data. You can also
Operating System.
with every OS.Whereas the
Operating System is general instructs thoftware is specific instructio
There are as many d ifferent kinds of
however the most common are word processing, Word processing software is used to write documents,essays. Spreadsheet software accounting and has manyvirtual (or,
simulated) slide shows and usually have all sorts of cool features for animations and soundsyou just can’t do in a normal slide show. Database softinformation in simple formats.
If it comes up, and it is like this one, you must type the correct username and password in boxes (1) and (2), respectively. Then click on (put the cursor
If the box does not come up, do not worry, nothing is wrong. to have a password.
We will learn more about this later. If this box d id not come up, but ‘Welcome’ somewhere came up, click the picture with the correct user name beside it, type in the password (if there is one), and push the key on your keyboard that says ‘Enter’ or ‘Return’.
For the rest of this book we will only be saying ‘Enter’, if your keyboard says ‘Return’, just remember that they are the same thing.
To turn the computer off:
ove your mouse to the bottom of the screen. In the bottom left-hand corner it will say ‘should pop up.
In the bottom of the menu you will see ‘
A box like Figure 1.8 will come up, just click on (1). If a screen comes up that says ‘It is now safe to turn off your computer’, then flip the power-switch, otherwise your computer will tu
If you do not follow these steps before turning the computer off, it may
There are two kinds of software:
he Operating System (OS)
Applications Software.
Abbreviated OS, the Operating System is the piece of Software, which
Applications Software
is
called programsOperating System runs the computer and the
oftware understand each other. This makes it the most
The Operating System also comes with utilities.managing data. You can also
buy Third Party utilities, which means a different company made them than Operating System.
Utilities Programs that manage, repair, and with every OS.
Applications Software does the specific things you want the computer to do. Operating System is general instructs th
oftware is specific instructions that work together with the Operating System to
There are as many d ifferent kinds of however the most common are word processing,
Word processing software is used to write documents,essays. Spreadsheet software organizes
as many
features for doing mathematical operations. Presentation software is used to make simulated) slide shows and usually have all sorts of cool features for animations and sounds
you just can’t do in a normal slide show. Database softinformation in simple formats.
If it comes up, and it is like this one, you must type the correct username and password in boxes (1) and (2), respectively. Then click on (put the cursor
If the box does not come up, do not worry, nothing is wrong.
We will learn more about this later. If this box d id not come up, but ‘Welcome’ somewhere came up, click the p icture with the correct user name beside it, type in the password (if there is one), and push the key on your keyboard that says ‘Enter’ or ‘Return’.
For the rest of this book we will only be saying ‘Enter’, if your keyboard says ‘Return’, just remember
ove your mouse to the bottom of the screen. hand corner it will say ‘
the menu you will see ‘Turn off Computer
A box like Figure 1.8 will come up, just click on (1). If a screen comes up that says ‘It is now safe to turn off your computer’,
switch, otherwise your computer will tu
If you do not follow these steps before turning the computer off, it may
System is the piece of Software, which
programs. Pieces
uter and the applications oftware understand each other. This makes it the most
The Operating System also comes with utilities.
These are pieces of buy Third Party u tilities, which means a d ifferent company made them than
Utilities Programs that manage, repair, and Applications Software does the specific things you want the computer to do.
Operating System is general instructs thns that work together with the Operating System to
There are as many d ifferent kinds of applications however the most common are word processing,
Word processing software is used to write documents,organizes data, usually numbers, into columns and rows. It is used mostly for
features for doing mathematical operations. Presentation software is used to make simulated) slide shows and usually have all sorts of cool features for animations and sounds
you just can’t do in a normal slide show. Database soft
4
If it comes up, and it is like this one, you must type the correct username and password in boxes (1) and (2), respectively. Then click on (put the cursor on top of and push the left button
If the box does not come up, do not worry, nothing is wrong.
We will learn more about this later. If this box d id not come up, but ‘Welcome’ somewhere came up, click the picture with the correct user name beside it, type in the password (if there is one), and push the key on your keyboard that says ‘Enter’ or ‘Return’.
For the rest of this book we will only be saying ‘Enter’, if your keyboard says ‘Return’, just remember
ove your mouse to the bottom of the screen.
hand corner it will say ‘Start’. Click on that, and a menu
Turn off Computer
A box like Figure 1.8 will come up, just click on (1).
If a screen comes up that says ‘It is now safe to turn off your computer’, switch, otherwise your computer will tu
If you do not follow these steps before turning the computer off, it may
System is the piece of Software, which
of applications software do the specific thingspplications software. It makes sure that the
oftware understand each other. This makes it the most
These are pieces of buy Third Party u tilities, which means a d ifferent company made them than
Utilities Programs that manage, repair, and Applications Software does the specific things you want the computer to do.
Operating System is general instructs the computer for controlling the hns that work together with the Operating System to
pplications software as there are things you could wanthowever the most common are word processing, spreadsheet,
Word processing software is used to write documents,
which are formatted pages of text, such as letters or data, usually numbers, into columns and rows. It is used mostly for
features for doing mathematical operations. Presentation software is used to make simulated) slide shows and usually have all sorts of cool features for animations and sounds
you just can’t do in a normal slide show. Database software is an advanced way of
Desktop Publishing
If it comes up, and it is like this one, you must type the correct username and password in boxes (1) on top of and push the left button
If the box does not come up, do not worry, nothing is wrong. That just
We will learn more about this later. If this box did not come up, but ‘Welcome’ somewhere came up, click the picture with the correct user name beside it, type in the password (if there is one), and push the key on your keyboard that says ‘Enter’ or ‘Return’.
For the rest of this book we will only be saying ‘Enter’, if your keyboard says ‘Return’, just remember
’. Click on that, and a menu
Turn off Computer'. Click on this
If a screen comes up that says ‘It is now safe to turn off your computer’, switch, otherwise your computer will tu
If you do not follow these steps before turning the computer off, it may damage
System is the piece of Software, which
organizes
of applications software do the specific thingsoftware. It makes sure that the
oftware understand each other. This makes it the most
important piece of software on the
These are pieces of applications buy Third Party u tilities, which means a d ifferent company made them than
Utilities Programs that manage, repair, and optimizeApplications Software does the specific things you want the computer to do.
e computer for controlling the hns that work together with the Operating System to
oftware as there are things you could wantpreadsheet,
presentatiowhich are formatted pages of text, such as letters or
data, usually numbers, into columns and rows. It is used mostly for features for doing mathematical operations. Presentation software is used to make
simulated) slide shows and usually have all sorts of cool features for animations and soundsware is an advanced way of
Desktop Publishing
If it comes up, and it is like this one, you must type the correct username and password in boxes (1) on top of and push the left button
That just
means the computer is set not
We will learn more about this later. If this box d id not come up, but instead a screen that says ‘Welcome’ somewhere came up, click the picture with the correct user name beside it, type in the password (if there is one), and push the key on your keyboard that says ‘Enter’ or ‘Return’.
For the rest of this book we will only be saying ‘Enter’, if your keyboard says ‘Return’, just remember
’. Click on that, and a menu
'. Click on this
If a screen comes up that says ‘It is now safe to turn off your computer’, switch, otherwise your computer will turn off
damage
the computer.
organizes
and controls the computer
of applications software do the specific thingsoftware. It makes sure that the
important piece of software on the
pplications software that mostly deal with buy Third Party u tilities, which means a d ifferent company made them than
optimize
data on a Applications Software does the specific things you want the computer to do.
e computer for controlling the hns that work together with the Operating System to
do work for you.
oftware as there are things you could wantpresentation, and database software.
which are formatted pages of text, such as letters or data, usually numbers, into columns and rows. It is used mostly for
features for doing mathematical operations. Presentation software is used to make simulated) slide shows and usually have all sorts of cool features for animations and sounds
ware is an advanced way of
organizing
Desktop Publishing
2009
If it comes up, and it is like this one, you must type the correct username and password in boxes (1) on top of and push the left button
on the mouse)
means the computer is set not
instead a screen that says ‘Welcome’ somewhere came up, click the picture with the correct user name beside it, type in the password (if there is one), and push the key on your keyboard that says ‘Enter’ or ‘Return’.
For the rest of this book we will only be saying ‘Enter’, if your keyboard says ‘Return’, just remember
the computer.
and controls the computer
of applications software do the specific things
you want.oftware. It makes sure that the
hardware and thimportant piece of software on the
oftware that mostly deal with buy Third Party u tilities, which means a d ifferent company made them than
data on a computer. A basic Applications Software does the specific things you want the computer to do.
e computer for controlling the hardware, applications do work for you.
oftware as there are things you could want
to do with a n, and database software.
which are formatted pages of text, such as letters or data, usually numbers, into columns and rows. It is used mostly for
features for doing mathematical operations. Presentation software is used to make simulated) slide shows and usually have all sorts of cool features for animations and sounds
organizing
complicated
2009
If it comes up, and it is like this one, you must type the correct username and password in boxes (1)
on the mouse)
means the computer is set not
instead a screen that says ‘Welcome’ somewhere came up, click the picture with the correct user name beside it, type in the
For the rest of this book we will only be saying ‘Enter’, if your keyboard says ‘Return’, just remember
and controls the computer
you want.
The ardware and the
important piece of software on the
oftware that mostly deal with buy Third Party u tilities, which means a d ifferent company made them than
computer. A basic Applications Software does the specific things you want the computer to do.
pplications
to do with a n, and database software.
which are formatted pages of text, such as letters or data, usually numbers, into columns and rows. It is used mostly for
features for doing mathematical operations. Presentation software is used to make simulated) slide shows and usually have all sorts of cool features for animations and sounds
that complicated
Desktop Publishing
2009
5
Chapter 2 - Various Components of an User Interfaces
Most computers use an OS called Microsoft® Windows®. Most OSs and programs have the same features whether they use Windows or not, but all computers running windows will have these features with these names. The thing we d id in the last section with the box that comes up when you turn on your computer is called logging in. The screen you see after logging in is called the Desktop. Most things on a computer are named after things in real life, and they are usually used similarly too. Just like a real desktop the desktop on a computer is where you go to access all your data.
Desktop The desktop is the area that comes up right after logging in. It contains icons.
Icons The picture that represents a program, data collection, or program function is known as an Icon. On the desktop are pictures with text labels under them, these pictures are called icons because they represent something else. If you move or get rid of an icon, all that means is that you have to access what they represent a d ifferent way, you haven’t gotten rid of the actual thing. Icons usually represent programs, but sometimes they represent collections of data. Double-clicking (clicking twice very fast) on one of these icons will open whatever it represents, the text tells you what it represents.
Taskbar The taskbar is the bar along one side of the desktop. There is a bar that is usually at the bottom of the desktop. However it may also be on any other side. If you cannot see it, then
move the cursor to the edge where it is and it will come up. It is used for launching programs or opening the window of an open program. Along the main part of the taskbar is a list of all open programs, clicking on one element of this list will put that program’s window (the box that a program is viewed in) on top of all other open windows. Over on one side of the taskbar is a clock; beside the clock are a bunch of icons that represent open ‘invisible’ programs. These are programs that are always running and do things ‘behind the scenes’. This area is called the system tray. On the main part of the taskbar there is sometimes a small group of icons, this is called the quick-launch bar. Clicking on one of these icons opens whatever it represents.
System Tray The system tray holds icons for programs currently running ‘behind-the-scenes’. On the opposite side of the start-bar from the clock and the system tray is a button. A button (or command button) is just like a real button, when it is pushed (clicked) it does something. Some buttons have text on them that say what they do, and some have icons representing what they do. Some have both.
(Command) Buttons Buttons do something when you click on them. They may be labeled by text, an icon, or both. The quick-launch icons are also buttons. Some buttons are raised to look like real buttons and some only rise up when you hover (put the cursor on top of) them. The button on the other side of the start-bar from the clock and
system tray is called the starthas icons for more programs and dataprograms.
Start-menu The start-menu contains icons for programs and data collections, usually for programs.the start-menu are indicated by a small symbol on top of the icon. Shortcuts are what I meant earlier when I said ‘if you move or get rid of an icon, all thatyou have to access what they represent a d ifferegotten rid ofprograms even if they are notdesktop and in the start
Shortcuts
represents whatever the shortcut
A Venn diagramon the startit will make a sub
Everything we just talked about is part of the Windows interface. An interface is just anything
two or more things. This interface goes between you and the computeralso say that the Operating System isbetween the hardware and software.
Interface
An interface is anything that goes between multiple things. A user-interface goesyou and the computer.are some standard things that are on most userWe have already tone, buttons. These things are called controls. B
system tray is called the starthas icons for more programs and data
Start-button The start-button is a button that opens the start
menu
menu contains icons for programs and data collections, usually programs.
The icons that are on the desktop, the quickmenu are usually
ind icated by a small symbol on top of the icon. Shortcuts are what I meant earlier when I said ‘if you move or get rid of an icon, all thatyou have to access what they represent a d ifferegotten rid of
the actual thing’. Icons represent all data collections and programs even if they are notdesktop and in the start
Shortcuts
represents whatever the shortcut
diagram
can maybeon the start-menu by clicking on it. If any iconit will make a sub-menu (a
Everything we just talked about is part of the Windows interface. An interface is just
that goes between two or more things. This interface goes between you
computer. Youalso say that the Operating System is
the interface between the hardware and
An interface is anything that goes between multiple things.
interface goes
between you and the computer.are some standard things that are on most user-interfaces. We have already talked aboutone, buttons. These things are called controls. Beside
system tray is called the start-button. When you clickhas icons for more programs and data
button
button is a button that opens the start
menu contains icons for programs and data collections, usually The icons that are on the desktop, the quick
usually
shortcuts. On the desktop shortcuts are often ind icated by a small symbol on top of the icon. Shortcuts are what I meant earlier when I said ‘if you move or get rid of an icon, all thatyou have to access what they represent a d iffere
the actual thing’. Icons represent all data collections and programs even if they are not
shortcuts, however normally the ones on the desktop and in the start-menu are shortcuts.
Icons that are only links to ticons and shortcuts is important so be sure you understand it. An iconpicture that is meant to convey what something is. The icon on the startrepresentslogo. Shortcu ts are a
represents whatever the shortcut
opens, however the same icon would be on the real thing as well.
can maybe
better show this, see Figure 2.2.menu by clicking on it. If any icon
menu (a
menu inside a menu) come out with
Everything we just talked about is part of the Windows interface. An interface is just
that goes between two or more things. This interface goes between you
You
could also say that the Operating
the interface between the hardware and
An interface is anything that goes between multiple things.
between you and the computer.
There are some standard things that
interfaces. alked about
one, buttons. These things are eside
is a
button. When you clickhas icons for more programs and data
collections, although it is usually
button is a button that opens the start
menu contains icons for programs and data collections, usually The icons that are on the desktop, the quick
shortcuts. On the desktop shortcuts are often ind icated by a small symbol on top of the icon. Shortcuts are what I meant earlier when I said ‘if you move or get rid of an icon, all thatyou have to access what they represent a d iffere
the actual thing’. Icons represent all data collections and shortcuts, however normally the ones on the
menu are shortcuts.
Icons that are only links to ticons and shortcuts is important so be sure you understand it. An iconpicture that is meant to convey what something is. The icon on the startrepresents
the fact that it is a major parlogo. Shortcu ts are a
link to a program or data collection; the icon on a shortcut opens, however the same icon would be on the real thing as well.
r show this, see Figure 2.2.menu by clicking on it. If any icon
has a rightmenu inside a menu) come out with
6
button. When you click
the start
collections, although it is usually
button is a button that opens the start-menu.
menu contains icons for programs and data collections, usually The icons that are on the desktop, the quick-launch bar, and
shortcuts. On the desktop shortcuts are often ind icated by a small symbol on top of the icon. Shortcuts are what I meant earlier when I said ‘if you move or get rid of an icon, all that
means is that you have to access what they represent a d ifferent way, you haven’t
the actual thing’. Icons represent all data collections and shortcuts, however normally the ones on the
Icons that are only links to the things those icons represent.icons and shortcuts is important so be sure you understand it. An iconpicture that is meant to convey what something is. The icon on the start
the fact that it is a major parlink to a program or data collection; the icon on a shortcut
opens, however the same icon would be on the real thing as well.
r show this, see Figure 2.2.
You open whatever is linked to by each shortcut has a right-arrow beside it, then hovering over it or clicking on
menu inside a menu) come out with
Desktop Publishing
the start-button it opens the startcollections, although it is usually
menu.
menu contains icons for programs and data collections, usually launch bar, and
shortcuts. On the desktop shortcuts are often ind icated by a small symbol on top of the icon. Shortcuts are what I meant
means is that nt way, you haven’t
the actual thing’. Icons represent all data collections and shortcuts, however normally the ones on the
he things those icons represent.icons and shortcuts is important so be sure you understand it. An iconpicture that is meant to convey what something is. The icon on the start
the fact that it is a major part of Windows, which is why it is a Windows link to a program or data collection; the icon on a shortcut
opens, however the same icon would be on the real thing as well.
You open whatever is linked to by each shortcut arrow beside it, then hovering over it or clicking on
menu inside a menu) come out with more shortcuts on it.
Desktop Publishing
button it opens the start-collections, although it is usually
menu contains icons for programs and data collections, usually launch bar, and
shortcuts. On the desktop shortcuts are often ind icated by a small symbol on top of the icon. Shortcuts are what I meant
means is that nt way, you haven’t
the actual thing’. Icons represent all data collections and shortcuts, however normally the ones on the
he things those icons represent.
The difference between icons and shortcuts is important so be sure you understand it. An iconpicture that is meant to convey what something is. The icon on the start
t of Windows, which is why it is a Windows link to a program or data collection; the icon on a shortcut
opens, however the same icon would be on the real thing as well.
You open whatever is linked to by each shortcut arrow beside it, then hovering over it or clicking on
more shortcuts on it.
Desktop Publishing
2009
-menu. The start
The d ifference between icons and shortcuts is important so be sure you understand it. An iconpicture that is meant to convey what something is. The icon on the start
t of Windows, which is why it is a Windows link to a program or data collection; the icon on a shortcut
opens, however the same icon would be on the real thing as well.
You open whatever is linked to by each shortcut arrow beside it, then hovering over it or clicking on
2009
enu. The start-menu
The d ifference between icons and shortcuts is important so be sure you understand it. An icon
is any picture that is meant to convey what something is. The icon on the start-button
t of Windows, which is why it is a Windows link to a program or data collection; the icon on a shortcut
You open whatever is linked to by each shortcut arrow beside it, then hovering over it or clicking on
table of some of the more common
You can get a basic description of what any control does by hovering your mouse over it. Atext will pop up. This is called a tool
Menus All menus something like this:
These are called mainmouse button overcameboxes that come up to ask you for information.
Shortcuts You can add shortcuts to your Desktop in a number of ways. The most common way is to:
3
table of some of the more common
u can get a basic description of what any control does by hovering your mouse over it. Awill pop up. This is called a tool
Menus
menus operate the same way as the start
something like this:
hese are called mainmouse button overcame
up when we started and shut down the computer we learned were calledboxes that come up to ask you for information.
Shortcuts - Creating ShortcutsYou can add shortcuts to your Desktop in a number of ways. The most common way is to:
3. Hover over this. When the subout find the
table of some of the more common
u can get a basic description of what any control does by hovering your mouse over it. Awill pop up. This is called a tool
operate the same way as the startsomething like this:
hese are called main-menus or simplymouse button over
something). These are called popupup when we started and shut down the computer we learned were called
boxes that come up to ask you for information.
Creating ShortcutsYou can add shortcuts to your Desktop in a number of ways. The most common way is to:
Hover over this. When the subout find the item labeled ‘Shortcut’ and
table of some of the more common
controls, starti
u can get a basic descrip tion of what any control does by hovering your mouse over it. Awill pop up. This is called a tool-tip (or a ToolTip).
operate the same way as the start
s or simply
menus. Other menus are opened by rightsomething). These are called popup
up when we started and shut down the computer we learned were calledboxes that come up to ask you for information.
Creating Shortcuts
You can add shortcuts to your Desktop in a number of ways. The most common way is to:
‘New’.
Hover over this. When the sub-menu pops item labeled ‘Shortcut’ and
7
controls, starting with buttons
u can get a basic description of what any control does by hovering your mouse over it. Atip (or a ToolTip).
Besides these there are also menus.
operate the same way as the start-menu. Some of
menus. Other menus are opened by rightsomething). These are called popup
up when we started and shut down the computer we learned were calledboxes that come up to ask you for information.
You can add shortcuts to your Desktop in a number of ways. The most common way is to:
1. Right click
2. On the popup‘New’.
menu pops item labeled ‘Shortcut’ and
ng with buttons.
u can get a basic description of what any control does by hovering your mouse over it. ABesides these there are also menus.
menu. Some of
them are found at the top of programs, and look
menus. Other menus are opened by rightsomething). These are called popup-menus. In the last chapter, the small windows that
up when we started and shut down the computer we learned were called
You can add shortcuts to your Desktop in a number of ways. The most common way is to:
Right click
on the desktop, which brings up the popup
the popup-menu there should be a
click it.
4. A dialoguewhere the program or data
5. Click the button bThe Browse button is a standard button that you will see often, clicking it always brings up ain which you can select programs and data collections.
6. Select the program or datawant to make a shortcutlabeled ‘OK’. The OK button isbutton on dialogueyou are done filling inthat data now. ‘OK’ is usually paired with ‘Cancel’ closes
Desktop Publishing
u can get a basic description of what any control does by hovering your mouse over it. ABesides these there are also menus.
them are found at the top of programs, and look
menus. Other menus are opened by rightmenus. In the last chapter, the small windows that
up when we started and shut down the computer we learned were called
You can add shortcuts to your Desktop in a number of ways. The most common way is to:
on the desktop, which brings up the popup
menu there should be a
A dialogue-box will come up asking you where the program or data
lick the button bThe Browse button is a standard button that you will see often, clicking it always brings up ain which you can select programs and data
Select the program or datawant to make a shortcutlabeled ‘OK’. The OK button isbutton on dialogue-boxes that you click to tell it that you are done filling in
that data now. ‘OK’ is usually paired with ‘Cancel’ closes
the dial
Desktop Publishing
u can get a basic description of what any control does by hovering your mouse over it. A
little thing with
Besides these there are also menus.
them are found at the top of programs, and look
menus. Other menus are opened by right-clicking (pushing the right menus. In the last chapter, the small windows that
up when we started and shut down the computer we learned were called
dialogue-boxes. These
You can add shortcuts to your Desktop in a number of ways. The most common way is to:
on the desktop, which brings up the popup
menu there should be a
sub
box will come up asking you where the program or data
collection is found.
lick the button beside labeled ‘Browse...’The Browse button is a standard button that you will see often, clicking it always brings up ain which you can select programs and data
Select the program or data
want to make a shortcut
to and click the button labeled ‘OK’. The OK button is
also a standard boxes that you click to tell it that
information and it can use that data now. ‘OK’ is usually paired with
the d ialogue-box without doing
Desktop Publishing
2009
little thing with
them are found at the top of programs, and look
clicking (pushing the right menus. In the last chapter, the small windows that
boxes. These
are
on the desktop, which brings up the popup-menu.
sub-menu labeled
box will come up asking you collection is found.
eside labeled ‘Browse...’The Browse button is a standard button that you will see often, clicking it always brings up a
dialogue-box in which you can select programs and data
collection you to and click the button
also a standard boxes that you click to tell it that
information and it can use that data now. ‘OK’ is usually paired with ‘Cancel’;
box without doing
little thing with
them are found at the top of programs, and look
clicking (pushing the right menus. In the last chapter, the small windows that
are
menu.
menu labeled
box will come up asking you
eside labeled ‘Browse...’. The Browse button is a standard button that you will
box in which you can select programs and data
collection you to and click the button
also a standard boxes that you click to tell it that
information and it can use ‘Cancel’;
box without doing
Desktop Publishing
2009
8
anything.
7. When you have selected the correct program or data collection click the button marked ‘Next >’. The Next button is, again, a standard button that tells the d ialogue box you are done this step and to go on to the next step in the process. It usually comes with the Back button to go to the previous step. This d ialogue-box also has a Cancel button.
8. After you have clicked ‘Next’ the d ialogue-box comes up with a text-box asking what you
want the text under the icon to be for this shortcut. When you have typed what you want into the box click ‘Finish’, another standard button.
9. NOTE: The true name of these buttons is above in bold . However it is common computer shorthand to say Click ‘OK’ instead of “Click the OK button”. We will be using this shorthand in this
book.
Renaming Shortcuts If you do not like the text under a shortcut, you can change it. There are three primary ways to do this.
1. The first one is to click on the shortcut, selecting it, and then push the ‘F2’ key on your keyboard . The text will become a text-box that you can type in to change what it says.
2. The second way is to right-click on the shortcut, bringing up its popup-menu, and select ‘Rename’ from the popup-menu. The same thing will happen.
3. Another way to cause it to happen is to select the icon and then click on it. Do not double-click! That will open whatever it links to, select it and then click.
Changing the icon of your Shortcut If you want to change the icon (picture) on your shortcut,
1. Bring up its popup-menu and select ‘Properties’.
2. Across the top of the window, just below the bar with the ‘X’ button on it (the title bar), there are a bunch of tabs, click the one labeled ‘Shortcut’.
3. Then, click the button labeled ‘Change Icon…’, in the d ialogue-box that comes up select the new icon that you want, or click ‘Browse’ to find more files with icons.
Desktop Publishing
2009
9
4. In this same window where the ‘Change Icon’ button is, there is a text-box labeled ‘Target’. It is the same as the box with a Browse button on the first step of adding a shortcut to the Desktop, only there is no browse button. That it what you change if you want the shortcut to link to something else.
Arranging Icons You can also move or sort icons on the Desktop. To sort them:
1. Right-click on the Desktop and hover over the sub-menu called ‘Arrange Icons By’.
2. Then click on the way you want them sorted . If you want them automatically sorted make sure the ‘Auto Arrange’ option is checked (you can check or uncheck it by clicking on it). If you have Auto Arrange off, you can put the icons wherever you want them.
3. Click on one and don’t let the button go back up. Move the cursor over to where you want the icon to be and it will move right along with it.
4. When you have it where you want it, let go of the mouse button. This is called dragging-and-dropping.
Removing or Deleting Icons If you want to take an icon off the desktop there are three major ways to do it.
1. You can select the icon you want to remove and push the ‘Delete’ key on your keyboard. A dialogue-box will come up. Click ‘Yes’.
2. You can also drag-and-drop the icon onto the recycle bin, which is an icon on the Desktop labeled exactly that.
3. You can right-click on the icon and click ‘Delete’. The same d ialogue-box will come up for you to click ‘Yes’ on. If you did it by accident you can click ‘No’ and it won’t remove the icon.
Changing Desktop Properties To access Desktop Properties: Right-click on the Desktop and select ‘Properties’ from the popup-menu.
Desktop Properties - Changing Wallpaper To change the wallpaper
1. Select the tab labeled ‘Wallpaper’ or ‘Desktop’.
2. To change the picture d isplayed for wallpaper select it from the list or if it is not in the list click ‘Browse…’.
3. There is a combo box from which you can select weather to stretch, tile (repeat by picture with itself together likes tiles), or centre the picture.
4. If you just want a colour for your wallpaper, then select ‘(None)’ from the list.
5. Sometimes there is a combo-type box to select the colour right there and sometimes you have to change it under the ‘Appearance’ tab.
Desktop Publishing
2009
10
Desktop Properties - Changing Screen-Saver The Screen-Saver is a program that shows up after your computer has not been used for so long so that the monitor will not get wrecked (which can happen if the same picture is d isplayed on it for hours at a time). To change the Screen-Saver
1. Click the tab labeled ‘Screen-Saver’.
2. There will be a combo box that lists all the Screen-Savers on your computer.
3. After you have selected the one you want you can change how long the computer waits before bringing it up in the text box with a spin button that is below the combo box.
Desktop Properties - Changing the Appearance You can also change the colour scheme of all the controls in almost all programs.
1. Click the ‘Appearance’ tab.
2. There is one or more combo boxes on this page that allow you to select different combinations of default colour schemes.
3. On this same page, or sometimes you have to click ‘Advanced’ to get there, are other settings.
4. You can select an element from one combo box, and then change its colour and how its text looks.
5. You can try experimenting with this if you want, just be sure to save your current settings so you can change back (which some versions of windows don’t allow, so don’t worry then).
6. You do this by clicking the ‘Save As…’ button and typing the name you want to call the colour scheme.
Desktop Properties - Changing the Screen Resolution and Colour Usage There is one final tab common to most versions of Windows. It is the ‘Settings’ tab. It is not recommended to change settings in this tab unless you know what you are doing. Some games will give errors when you try to start them like ‘256 colours required’ or ‘This program needs 640 × 480 to run’. This is where you set those.
1. There is a combo box here, selecting a d ifferent option from this box changes the number of colours your computer can d isplay. More colours mean more quality.
2. There is also a slider labeled ‘Screen resolution’. It increases or decreases the size of everything displayed on your monitor. The larger the numbers, the smaller things are, and the smaller things are the more you can fit. When this is set to make things smaller, some programs (or you can manually) change their stuff so that it looks the same size, allowing them to have more quality in display.
Memories in ComputersBefore we get into anything else we need a basic understanding computer box there are many d ifferent pieces of hardware used for storing data. OneA Computer’s memory is where it stores the data that is currently inletter open and are looking at or working on it therunning is stored in memorymeans that anythrough all the data in order so that it can find the right piece. There is another kind of memory(Readbasic information that every computer needs.
12
Drives in ComputersWhen a computer is turned off, everything in RAM is erased . Because this would cause you to lose your work all the time, d isks were created . Disks are round flat objects, but in computer slang they are pieces of data storage hardware that do not need elestored . There are other things that do this that are not d isks, however the things inside of all things called d isks are round and flat, so that is how the term came to be. All d isks need to be in another piece of hardware that acthem and the rest of the computer called a drive.
There are 12
Magnetic DisksMagnetic d isks are the old kind and are slowly being replaced . They store data by aligning little pieces of metal inside d ifferently using a magnet. Because of the way they store data magnetic d isks can be erased or completely destroyed by magnets, heat, a
12
Hard DisksHard d isks are used to store most of the data on a computer, and can store more than anything else canis normally installed into the computer box where you cannot see any part of it. Hard disks can store a lot of data, and are used to store most of the information on computers.
Floppy DisksFloppy d isks are used to transfer data between computers, bd isks are small d isks that you can pop in and out of their d rive. All you can see of their d rive is a slit ind ifferent d isks and then take them out and give them to someotransfer data between your computers.
Optical disksOptical disks are the newer kind of disk. The most popular kind of optical disk is
12
Memories in ComputersBefore we get into anything else we need a basic understanding computer box there are many d ifferent pieces of hardware used for storing data. OneA Computer’s memory is where it stores the data that is currently inletter open and are looking at or working on it therunning is stored in memorymeans that any
part of the information through all the data in order so that it can find the right piece. There is another kind of memory(Read-Only Memory). Readbasic information that every computer needs.
1. Random-access memory RAM is used to store the data the computer is currently using.2. Read-only memory ROM is used to store the basic information that every computer needs.
Drives in ComputersWhen a computer is turned off, everything in RAM is erased . Because this would cause you to lose your work all the time, d isks were created . Disks are round flat objects, but in computer slang they are pieces of data storage hardware that do not need elestored . There are other things that do this that are not d isks, however the things inside of all things called d isks are round and flat, so that is how the term came to be. All d isks need to be in another piece of hardware that acthem and the rest of the computer called a drive.
There are mainly two kinds of disks: 1. Magnetic 2. Optical.
Magnetic Disks
Magnetic disks are the old kind and are slowly being replaced. They store data by aligning little pieces of metal inside differently using a magnet. Because of the way they store data magnetic disks can be erased or completely destroyed by magnets, heat, a
1. Hard Disks2. Floppy Disks.
Hard Disks
Hard disks are used to store most of the data on a computer, and can store more than anything else canis normally installed into the computer box where you cannot see any part of it. Hard disks can store a lot of data, and are used to store most of the information on computers.
Floppy Disks
Floppy d isks are used to transfer data between computers, bd isks are small d isks that you can pop in and out of their d rive. All you can see of their d rive is a slit ind ifferent d isks and then take them out and give them to someotransfer data between your computers.
Optical disks
Optical disks are the newer kind of disk. The most popular kind of optical disk is 1. The Compact2. Digital Versatile Discs (DVDs)
Memories in Computers
Before we get into anything else we need a basic understanding computer box there are many d ifferent pieces of hardware used for storing data. OneA Computer’s memory is where it stores the data that is currently inletter open and are looking at or working on it therunning is stored in memory. This
part of the information through all the data in order so that it can find the right piece. There is another kind of memory
Only Memory). Read-only basic information that every computer needs.
access memory RAM is used to store the data the computer is currently using.only memory ROM is used to store the basic information that every computer needs.
Drives in Computers
When a computer is turned off, everything in RAM is erased . Because this would cause you to lose your work all the time, d isks were created . Disks are round flat objects, but in computer slang they are pieces of data storage hardware that do not need elestored . There are other things that do this that are not d isks, however the things inside of all things called d isks are round and flat, so that is how the term came to be. All d isks need to be in another piece of hardware that acthem and the rest of the computer called a drive.
two kinds of disks: Magnetic
Magnetic d isks are the old kind and are slowly being replaced . They store data by aligning little pieces of metal inside d ifferently using a magnet. Because of the way they store data magnetic d isks can be erased or completely destroyed by magnets, heat, a
Hard Disks
Floppy Disks.
Hard disks are used to store most of the data on a computer, and can store more than anything else can. Hard d isks are stored permanently inside their d rive, is normally installed into the com puter box w here you cannot see any part of it. Hard disks can store a lot of data, and are used to store most of the information on computers.
Floppy d isks are used to transfer data between computers, bd isks are small d isks that you can pop in and ou t of their d rive. All you can see of their d rive is a slit in
the computer box w ith a bu tton and a light. You can pu t in d ifferent d isks and then take them ou t and give them to someotransfer data between your computers.
Optical disks are the newer kind of disk. The most popular kind of optical disk is he Compact
Disc (CDDigital Versatile Discs (DVDs)
Chapter
Before we get into anything else we need a basic understanding computer box there are many d ifferent pieces of hardware used for storing data. OneA Computer’s memory is where it stores the data that is currently inletter open and are looking at or working on it the
. This
kind of memory is called RAM (Randompart of the information may be
through all the data in order so that it can find the right piece. There is another kind of memoryonly memory means that the data on it cannot be changed .
basic information that every computer needs.access memory RAM is used to store the data the computer is currently using.
only memory ROM is used to store the basic information that every computer needs.
When a computer is turned off, everything in RAM is erased . Because this would cause you to lose your work all the time, disks were created. Disks are round flat objects, but in computer slang they are pieces of data storage hardware that do not need elestored. There are other things that do this that are not disks, however the things inside of all things called disks are round and flat, so that is how the term came to be. All disks need to be in another piece of hardware that acthem and the rest of the computer called a drive.
two kinds of disks:
Magnetic d isks are the old kind and are slowly being replaced. They store data by aligning little pieces of metal inside d ifferently using a magnet. Because of the way they store data magnetic d isks can be erased or completely destroyed by magnets, heat, and dust. The two most popular forms of magnetic disks are
Hard d isks are used to store most of the data on a computer, and can store more Hard d isks are stored permanently inside their d rive,
is normally installed into the computer box where you cannot see any part of it. Hard disks can store a lot of data, and are used to store most of the information on computers.
Floppy d isks are used to transfer data between computers, bd isks are small d isks that you can pop in and out of their d rive. All you can see of
the computer box with a button and a light. You can put in d ifferent d isks and then take them out and give them to someotransfer data between your computers.
Optical disks are the newer kind of disk. The most popular kind of optical disk is Disc (CD)
Digital Versatile Discs (DVDs)
11
Chapter 3
Before we get into anything else we need a basic understanding computer box there are many d ifferent pieces of hardware used for storing data. OneA Computer’s memory is where it stores the data that is currently inletter open and are looking at or working on it the
computer stores it in memory. All the software currentlkind of memory is called RAM (Random
may be
read or changed randomly.through all the data in order so that it can find the right p iece. There is another kind of memory
means that the data on it cannot be changed .basic information that every computer needs.
access memory RAM is used to store the data the computer is currently using.only memory ROM is used to store the basic information that every computer needs.
When a computer is turned off, everything in RAM is erased . Because this would cause you to lose your work all the time, d isks were created . Disks are round flat objects, but in computer slang they are p ieces of data storage hardware that do not need elestored . There are other things that do this that are not d isks, however the things inside of all things called d isks are round and flat, so that is how the term came to be. All d isks need to be in another piece of hardware that acthem and the rest of the computer called a drive.
Magnetic d isks are the old kind and are slowly being replaced . They store data by aligning little pieces of metal inside d ifferently using a magnet. Because of the way they store data magnetic d isks can be erased or
nd dust. The two most popular forms of magnetic disks are
Hard d isks are used to store most of the data on a computer, and can store more Hard d isks are stored permanently inside their d rive,
is normally installed into the computer box where you cannot see any part of it. Hard disks can store a lot of data, and are used to store most of the information on computers.
Floppy d isks are used to transfer data between computers, bd isks are small d isks that you can pop in and out of their d rive. All you can see of
the computer box with a button and a light. You can put in d ifferent d isks and then take them out and give them to someo
Optical disks are the newer kind of disk. The most popular kind of optical disk is
3 - Memories and Storage Media
Before we get into anything else we need a basic understanding of how a computer stores data.computer box there are many d ifferent pieces of hardware used for storing data. OneA Computer’s memory is where it stores the data that is currently in
computer stores it in memory. All the software currentlkind of memory is called RAM (Random
read or changed randomly.through all the data in order so that it can find the right piece. There is another kind of memory
means that the data on it cannot be changed .
access memory RAM is used to store the data the computer is currently using.only memory ROM is used to store the basic information that every computer needs.
When a computer is turned off, everything in RAM is erased. Because this would cause you to lose your work all the time, d isks were created . Disks are round flat objects, but in computer slang they are pieces of data storage hardware that do not need electricity to keep the data stored . There are other things that do this that are not d isks, however the things inside of all things called d isks are round and flat, so that is how the term came to be. All d isks need to be in another piece of hardware that acts as an interface between
Magnetic d isks are the old kind and are slowly being replaced . They store data by aligning little pieces of metal inside d ifferently using a magnet. Because of the way they store data magnetic d isks can be erased or
nd dust. The two most popular forms of magnetic disks are
Hard d isks are used to store most of the data on a computer, and can store more Hard d isks are stored permanently inside their d rive,
is normally installed into the computer box where you cannot see any part of it. Hard disks can store a lot of data, and are used to store most of the information on computers.
Floppy d isks are used to transfer data between computers, but are very small.d isks are small d isks that you can pop in and out of their d rive. All you can see of
the computer box with a button and a light. You can put in d ifferent d isks and then take them out and give them to someone so that you can
Optical disks are the newer kind of disk. The most popular kind of optical disk is
Desktop Publishing
Memories and Storage Media
of how a computer stores data.computer box there are many d ifferent pieces of hardware used for storing data. OneA Computer’s memory is where it stores the data that is currently in
use. So, for example, when you have a
computer stores it in memory. All the software currentlkind of memory is called RAM (Random-Access Memory). Random
read or changed randomly.
The computer does not have to lookthrough all the data in order so that it can find the right piece. There is another kind of memory
means that the data on it cannot be changed .
access memory RAM is used to store the data the computer is currently using.only memory ROM is used to store the basic information that every computer needs.
When a computer is turned off, everything in RAM is erased . Because this would cause you to lose your work all the time, d isks were created . Disks are round flat objects, but in computer slang
ctricity to keep the data stored . There are other things that do this that are not d isks, however the things inside of all things called d isks are round and flat, so that is how the term came to be.
ts as an interface between
Magnetic d isks are the old kind and are slowly being replaced . They store data by aligning little pieces of metal inside d ifferently using a magnet. Because of the way they store data magnetic d isks can be erased or
nd dust. The two most popular forms of magnetic disks are
Hard d isks are used to store most of the data on a computer, and can store more Hard d isks are stored permanently inside their d rive, which
is normally installed into the computer box where you cannot see any part of it. Hard disks can store a lot of data, and are used to store most of the information on computers.
u t are very small.
Floppy d isks are small d isks that you can pop in and out of their d rive. All you can see of
the computer box with a button and a light. You can put in ne so that you can
Optical disks are the newer kind of disk. The most popular kind of optical disk is
Desktop Publishing
Memories and Storage Media
of how a computer stores data.computer box there are many d ifferent p ieces of hardware used for storing data. One
of these is the memory.
use. So, for example, when you have acomputer stores it in memory. All the software currentl
Access Memory). Randomhe computer does not have to look
through all the data in order so that it can find the right piece. There is another kind of memorymeans that the data on it cannot be changed .
ROM is used to store
access memory RAM is used to store the data the computer is currently using.
only memory ROM is used to store the basic information that every computer needs.
When a computer is turned off, everything in RAM is erased . Because this would cause you to lose your work all the time, d isks were created . Disks are round flat objects, but in computer slang
ctricity to keep the data stored . There are other things that do this that are not d isks, however the things inside of all things called d isks are round and flat, so that is how the term came to be.
ts as an interface between
Magnetic d isks are the old kind and are slowly being replaced . They store data by aligning little pieces of metal inside d ifferently using a magnet. Because of the way they store data magnetic d isks can be erased or
nd dust. The two most popular forms of magnetic disks are
Hard d isks are used to store most of the data on a computer, and can store more which
is normally installed into the computer box where you cannot see any part of it. Hard disks can store a lot of data, and are used to store most of the information on computers.
Floppy d isks are small d isks that you can pop in and out of their d rive. All you can see of
the computer box with a button and a light. You can put in ne so that you can
Desktop Publishing
2009
Memories and Storage Media
of how a computer stores data.
Inside the
of these is the memory. use. So, for example, when you have a
computer stores it in memory. All the software currentlAccess Memory). Random-access
he computer does not have to lookthrough all the data in order so that it can find the right piece. There is another kind of memory
called ROM ROM is used to store
only memory ROM is used to store the basic information that every computer needs.
When a computer is turned off, everything in RAM is erased . Because this would cause you to lose your work
Magnetic d isks are the old kind and are slowly being replaced . They store data by aligning little pieces of metal inside d ifferently using a magnet. Because of the way they store data magnetic d isks can be erased or
nd dust. The two most popular forms of magnetic disks are
Memories and Storage Media
Inside the
of these is the memory. use. So, for example, when you have a
computer stores it in memory. All the software currently access
he computer does not have to look
called ROM ROM is used to store
When a computer is turned off, everything in RAM is erased . Because this would cause you to lose your work
Magnetic d isks are the old kind and are slowly being replaced . They store data by aligning little pieces of metal inside d ifferently using a magnet. Because of the way they store data magnetic d isks can be erased or
The Compact Disc (CD) CDs can still be put
Digital Versatile Discs (DVDs)Digital Versatile Disstore much more information and transfer it at muchJapan that is smaller and faster than
Today you can also get memory cards that are calledcards that operate just like ROM thatcut.
All data on a on a computer. A file can store the instructions for a single program, or thecollections of files. So a file is lcollections, they store the data for a single thing.
The Compact Disc (CD) CDs can still be put into and taken out of their drive, making them good for buying
Digital Versatile Discs (DVDs)Digital Versatile Discs (DVDs) are another kind of Optical d isc that workstore much more information and transfer it at muchJapan that is smaller and faster than
Today you can also get memory cards that are calledcards that operate just like ROM that
All data on a computer is stored in collections called files and folders. A file is the most basicon a computer. A file can store the instructions for a single program, or thecollections of files. So a file is lcollections, they store the data for a single thing.
The Compact Disc (CD)
into and taken out of their drive, making them good for buying
nowadays for transferring data. Normal CDs that you buy with programs onCD-ROMs. They are called that because, like ROM, they are readget CD-Rs arespectively. Unlike floppy d isks that can store only 1.44 megabytes (MB, that’s 1 048 576usually we estimate that it is one million), CDs can store around 700MB! And, becauseCDs store their information with variations in the shape of the d isk that reflects a laserd ifferently they cannot be damaged as easily. However, you should still never touch the shiny surface of the CD.
Digital Versatile Discs (DVDs)
cs (DVDs) are another kind of Optical d isc that workstore much more information and transfer it at muchJapan that is smaller and faster than
Today you can also get memory cards that are calledcards that operate just like ROM that
computer is stored in collections called files and folders. A file is the most basicon a computer. A file can store the instructions for a single program, or thecollections of files. So a file is like a piece of paper and youcollections, they store the data for a single thing.
into and taken out of their drive, making them good for buyingnowadays for transferring data. Normal CDs that you buy with programs on
ROMs. They are called that because, like ROM, they are readRs and CD-RWs, which are not read
respectively.
Unlike floppy d isks that can store only 1.44 megabytes (MB, that’s 1 048 576usually we estimate that it is one million), CDs can store around 700MB! And, because
Ds store their information with variations in the shape of the d isk that reflects a laserd ifferently they cannot be damaged as easily. However, you should still never touch
surface of the CD.
cs (DVDs) are another kind of Optical d isc that workstore much more information and transfer it at much
DVDs and stores muc
Today you can also get memory cards that are calledcards that operate just like ROM that
isn’t read-only, so they don’t lose their information when the power is
computer is stored in collections called files and folders. A file is the most basicon a computer. A file can store the instructions for a single program, or the
ike a piece of paper and youcollections, they store the data for a single thing.
12
into and taken out of their drive, making them good for buying
nowadays for transferring data. Normal CDs that you buy with programs onROMs. They are called that because, like ROM, they are read
RWs, which are not read
Unlike floppy d isks that can store only 1.44 megabytes (MB, that’s 1 048 576usually we estimate that it is one million), CDs can store around 700MB! And, because
Ds store their information with variations in the shape of the d isk that reflects a laserd ifferently they cannot be damaged as easily. However, you should still never touch
surface of the CD.
cs (DVDs) are another kind of Optical d isc that workstore much more information and transfer it at much
higher speeds. There is also a new format coming in from DVDs and stores much more information!
Today you can also get memory cards that are called
flash memory or, more properly, EEPROMs. These are only, so they don’t lose their information when the power is
computer is stored in collections called files and folders. A file is the most basicon a computer. A file can store the instructions for a single program, or the
ike a piece of paper and you
put it in a folder.
Desktop Publishing
into and taken out of their drive, making them good for buyingnowadays for transferring data. Normal CDs that you buy with programs on
ROMs. They are called that because, like ROM, they are readRWs, which are not read-only and are not erasable and erasable,
Unlike floppy d isks that can store only 1.44 megabytes (MB, that’s 1 048 576usually we estimate that it is one million), CDs can store around 700MB! And, because
Ds store their information with variations in the shape of the d isk that reflects a laserd ifferently they cannot be damaged as easily. However, you should still never touch
cs (DVDs) are another kind of Optical d isc that work
identically to CDs, however they can higher speeds. There is also a new format coming in from
h more information!
flash memory or, more properly, EEPROMs. These are only, so they don’t lose their information when the power is
computer is stored in collections called files and folders. A file is the most basicon a computer. A file can store the instructions for a single program, or the
put it in a folder.
Desktop Publishing
into and taken out of their drive, making them good for buyingnowadays for transferring data. Normal CDs that you buy with programs on
ROMs. They are called that because, like ROM, they are readonly and are not erasable and erasable,
Unlike floppy d isks that can store only 1.44 megabytes (MB, that’s 1 048 576usually we estimate that it is one million), CDs can store around 700MB! And, because
Ds store their information with variations in the shape of the d isk that reflects a laserd ifferently they cannot be damaged as easily. However, you should still never touch
identically to CDs, however they can higher speeds. There is also a new format coming in from
h more information!
flash memory or, more properly, EEPROMs. These are only, so they don’t lose their information when the power is
computer is stored in collections called files and folders. A file is the most basicon a computer. A file can store the instructions for a single program, or the
data for a single letter. Folders are put it in a folder.
Files Files are the most basic data
Desktop Publishing
2009
into and taken out of their drive, making them good for buying
programs on, and
nowadays for transferring data. Normal CDs that you buy with programs onROMs. They are called that because, like ROM, they are read-only. You c
only and are not erasable and erasable,
Unlike floppy d isks that can store only 1.44 megabytes (MB, that’s 1 048 576usually we estimate that it is one million), CDs can store around 700MB! And, because
Ds store their information with variations in the shape of the d isk that reflects a laserd ifferently they cannot be damaged as easily. However, you should still never touch
identically to CDs, however they can higher speeds. There is also a new format coming in from
flash memory or, more properly, EEPROMs. These are only, so they don’t lose their information when the power is
computer is stored in collections called files and folders. A file is the most basic
collection of data data for a single letter. Folders are Files Files are the most basic data
2009
programs on, and
nowadays for transferring data. Normal CDs that you buy with programs on
them are
only. You c
an also
only and are not erasable and erasable,
Unlike floppy disks that can store only 1.44 megabytes (MB, that’s 1 048 576
bytes, usually we estimate that it is one million), CDs can store around 700MB! And, because
Ds store their information with variations in the shape of the disk that reflects a laser
differently they cannot be damaged as easily. However, you should still never touch
identically to CDs, however they can higher speeds. There is also a new format coming in from
flash memory or, more properly, EEPROMs. These are only, so they don’t lose their information when the power is
collection of data data for a single letter. Folders are Files Files are the most basic data
Desktop Publishing
2009
13
Chapter 4 - Files and Folders in Windows Managing Files and Folders using Windows Explorer Also called directories, folders are collections of files of similar types. It is very necessary to sort files properly into folders so that you can find them again. Many people have had to redo entire projects because they lost their file by putting it into the wrong folder. Most files are named with two parts. The first part of the filename is a description of the file. After this comes a ‘.’ followed by the second part. The second part of a filename is called the extension. Extensions are often three letters long and they tell you what kind of file it is. For example ‘exe’ files (files with an extension of ‘exe’) are programs. ‘Doc’ files are Microsoft Word documents. Besides saving (taking a file you have open in a program and writing it from memory onto a d isk) there are many other file operations. These can all be done using the same program. This program is a u tility called a file manager. There is a file manager that comes with Windows called Windows Explorer, or sometimes just Explorer. To open Explorer
1. Click on Start->All Programs-> Accessories->Windows Explorer.
Sometimes Explorer will start you off looking at your ‘My Documents’ folder, and sometimes it will start you off looking at d rive C (see Figure 4.5). Don’t worry if your window doesn’t look exactly like this. The details of the markings are as follows:
1) is the title bar 2) is the main menu. Below the menu is the toolbar. 3) is the icon representing a folder 4) is the icon representing a hard d isk, also called hard drive, because the d isks and the drive are in one,
sealed, box, (this one is called ‘C:’, all drives have a letter). 5) is the icon representing a file. 6) is what you click to view sub-folders. So, if there isn’t a tree (the part in the circle) below your hard
drive (which should be the icon in the left-hand pane, the part in the square, and should have a name followed by ‘(C:)’ as seen above with (4)) then click the ‘+’ (6) beside it.
Now we have a tree open below our hard drive showing us all the folders that are d irectly in the root of the hard drive. Now should be a good time to look at the standard conventions for d rives and paths. As you can see above, the drive letter is always is brackets after the name of a drive. The first (or only) floppy drive is almost always ‘A:’. If you have a second floppy drive it will be ‘B:’. Your first hard drive is ‘C:’ and your CD drive is ‘D:’. If you have more hard drives the other drives change accordingly (i.e. if you have a second hard drive that is ‘D:’ and your CD drive will become ‘E:’).
You can have folders inside folders as well as files, and the drive itself acts like a folder. So if you wanted to designate a file called ‘Letter.rtf’ that is in the folder ‘My Documents’ and that folder is found in the root of the
Desktop Publishing
2009
14
hard drive ‘C:’, you separate the elements with a back-slash ‘\ ’ and come up with ‘C:\ My Documents\ Letter.rtf’.
Now navigate to your ‘My Documents’ directory. It should be found at ‘C:\ My Documents’ or ‘C:\ Documents and Settings\ [Your Name]\ My Documents’.
NOTE: Navigate means to make it so you are looking at that in your file manager. For example to navigate to ‘C:\ My Documents’ you would open the tree on ‘C:’ like we did before (or by double-clicking on it in the right-hand pane). Then you would click the icon that is labeled ‘My Documents’, or double-click on this icon in the right-hand pane (that is, the part in the octagon).
Opening a File or Folder To open a file in its program, double-click on its icon in the right-hand pane.
Deleting a File or Folder To delete (remove) files is the same as removing shortcuts from the desktop.
Restoring a deleted file 1. If you accidentally delete a file you wanted, open the Recycle Bin (double-click on its desktop icon) 2. Right-click on the file 3. Select ‘restore’ from the popup-menu.
Emptying the Recycle Bin If you want to permanently get rid of all files in the Recycle Bin –
1. Right-click on the Recycle Bin 2. Select ‘Empty Recycle Bin’ from the popup menu. 3. Deleting or restoring folders works the same way.
Creating a File or Folder To create a folder –
1. Navigate to the folder you want the new folder in 2. Then right-click on a blank area of the right-hand pane to bring up the popup-menu 3. Then select ‘New->Folder’ from the menu. 4. Type the name of the folder and press ‘Enter’.
Copying / Moving Files or Folders Moving means that the file or folder goes to the new location and is no longer in the old location. Copying means that the file or folder stays where it is, and a duplicate is created in the new location.
To move a file or folder – 1. Simply drag-and-drop the file or folder from where it is in the right-hand pane on top of the folder
where you want it to be in either the right or left-hand pane.
To copy a file or folder – 1. You right-drag-and-drop i.e. drag-and-drop by hold ing down the right mouse button instead of the
left one from its old location on top of the new one 2. A popup-menu will come up asking if you want to copy, move, or create a shortcut to the file or folder 3. If you want to copy, select ‘Copy Here’
Searching for a File or Folder 1. Click on ‘Start->Search’ 2. Click ‘All files and folders’ 3. Once the text boxes are up you can select what drive or folder to search from the combo box
4
Managing File PropertiesDifferent kinds of files have d ifferent properties and d ifferent versions of Windows can have d ifferent kinds of properties allowed. You can experiment with these if you want. To open the properties for any file
123
45
Control PanelThe Control Panel is where you change almost all the main things come up looking totally different and you may be lost. If there is no icon in your control panel‘Display’ then your computer is running in a ‘User Friend ly’ mode. To switch out of it into the ‘normal’ view, look at the leftwindow and find the option called ‘Switch to classic view’ and click this. To open Contro
12
Desktop ThemesWe have already changed the way Windows looksto make it easier.
123
4
5
Installing and uninstalling programs1
23
45
If you want to remove a program1
4. The topmost text box is where you type all or part of the filesearches. To do this you type letters that are in the filename along with symbols called wildcards. The wildcards are ‘*’ and ‘?’. ‘*’ represents an infinite number of characters or nothing. ‘?’ represents exactly one chathat start with ‘Si’.
Managing File PropertiesDifferent kinds of files have d ifferent properties and d ifferent versions of Windows can have d ifferent kinds of properties allowed. You can experiment with these if you want. To open the properties for any file
1. Right-click on it and select ‘Properties’. 2. In the window that comes up you can change all the properties of the file that can be changed. 3. In this window it also shows the name and location of the file and its size in bytes, kilobytes (KB, 1 024
bytes, usually estimated at 1 000 bytes), or megabytes. 4. It also shows the attributes, the most commonly used and useful of which is the read5. When you check the
file. If you uncheck the box Windows will let programs change it again.
Control Panel
The Control Panel is where you change almost all the main things in Windows. come up looking totally different and you may be lost. If there is no icon in your control panel‘Display’ then your computer is running in a ‘User Friend ly’ mode. To switch out of it into the ‘normal’ view, look at the leftwindow and find the option called ‘Switch to classic view’ and click this. To open Control Panel
1. Click on Start2. Then choose Settings
Desktop ThemesWe have already changed the way Windows looksto make it easier.
1. Navigate to 2. Then double click on 3. In the window that opens, you can
from the drop down box near the top. 4. In the centre area, the d ifferent items will
to show you what that Theme looks like. 5. Click ‘Apply’ or ‘OK’ to change your setting
those determined by the Theme.
Installing and uninstalling programs1. Most programs
CDs. 2. You put the CD (or the first CD) in the drive3. It auto starts
program)
4. Follow the instructions5. Your program is ready to use.
f you want to remove a program1. Navigate to the Control Panel
The topmost text box is where you type all or part of the filesearches. To do this you type letters that are in the filename along with symbols called wildcards. The wildcards are ‘*’ and ‘?’. ‘*’ represents an infinite number of characters or nothing. ‘?’ represents exactly one character. So ‘?ello.doc’ would find ‘Hello.doc’ and ‘jello.doc’. ‘Si*.*’ would find all files that start with ‘Si’.
Managing File Properties
Different kinds of files have d ifferent properties and d ifferent versions of Windows can have d ifferent kinds of properties allowed. You can experiment with these if you want. To open the properties for any file
click on it and select ‘Properties’. In the window that comes up you can change all the properties of the file that can be changed. In this window it also shows the name and location of the file and its size in bytes, kilobytes (KB, 1 024 bytes, usually estimated at 1 000 bytes), or megabytes. It also shows the attributes, the most commonly used and useful of which is the readWhen you check the readfile. If you uncheck the box Windows will let programs change it again.
The Control Panel is where you change almost all the in Windows. Your Control Panel
come up looking totally different and you may be lost. If there is no icon in your control panel‘Display’ then your computer is running in a ‘User Friendly’ mode. To switch out of it into the ‘normal’ view, look at the left-hand side of the Control Panel window and find the option called ‘Switch to classic view’ and click this.
l Panel
lick on Start
Then choose Settings->Control Panel
Desktop Themes
We have already changed the way Windows looks
Navigate to Start->Settingsdouble click on Display
In the window that opens, you canfrom the drop down box near the top. In the centre area, the d ifferent items willto show you what that Theme looks like. Click ‘Apply’ or ‘OK’ to change your settingthose determined by the Theme.
Installing and uninstalling programsMost programs
nowadays come on one or more
You put the CD (or the first CD) in the driveauto starts
(automatically
ollow the instructionsYour program is ready to use.
f you want to remove a programavigate to the Control Panel
The topmost text box is where you type all or part of the filesearches. To do this you type letters that are in the filename along with symbols called wildcards. The wildcards are ‘*’ and ‘?’. ‘*’ represents an infinite number of characters or nothing. ‘?’ represents
racter. So ‘?ello.doc’ would find ‘Hello.doc’ and ‘jello.doc’. ‘Si*.*’ would find all files
Different kinds of files have d ifferent properties and d ifferent versions of Windows can have d ifferent kinds of properties allowed. You can experiment with these if you want. To open the properties for any file
click on it and select ‘Properties’. In the window that comes up you can change all the properties of the file that can be changed. In this window it also shows the name and location of the file and its size in bytes, kilobytes (KB, 1 024 bytes, usually estimated at 1 000 bytes), or megabytes. It also shows the attributes, the most commonly used and useful of which is the read
read-only check box and click OK, Windows won’t let any program change the file. If you uncheck the box Windows will let programs change it again.
The Control Panel is where you change almost all the Your Control Panel
come up looking totally different and you may be lost. If there is no icon in your control panel‘Display’ then your computer is running in a ‘User Friend ly’ mode. To switch out of it into the ‘normal’
hand side of the Control Panel window and find the option called ‘Switch to classic
>Control Panel
We have already changed the way Windows looks
>Settings->Control Panel Display icon.
In the window that opens, you can
select a theme from the drop down box near the top. In the centre area, the d ifferent items willto show you what that Theme looks like. Click ‘Apply’ or ‘OK’ to change your settingthose determined by the Theme.
Installing and uninstalling programs
nowadays come on one or more
You put the CD (or the first CD) in the drive(automatically
runs the installation
ollow the instructions
as per the wizardYour program is ready to use.
f you want to remove a program: avigate to the Control Panel
15
The topmost text box is where you type all or part of the filesearches. To do this you type letters that are in the filename along with symbols called wildcards. The wildcards are ‘*’ and ‘?’. ‘*’ represents an infinite number of characters or nothing. ‘?’ represents
racter. So ‘?ello.doc’ would find ‘Hello.doc’ and ‘jello.doc’. ‘Si*.*’ would find all files
Different kinds of files have d ifferent properties and d ifferent versions of Windows can have d ifferent kinds of properties allowed. You can experiment with these if you want. To open the properties for any file
click on it and select ‘Properties’.
In the window that comes up you can change all the properties of the file that can be changed. In this window it also shows the name and location of the file and its size in bytes, kilobytes (KB, 1 024 bytes, usually estimated at 1 000 bytes), or megabytes. It also shows the attributes, the most commonly used and useful of which is the read
check box and click OK, Windows won’t let any program change the file. If you uncheck the box Windows will let programs change it again.
The Control Panel is where you change almost all the Your Control Panel may
come up looking totally different and you may be lost. If there is no icon in your control panel
called ‘Display’ then your computer is running in a ‘User Friendly’ mode. To switch out of it into the ‘normal’
hand side of the Control Panel window and find the option called ‘Switch to classic
>Control Panel
We have already changed the way Windows looks. However Desktop Themes (or just Themes) are designed
>Control Panel
select a theme from the drop down box near the top.
In the centre area, the d ifferent items will
change to show you what that Theme looks like.
Click ‘Apply’ or ‘OK’ to change your settings to
nowadays come on one or more
You put the CD (or the first CD) in the drive
runs the installation
as per the wizard
The topmost text box is where you type all or part of the filesearches. To do this you type letters that are in the filename along with symbols called wildcards. The wildcards are ‘*’ and ‘?’. ‘*’ represents an infinite number of characters or nothing. ‘?’ represents
racter. So ‘?ello.doc’ would find ‘Hello.doc’ and ‘jello.doc’. ‘Si*.*’ would find all files
Different kinds of files have d ifferent properties and d ifferent versions of Windows can have d ifferent kinds of properties allowed. You can experiment with these if you want. To open the properties for any file
In the window that comes up you can change all the properties of the file that can be changed. In this window it also shows the name and location of the file and its size in bytes, kilobytes (KB, 1 024 bytes, usually estimated at 1 000 bytes), or megabytes.
It also shows the attributes, the most commonly used and useful of which is the readcheck box and click OK, Windows won’t let any program change the
file. If you uncheck the box Windows will let programs change it again.
owever Desktop Themes (or just Themes) are designed
select a theme
change
s to
nowadays come on one or more
runs the installation
Desktop Publishing
The topmost text box is where you type all or part of the filename. You can also create wildcard searches. To do this you type letters that are in the filename along with symbols called wildcards. The wildcards are ‘*’ and ‘?’. ‘*’ represents an infinite number of characters or nothing. ‘?’ represents
racter. So ‘?ello.doc’ would find ‘Hello.doc’ and ‘jello.doc’. ‘Si*.*’ would find all files
Different kinds of files have d ifferent properties and d ifferent versions of Windows can have d ifferent kinds of properties allowed. You can experiment with these if you want. To open the properties for any file
In the window that comes up you can change all the properties of the file that can be changed. In this window it also shows the name and location of the file and its size in bytes, kilobytes (KB, 1 024
It also shows the attributes, the most commonly used and useful of which is the readcheck box and click OK, Windows won’t let any program change the
file. If you uncheck the box Windows will let programs change it again.
owever Desktop Themes (or just Themes) are designed
Desktop Publishing
name. You can also create wildcard searches. To do this you type letters that are in the filename along with symbols called wildcards. The wildcards are ‘*’ and ‘?’. ‘*’ represents an infinite number of characters or nothing. ‘?’ represents
racter. So ‘?ello.doc’ would find ‘Hello.doc’ and ‘jello.doc’. ‘Si*.*’ would find all files
Different kinds of files have d ifferent properties and d ifferent versions of Windows can have d ifferent kinds of properties allowed. You can experiment with these if you want. To open the properties for any file
In the window that comes up you can change all the properties of the file that can be changed. In this window it also shows the name and location of the file and its size in bytes, kilobytes (KB, 1 024
It also shows the attributes, the most commonly used and useful of which is the read-only atcheck box and click OK, Windows won’t let any program change the
owever Desktop Themes (or just Themes) are designed
Desktop Publishing
2009
name. You can also create wildcard
searches. To do this you type letters that are in the filename along with symbols called wildcards. The wildcards are ‘*’ and ‘?’. ‘*’ represents an infinite number of characters or nothing. ‘?’ represents
racter. So ‘?ello.doc’ would find ‘Hello.doc’ and ‘jello.doc’. ‘Si*.*’ would find all files
Different kinds of files have d ifferent properties and d ifferent versions of Windows can have d ifferent kinds of properties allowed. You can experiment with these if you want. To open the properties for any file
In the window that comes up you can change all the properties of the file that can be changed.
In this window it also shows the name and location of the file and its size in bytes, kilobytes (KB, 1 024
only attribute.
check box and click OK, Windows won’t let any program change the
owever Desktop Themes (or just Themes) are designed
name. You can also create wildcard
searches. To do this you type letters that are in the filename along with symbols called wildcards. The wildcards are ‘*’ and ‘?’. ‘*’ represents an infinite number of characters or nothing. ‘?’ represents
racter. So ‘?ello.doc’ would find ‘Hello.doc’ and ‘jello.doc’. ‘Si*.*’ would find all files
Different kinds of files have different properties and different versions of Windows can have different kinds of
In this window it also shows the name and location of the file and its size in bytes, kilobytes (KB, 1 024
check box and click OK, Windows won’t let any program change the
owever Desktop Themes (or just Themes) are designed
Desktop Publishing
2009
16
2. Open Add/Remove Programs 3. A list of all the programs on your computer will be displayed. 4. To remove a program (uninstall it), click on it in the list 5. Then click ‘Change/Remove’ and follow the wizard, if any.
Managing User Accounts When we log on to the computer, some computers don’t have a password to log on and never show the box. Some computers can be set up to have multiple usernames and passwords (accounts) so that you can log into d ifferent desktops. How can we set all this up?
6. From the Control Panel, choose User Accounts on your Control Panel.
7. To create a new desktop click ‘Create a new account’.
8. The computer will ask you what you want to call the new account, this is the username.
9. Click ‘Next’. 10. The computer will then ask you if you
want this account to be a ‘Computer administrator’ or ‘Limited’ account.
11. It is recommended to run most desktops as limited account. However, there are some programs that do not function well this way. There are also many things you cannot do from a limited account (like create a new account, so if the instructions in this paragraph don’t work for you, then it is because you have a limited account).
12. Click ‘Create Account’ and you have a new user environment
Changing a User Profile The User Account window gives you the list of options of what you can change.
1. You can change the account name by clicking on the first option.
2. You can also change the password by clicking the second option
3. You can make your account password-less with the third option.
4. To change the picture representing the account you use the fourth option.
5. You change the account type from administrator to limited and vice-versa with the fifth option,
6. You can also assign a ‘.NET Passport’ to the account with the fifth option.
7. All of these options save the last one are self explanatory. 8. If you have multiple desktops on your computer and the account selected is not the account that is
currently logged on, then there appears a sixth option ‘Delete the account’. This option starts a wizard to remove the user from the computer.
9. You can change the ‘Welcome screen’ to the normal log-on box. To do this select ‘Change the way users log on or off’ from the main ‘User Accounts’ screen. Then uncheck ‘Use the Welcome screen’ and click ‘Apply Options’.
Desktop Publishing
2009
17
Viruses Computer viruses work much the same way as normal ones. They ‘infect’ a computer by getting their files on its hard disk. They then begin to copy themselves all over the computer and onto anything that might carry them to another computer, such as floppy d isks and emails (more on emails when we talk about the Internet). They also do damage while they are on the computer. Many viruses do annoying things, like playing a song or slowing the computer down, however some of them delete files and erase crucial data. Therefore many people get Virus Scanners.
Virus Scanners There are some major benefits to scanners. The biggest one being that they will destroy many (and maybe all) of the viruses on your computer. Their d isadvantages are that they must be updated regularly, and they slow your computer down. They also give a false sense of security, making you think you are well protected when they may have missed something.
Hackers and crackers Crackers are people who break into computers. Sometimes they do it for fun, sometimes for profit, sometimes to show off. They often touch nothing. Sometimes they will take data or erase it. They tend to prefer government or corporate targets and seldom do serious hackers target normal people. However, to protect against the theft of data, many people run firewalls. A similar term, hacker, is often used to refer to crackers, however the term hacker more properly refers to someone who knows how to exploit a computer system for beneficial purposes.
Firewalls Firewalls are p ieces of software that identify hacker-like things and cut them off, providing a huge measure of protection for the home user.
Error Messages Error messages do not always indicate an error (or at least, not what you call error messages). Many so-called error messages are simply the program asking for more information. The first thing to do when you see an error message is to read it. Many computer experts may seem to violate this ru le: that is often because they recognize common messages and know what they say without reading it.
18
MICROSOFT WORD 2007 Chapter 5 - Exploring Word 2007 Screen Elements
The Word 2007 User Interface Description of some important elements Word 2007 Interface of are as follows: 1. Office button: Opens the
Office menu, from which you can open, save, print, and start new presentations.
2. Quick Access Toolbar: A small toolbar next to the Office button contains shortcuts for some of the most common commands.
3. Tit le bar: Identifies the Word program running and the name of the active presentation.
4. Minimize button: Shrinks the application window to a bar on the taskbar; you click its button on the taskbar to reopen it.
5. Maximize/Restore button: If the window is maximized (full screen), click will changes it to windowed (not full screen) and vice versa.
6. Close ( Quit ) button: Closes the application.
7. Ribbon: Functions as a combination of menu bar and toolbar, offering tabbed "pages" of buttons, lists, and commands.
8. View buttons: Allow you to see the active Word window/page in different views.
9. Status bar: Reports information about the presentation and provides shortcuts for changing the view and the zoom.
The Word 2007 Ribbon The W ord 2 0 0 7 Ribbon is a bar across the top of the window that contains tabbed pages of commands and
icons/buttons. It replaces the previous versions menu bar and drop down menus. The ribbon is designed to help you quickly find the commands that you need to complete a task. The ribbon is divided into eight tabs
by default, and each tab is a selection of groups
that show related items together. Command buttons
in each group carry out a command or display a menu of commands. Similar commands are grouped together making the ribbon very task oriented. The more popular commands are available directly on each tab; you can directly access the command by clicking on the command icons/buttons.
Desktop Publishing
2009
19
Here are the elements in a Word 2007 ribbon:
1. Ribbon: The whole bar, including all of the tabs. 2. Tab: A tabbed page of the Ribbon such as Home, Insert, etc. Every tab contains several groups and
every group has it own command icons. 3. Group: A section of a tab. For example, the Home tab has the following groups: Clipboard, Font,
Paragraph, Styles, and Editing. 4. Dialog box launcher: A small icon in the bottom-right corner of a group, from which you can open a
dialog box related to that group.
There is no way to delete or replace the Ribbon with the toolbars and menus from the earlier versions of Microsoft Office. However, you can minimize the Ribbon to make more space available on your screen.
To minimize the Ribbon 1. Click Customize Quick Access Toolbar. 2. From the drop-down menu, click Minimize the
Ribbon. 3. To use the Ribbon while it is minimized, click the tab
you want to use, and then click the option or command you want to use.
4. Click Customize Quick Access Toolbar. 5. From the drop-down menu, click the Minimize the
Ribbon again.
Note: To quickly minimize the Ribbon, double-click the name of the active tab. Double-click a tab again to restore the Ribbon Keyboard shortcut: To minimize or restore the Ribbon, press Ctrl+F1.
Desktop Publishing
2009
20
Chapter 6 - Formatting and Editing Documents
Working with Clipboard The Microsoft Office Clipboard allows you to copy multiple text and graphical items from Office documents or other programs and paste them into another Office document. For example, you can copy text from an e-mail message, data from a workbook or datasheet, and a graphic from a presentation and then paste them all into a document. By using the Office Clipboard, you can arrange the copied items the way that you want in the document.
H ow the Clipboard Works The Office Clipboard works with the standard Copy and Paste commands. Just copy an item to the Office Clipboard to add it to your collection, and then paste it from the Office Clipboard into any Office document at any time. The collected items stay on the Office Clipboard until you exit all Office programs or you delete the items from the Clipboard task pane.
After you exit all Office programs, only the last item that you copied stays on the Office Clipboard. When you exit all Office programs and restart your computer, the Office Clipboard is cleared of all items.
The Office Clipboard and the system Clipboard The Office Clipboard is related to the system Clipboard in Microsoft Windows in the following ways:
1. When you copy multiple items to the Office Clipboard, the last item that you copy is always copied to the system Clipboard.
2. When you clear the Office Clipboard, the system Clipboard is also cleared. 3. When you use the Paste command, the Paste button, or the keyboard shortcut CTRL+V, you paste the
contents of the system Clipboard, not the Office Clipboard.
Turn on the Office Clipboard To display the Office Clipboard in the task pane (task pane: A window within an Office application that provides commonly used commands. Its location and small size allow you to use these commands while still working on your files.), do the following in these Office programs: 1 ) Access, Excel, Outlook, PowerPoint, or Word
a) On the Home tab (Message tab in Outlook), in the Clipboard group, click the Clipboard Dialog Box Launcher.
2 ) Publisher or SharePoint Designer a) On the Edit menu, click Office Clipboard.
Control how the Office Clipboard is displayed You can use the following options to control how the Office Clipboard is displayed. 1) In the Clipboard task pane, click Options. 2) Click the options that you want.
a) Show Office Clipboard Autom at ically - Automatically displays the Office Clipboard when copying items.
b) Show Office Clipboard When CTRL+C Pressed Twice - Automatically displays the Office Clipboard when you press CTRL+C twice.
c) Collect without Show ing Office Clipboard - Automatically copies items to the Office Clipboard without displaying the Clipboard task
Desktop Publishing
2009
21
pane. d) Show Office Clipboard I con on Taskbar -
Displays the Office Clipboard icon in the status area of the system taskbar when the Office Clipboard is
active. This option is turned on by default. e) Show Status Near Taskbar When Copying - Displays the collected item message when copying items
to the Office Clipboard. This option is turned on by default.
Turn off the Office Clipboard Do any of the following: 1. In the Clipboard task pane, click the Close button. 2. In the Clipboard task pane, click the arrow, and then on the menu, click Close. 3. Press F6 to give the Clipboard task pane the focus. Press CTRL+SPACEBAR, and then, using the DOWN
ARROW key, scroll to Close and press ENTER.
Copy multiple items to the Office Clipboard 1. Open the file that you want to copy items from. 2. Select the first item that you want to copy. 3. Do one of the following in these Office programs: 4. Access, Excel, Outlook, PowerPoint, or Word
a. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click Copy. b. Keyboard shortcut CTRL+C
5. Publisher or SharePoint Designer a. On the Edit menu, click Copy. b. Keyboard shortcut CTRL+C
6. Continue copying items from the same or other files until you have collected all of the items that you want. The Office Clipboard can hold up to 24 items. If you copy a twenty-fifth item, the first item on the Office Clipboard is deleted.
7. If you open the Clipboard task pane in one Office program, the Clipboard task pane does not automatically appear when you switch to another Office program. However, you can continue to copy items from other programs. If the Show Status Near Taskbar When Copying option is selected (to verify, click Options in the Clipboard task pane), a message is displayed above the status area to indicate that an item has been added to the Office Clipboard.
8. As items are added to the Office Clipboard, an entry is displayed in the Clipboard task pane. The newest entry is always added to the top. Each entry includes an icon representing the source Office program and a portion of copied text or a thumbnail of a copied graphic.
Notes: 1. The Office Clipboard is not available in views where the Copy, Cut, and Paste commands are not available. 2. Collected items remain on the Office Clipboard until you exit all Office programs that are running on your
computer or click Clear All in the Clipboard task pane. For more information, see Delete items from the Office Clipboard.
3. In some cases, such as Unicode (Unicode: A character encoding standard developed by the Unicode Consortium. By using more than one byte to represent each character, Unicode enables almost all of the written languages in the world to be represented by using a single character set.) text, the image displayed in the task pane looks slightly altered. This is because text is always displayed in the task pane by using the Tahoma font. However, the correct formatting and font information is restored when the item is pasted from the task pane.
4. The Office Clipboard does not support copying Office Access objects, such as a form or report.
Paste items You can paste items from the Office Clipboard individually or all at the same time. Click where you want the items to be pasted. You can paste collected items into any Office program. Do one of the following:
1. To paste items one at a time, in the Clipboard task pane, double-click each item that you want to paste. 2. To paste all the items that you copied, in the Clipboard task pane, click Paste All.
Desktop Publishing
2009
22
Working with Fonts
Drop Cap
A drop cap is the first letter of a report, article, chapter, or story that appears in a larger than normal and more interesting font than the other characters. So it occupies several lines of the paragraph.
Drop caps can be used to add style to a document and draw attention to something in the document. Maybe you are not aware that you seems the drop cap before, just you don’t know that it’s a drop cap. There are basically two styles of drop caps, dropped and in margin. Here it looks like.
To add a drop caps to your document:
1. Type your paragraph as you normally would. 2. Select the first character of the first word at the start of your paragraph. 3. Click the Insert tab of the Ribbon. 4. In the Text group, click Drop Cap then click on Drop Cap Options. 5. From the Drop Cap dialog box displayed, in the Position section, you can
choose either Dropped or in margin option 6. Change any other options to format your drop cap 7. Click on OK
Add Shading to Highlight Text in Word 2007
Adding shade to your document text can grab reader’s attention. What if you want to draw attention to an entire paragraph? One option is to shade the entire paragraph in a different color, making it stand out from the rest. This shading can be added in conjunction with any border you may specify for the paragraph. Word 2007 even allows you to precisely control the degree of shading.
To add shading to a paragraph 1. Position the insertion point in the paragraph that you want to
shade. 2. Click the Home tab from the Ribbon. 3. In the Paragraph group, click the down-arrow to the right of
the Shading tool. 4. From the shading color palette displayed, select any one of the
theme colors of the palette. There are ten colors, and each option under the colors represents a different percentage of shading for that color.
To remove shading from a paragraph 1. Position the insertion point in the paragraph with shading applied.
Font Selection Box
Font Size Selection Box
Bold, Italic, Underline and Strike-through
Superscript and Subscript
Increase /Decrease Font Size
Change Case
Desktop Publishing
2009
23
2. Click the Home tab from the Ribbon. 3. In the Paragraph group, click the down-arrow to the right of the Shading tool. 4. From the shading color palette displayed, select No Color. Then, the paragraph shading will be removed.
Word 2007 Styles: How to Use it?
A style is a set of formatting instructions. In another term, it is a way to give a name to a group of formatting attributes such as font formatting (color, size, etc), paragraph formatting (alignment, spacing, etc). Microsoft Word 2007 allows you to create your own Word styles and also come with a number of built-in styles. Among the most important built-in styles are the standard heading styles: Heading 1, Heading 2, Heading 3, etc. For example, you might use Title Heading for chapter titles, Heading 1 for section headings, Heading 2 for the sub-headings, etc. Once you have defined a style, you can quickly and easily format text simply by applying the style without the need to apply text formatting individually. Styles can save a lot of time and help insure consistency in your documents.
With the headings styles, Word can automatically create a table of contents (TOC), and you also can use headings to define cross-references. Here we show you how to use styles to create a TOC later.
These styles are on the Home tab, in the Styles group.
To apply the Style 1. Place the cursor in the chapter title or
heading in your document.
2. In the Styles group, click on a suitable heading such as Title for the highest level, Heading 1 for the next level, etc.
3. To see more styles, click the More icon in the Styles group and you can choose any intended style.
Note: For each chapter title and heading, you need to apply the style.
The heading styles and the TOC work together as Word designate Heading 1 titles to the highest level in the TOC. Heading 2 corresponds to the next highest level; and Heading 3 is the following level.
Using Headings to Create a Table of Contents
How to create a table of contents easily using Word 2007?
A table of contents (TOC) is very useful for a long document. For example, you can use TOC to quickly browse through what are the contents of a long document. Adding a TOC to your document is simple if you have included styles (either build-in style such as Heading 1, Heading 2, etc or custom styles). Many people try to create a table of contents manually, without using the built-in process in Microsoft Word. There are two steps you take to create a TOC -
1. Prepare your document by assigning heading styles that you want to appear in the TOC. 2. Apply those headings into the TOC. 3. After the heading styles are applied, it's time to collect them all together in the TOC.
To create a Table of Contents 1. Position the insertion point where you want the TOC to appear, usually at the beginning of the document. 2. Click the References tab of the ribbon.
Desktop Publishing
2009
24
3. From the Table of Contents group, click Table of Contents icon. Word displays a drop-down list of TOC options.
4. Click either Automatic Table 1 or Automatic Table 2, whichever TOC looks best to you in the instant preview.
To modify a Table of Contents 1. Position the insertion point where you want the
TOC inserted. 2. Click the References tab of the ribbon. 3. From the Table of Contents group, click Table of
Contents icon. Word displays a drop-down list of TOC options.
4. Click Insert Table of Contents. Word displays the Table of Contents tab of the Table of Contents
dialog box. 5. In the Table of Contents dialog box, make sure that the
Formats drop-down list is set to From Template. 6. Click Modify button. 7. From the Style dialog box displayed, click TOC 1 to select
the highest level, or Level 1, in the TOC, and then click Modify.
8. From the Modify Style dialog box displayed, change the necessary options in the Formatting section (i.e. use the Font color box to change the color to blue).
Adjusting the Width of Characters in Word Document
Sometime you may need to adjust the horizontal size or width of characters in your document. Actually, Word provides you a way to do so and the scaling can be applied to any characters in a selection.
To format the horizontal size of characters 1. Select the characters you want to adjust.
2. Display the Font dialog box by pressing Ctrl + D .
3. From the Font dialog box displayed, click on the
Character Spacing tab.
4. Use the Scale drop-down menu to specify the
scaling you want applied to the characters. You
can select from a pre-defined scale, or enter any
value between 1% and 600%.
5. Click on OK.
Note: If you find you have a need to scale quite a few selections in your documents, you can add a scaling
tool to the Quick Access Toolbar (QAT). With the Character Scaling tool in place, you can easily change the
scaling of any selected text at any time.
Desktop Publishing
2009
25
To add a scaling tool to the QAT 1. Click the Office but ton and then click
W ord Opt ions. Word displays the Word Options dialog box.
2. At the left side of the dialog box, click the Customize option.
3. Using the Choose Com m ands From drop-down list, choose All Commands.
4. Scroll through the list of commands until you find the Character Scaling command.
5. Select the command by clicking it once. 6. Click the Add button. The command now
appears at the right side of the dialog box.
7. Click the OK button. The command now appears on the Quick Access toolbar.
Editing Style 1. Click on OK to close the Modify Style dialog
box. 2. Click on OK again to close the Style dialog box. 3. Look in the Print Preview area of the Table of
Contents dialog box and you will see that TOC 1 (or Level1) is now blue.
4. After you click the final OK, a message appears asking if you want to replace the TOC.
5. Click OK.
Note: If you want to change TOC 2 (Level 2) or TOC 3 (Level 3) to be blue also, you would do the same procedure selecting TOC 2 or TOC 3 in the Style dialog box before proceeding to the Modify Style dialog box.
The TOC is automatically updated whenever you open the document; but it's a good idea to also update it whenever you add more titles or headings in your document or when you add more content that may affect the page
numbers that appear in the TOC.
To update a Table of Contents 1. Click the References tab of the ribbon. 2. From the Table of Contents group, click the
Update Table icon. 3. From the Update Table of Contents dialog box
displayed, you have two options to choose: 4. Update page num bers only: If you've added
body text but no new headings (this option is faster). Update entire table: If you have added or changed a chapter title or heading.
Note: Avoid editing entries in the TOC itself; if you ever update the TOC you will lose those changes. To change text that appears in the TOC, be sure to edit this text in the body of the document and then click Update Table to compile the changes.
Desktop Publishing
2009
26
Word 2007 page break Page breaks force the following text, table or image to appear on the next page. So, there are few things you need to take care when using a page break, such as:
1. Prevent a page break in the middle of a paragraph
2. Prevent a page break between paragraphs
3. Specify a page break before a paragraph
You can insert a page break anywhere in your document, or you can specify where Microsoft Word positions automatic page breaks. There are a two ways of inserting page breaks into your Microsoft Word 2007 documents:
To insert a page break
1. Click where you want to start a new page. 2. On the Insert tab, in the Pages group, click Page Break. 3. Alternatively, you can press Ctrl + Enter to insert a
page break.
To prevent page breaks between paragraphs
1. Select the paragraphs that you want to keep together on
a single page.
2. On the Page Layout tab, click the Paragraph Dialog
Box Launcher, and then click the Line and Page Breaks
tab.
3. Under the Pagination section, select the Keep w ith
next check box.
4. Click OK.
5. Then, apply the page break.
To prevent page breaks in the middle of a paragraph
1. Select the paragraph that you want to prevent from breaking onto two pages.
2. On the Page Layout tab, click the Paragraph Dialog Box Launcher, and then click the Line and Page Breaks tab.
3. Under the Pagination section, select the Keep lines together check box.
4. Click OK. 5. Then, apply the page break.
To specify a page break before a paragraph
1. Click the paragraph that you want to follow the page break. 2. On the Page Layout tab, click the Paragraph Dialog Box Launcher, and then click the Line and Page
Breaks tab. 3. Under the Pagination section, select the Page break before check box. 4. Click OK. 5. Then, apply the page break.
Desktop Publishing
2009
27
Chapter 4 – Working with Tables, Spellings and Grammar
Inserting Table There are three ways to insert a table in Word 2007 document:
1. Clicking the Table button creates a table with the number of columns and rows you select from the grid, with all the cells of equal size.
2. You can use the Insert Table dialog box, where you can specify the number of rows and columns as well as their sizes.
3. You can also create a table by drawing cells the size you want. 4. When table was created, you can then enter text, numbers, and
graphics into the table's cells, which are the boxes at the intersections of a row and a column.
To Insert a Table (method 1)
1. Click the Insert tab of the Ribbon. 2. In the Table group, click the Table icon. Word displays a drop-
down list. 3. Drag the intended table columns and rows from the table grid.
For example, 5 X 5 tables. The table will automatically insert into the document.
To Insert a Table (method 2)
1. Click the Insert tab of the Ribbon. 2. In the Table group, click the Table icon. 3. From the drop-down list displayed, click the I nsert Table
command. 4. From the I nsert Table dialog box displayed, in the Table size
section, specify the Number of columns and Number of rows of the table.
5. Click OK. 6. As an alternative to using the
convenient I nsert Table command, you can use Word's draw a table feature.
To Draw a Table
1. Click the Insert tab of the Ribbon. 2. In the Table group, click the Table icon. Word displays a drop-down
list. 3. Click on Draw Table from the list of options. Word changes to Print
Layout view (if you are not already in that view) and changes the mouse pointer so it looks like a pencil.
4. Use the mouse pointer to define the outside borders of your table, much as you would draw in a drawing program.
5. Use the pencil to draw the columns and rows into the table. 6. Press Esc when you are done.
To delete a column in a table 1. Move your mouse pointer to the top of the table column that you wish to delete until you see a small
arrow pointing downward and click once. The entire column is highlighted. 2. Right-click on the highlighted column and click on Delete Columns.
Desktop Publishing
2009
28
To create table with specific column widths
1. Create a one-row, three-column table. This one-row table should fill the whole width of your document, from margin to margin.
2. Use the mouse to adjust the width of the first two columns, making the column widths as wide as
you need. 3. Place the insertion point in the third column of the table. 4. From the Table Tools Layout tab, in the Merge group, click the
Split Cells icon. 5. From the Split Cells dialog box displayed, in the Number of
columns control box, specify that you want the cell split into 8 columns.
6. Click OK.
To delete a column in a table 1. Move your mouse pointer to the top of the table
column that you wish to delete until you see a small arrow pointing downward and click once. The entire column is highlighted.
2. Right-click on the highlighted column and click on Delete Columns.
To delete a row in a table 1. Move your mouse pointer to the left of the table
row that you wish to delete until you see an arrow pointing inward and click once. The entire row is highlighted.
2. Right-click on the highlighted row and click on Delete Rows.
To delete the entire table 1. Highlight the entire table that you wish to delete. 2. On the Table Tools Layout tab, in the Rows & Columns group,
click on Delete icon and click the Delete Table option.
Desktop Publishing
2009
29
To turn off the editing language 1. Click the Office Button then select the Word Options button. 2. From the Word
Options dialog box displayed, on the Popular tab, click the Language Settings button.
3. From the Microsoft Office Language Settings 2007 dialog box displayed, verify that your preferred language is selected under Primary editing language.
4. Under the Enabled editing languages: section, select any unwanted languages and click the Remove button.
5. Click OK. 6. Now Word 2007 will only check the spelling and grammar for your preferred language so you should see
less of those annoying squiggly lines.
Handling Line Spacing in Word 2007 If you take advantage of styles in your Word documents, they can make your formatting much more consistent and easier than formatting manually. You can define styles for all sorts of elements in your documents.
One of the most common document elements to format is different heading levels. When formatting headings, it is not unusual to set them off from surrounding text by adding additional space before them. Word lets you do this in the style definition for the heading. You can specify virtually any amount of additional space before the heading that you want.
When the heading style includes additional space before the paragraph, you may be surprised when Word sometimes fails to add that expected space. For example, when the heading appears right after a page break or a column break, Word normally doesn't include that extra space. Instead, the heading appears right up at the top of the page or column.
Adjusting spaces
1. Click the Office But ton and then click Word Options.
2. From the W ord Opt ions dialog box displayed, click Advanced at the left of the dialog box.
3. Scroll to the bottom of the options in the dialog box.
4. Click the plus sign to the left of Layout Opt ions. Word shows a long list of compatibility options it can use.
5. Scroll through the list of options until you find the option called Suppress Space Before after a hard page or column break.
Desktop Publishing
2009
30
6. If the check mark beside this option is selected, then Word ignores your "space before" specification when the paragraph with that specification occurs right after a page break or a column break. If it is not selected, then your "space before" setting is honored in these instances.
7. Click OK.
You should note that if your heading style specifies space before the heading, and that heading naturally falls at the top of a page, Word suppresses that extra space, no matter what. The reason is because Word "eats up" the extra space, as if it was really at the bottom of the previous page.
Proofreading Documents in Word 2007
Word 2007 automatically proofreads your document for grammar, spelling, and style errors as you type. You can correct the errors immediately as they occur or at the end of your Word session.
You can customize how Word proofreads your documents by setting the desired proofreading options before you work on your document.
To proof read your Word documents
1. Click the Office But ton, and then click the Word Options button.
2. From the W ord Opt ions dialog box displayed, click Proofing.
3. Under the ‘AutoCorrect Options’ section, click the AutoCorrect Options button.
4. From the AutoCorrect dialog box displayed, clear the check box Autom at ically use suggest ions from the spelling checker.
5. Clear this option will make Word ignore any spelling errors while you types. Click OK. 6. Under ‘When correcting spelling and grammar in Word’ section, click the Writing Style: Settings button.
7. Scroll down to the Style: section and select the suitable check box. 8. Click OK to close the Grammar Settings dialog box. 9. Click OK again to close the Word Options dialog box. 10. When you are ready to proofread your document, click the Proofing Errors button in the status bar to sort
through and correct any errors that Word has found. Then from the suggestions pop-up, select the correct word
Desktop Publishing
2009
31
Add a Document Watermark in Word 2007
A document watermark is just a 'simple text' appear at the background of your Word documents. It can help signify that your Word 2007 document should be treated as "Do not copy", "Sample", "Confidential", "Draft", etc.
Word 2007 has many options for creating watermarks. Although default watermark types are provided, you can create watermarks with your own custom text or image. You can also tweak the watermark size, font, color, and how much the watermark will stand out from the document.
To add a default Word watermark
1. Open Word 2007. 2. Click the Page Layout tab in the Word
2007 ribbon. 3. In the Page Background group, click the
Watermark icon to open a menu. 4. From the menu, you can click on any
available watermarks and you will see the watermark is inserted in your document.
To add a custom Word watermark
1. Open Word 2007. 2. Click the Page Layout tab in the Word
2007 ribbon. 3. In the Page Background group, click the
Watermark icon to open a menu. 4. Click on the Custom Watermark button to
open the Printed Watermark dialog box. 5. From the dialog box, you have 3 options to
choose: a. No watermark - to remove the
current watermark. b. Picture watermark - to use a
picture as the watermark. You need to click on the Select Picture button and choose a picture to be your document watermark.
c. Text watermark - to create a custom text watermark (let say we choose this). 6. Language: Click the drop-down menu to modify
the watermark's language. 7. Text: Enter your desired watermark text. 8. Font: Change the watermark font from the drop-
down menu. 9. Size: Change the watermark size to ensure it
appears correctly on paper. A default is Auto. Color: Click the drop-down menu to change the
watermark color. 10. Check or uncheck "Semitransparent" to wash
out or prevent washing out the watermark text. 11. Layout: To determine whether the watermark
should appear diagonally or horizontally. 12. Click the OK button when finish.
Desktop Publishing
2009
32
Word 2007 Status Bar The W ord 2 0 0 7 status bar is the area at the bottom of the Word window that gives information and some controls on the current document.
It displays information about what page you are on, line number on the page, total words in the document, etc. It also shows some other information about which editing toggles you have turned on or you can turn it off if you don't need the information provided shows on the status bar.
Right-clicking the status bar produces the helpful Customize Status Bar menu. The Customize Status Bar menu does two things:
1. It controls what you see on the status bar, informational tidbits as well as certain controls.
2. It lets you turn on or off some Word features.
To control the display on the Customize status bar menu
1. The menu's options are enabled (selected) when a check mark appears next to them.
2. The items at the top of the menu (from Formatted Page Number to Word Count) display information about your document.
3. The options from Caps Lock down through Macro Recording are used to turn off or on those features.
4. The last three options on the menu control whether the View or Zoom shortcuts appear on the status bar.
Note: You can try to check or select the available options in the Customize Status Bar and see the changes to your documents.
The Word 2007 User InterfaceDescrip1. Office
Officeyou can open, save, printand presentations.
2. Quick Access Toolbar: small toolbar next to Officeshortcuts for some of the most common commands.
3. Tit le bar: Word program running and the name of the active presentation.
4. Minimize the application window to a bar on the taskbar; you click its taskb
5. Maximize/Restore buttonmaximized (full screen), click will changes it to windowed (not full screen) and vice versa.
6. Close ( Quit ) Closes the application.
7. Ribbon: combination of menu bar and too"pages" of buttons, lists, and commands.
8. View but tons: to see the active Word window/page in different views.
9. Status bar: the
The Word 2007 Ribbon The
icons/buttons. It replaces the you quickly finand each tab is a selection of a command or display a menu of commands. Simitask oriented. The more popular commands are available directly on each tab; you can directly access the command by clicking on the command icons/buttons.
The Word 2007 User InterfaceDescription of some important elements
Office buttonOffice
menu, from which
you can open, save, printand start newpresentations. Quick Access Toolbar: small toolbar next to Office
buttonshortcuts for some of the most common commands. Tit le bar: Word program running and the name of the active presentation. Minimize buttonthe application window to a bar on the taskbar; you click its buttontaskbar to reopen it. Maximize/Restore button: If the window is maximized (full screen), click will changes it to windowed (not full screen) and vice versa. Close ( Quit ) Closes the application. Ribbon: Functions as a combination of menu bar and toolbar, offering tabbed "pages" of buttons, lists, and commands. View but tons: to see the active Word window/page in different views.
Status bar: the zoom.
The Word 2007 Ribbon The W ord 2 0 0 7 Ribbon
icons/buttons. It replaces the you quickly find the commands that you need to complete a task. The ribbon is divided into eight and each tab is a selection of a command or display a menu of commands. Simitask oriented. The more popular commands are available directly on each tab; you can directly access the command by clicking on the command icons/buttons.
ChapterThe Word 2007 User Interface
tion of some important elements button: Opens the menu, from which
you can open, save, printstart new
presentations.
Quick Access Toolbar: small toolbar next to the
button
contains shortcuts for some of the most common commands. Tit le bar: Identifies the Word program running and the name of the active presentation.
button: Shrinks the application window to a bar on the taskbar; you
button
on the ar to reopen it.
Maximize/Restore If the window is
maximized (full screen), click will changes it to windowed (not full screen) and vice versa.
Close ( Quit ) buttonCloses the application.
Functions as a combination of menu bar
lbar, offering tabbed "pages" of buttons, lists, and commands.
View but tons: Allow you to see the active Word window/page in different
Status bar: Reports information about the presentation and provides shortcuts for changing the view and
The Word 2007 Ribbon W ord 2 0 0 7 Ribbon
is a bar across the top of the window that contains tabbed pages of commands and
icons/buttons. It replaces the d the commands that you need to complete a task. The ribbon is divided into eight
and each tab is a selection of a command or display a menu of commands. Simitask oriented. The more popular commands are available directly on each tab; you can directly access the command by clicking on the command icons/buttons.
MICROSOFT W ORD FUNDAMENTALShapter
2
The Word 2007 User Interfacetion of some important elements Word 2007
the menu, from which
you can open, save, print, start new
Quick Access Toolbar: A the
contains shortcuts for some of the most common commands.
Identifies the Word program running and the name of the active
Shrinks the application window to a bar on the taskbar; you
on the
If the window is maximized (full screen), click will changes it to windowed (not full screen)
button:
Functions as a combination of menu bar
lbar, offering tabbed "pages" of buttons, lists,
Allow you to see the active Word window/page in different
Reports information about the presentation and provides shortcuts for changing the view and
The Word 2007 Ribbon
is a bar across the top of the window that contains tabbed pages of commands and
icons/buttons. It replaces the previous versionsd the commands that you need to complete a task. The ribbon is divided into eight
and each tab is a selection of groups
that show related items together. a command or display a menu of commands. Simitask oriented. The more popular commands are available directly on each tab; you can directly access the command by clicking on the command icons/buttons.
MICROSOFT W ORD FUNDAMENTALS2 - Exploring Word 2007 Screen Elements
The Word 2007 User Interface
Word 2007 Interface of are as follows:
Reports information about the presentation and provides shortcuts for changing the view and
is a bar across the top of the window that contains tabbed pages of commands and
previous versions
menu bar and d the commands that you need to complete a task. The ribbon is divided into eight
that show related items together. a command or display a menu of commands. Similar commands are grouped together making the ribbon very task oriented. The more popular commands are available directly on each tab; you can directly access the command by clicking on the command icons/buttons.
1
MICROSOFT W ORD FUNDAMENTALSExploring Word 2007 Screen Elements
Interface of are as follows:
Reports information about the presentation and provides shortcuts for changing the view and
is a bar across the top of the window that contains tabbed pages of commands and
menu bar and drop down menusd the commands that you need to complete a task. The ribbon is divided into eight
that show related items together. lar commands are grouped together making the ribbon very
task oriented. The more popular commands are available directly on each tab; you can directly access the
MICROSOFT W ORD FUNDAMENTALS
Exploring Word 2007 Screen Elements
Interface of are as follows:
Reports information about the presentation and provides shortcuts for changing the view and
is a bar across the top of the window that contains tabbed pages of commands and
drop down menusd the commands that you need to complete a task. The ribbon is divided into eight
that show related items together. Command buttonslar commands are grouped together making the ribbon very
task oriented. The more popular commands are available directly on each tab; you can directly access the
MICROSOFT W ORD FUNDAMENTALSExploring Word 2007 Screen Elements
Interface of are as follows:
Reports information about the presentation and provides shortcuts for changing the view and
is a bar across the top of the window that contains tabbed pages of commands and
drop down menus. The ribbon is designed to help d the commands that you need to complete a task. The ribbon is divided into eight
Command buttons
in each group carry out lar commands are grouped together making the ribbon very
task oriented. The more popular commands are available directly on each tab; you can directly access the
MICROSOFT W ORD FUNDAMENTALSExploring Word 2007 Screen Elements
Reports information about the presentation and provides shortcuts for changing the view and
is a bar across the top of the window that contains tabbed pages of commands and
. The ribbon is designed to help d the commands that you need to complete a task. The ribbon is divided into eight tabs
by default, in each group carry out
lar commands are grouped together making the ribbon very task oriented. The more popular commands are available directly on each tab; you can directly access the
MICROSOFT W ORD FUNDAMENTALS
Exploring Word 2007 Screen Elements
Reports information about the presentation and provides shortcuts for changing the view and
is a bar across the top of the window that contains tabbed pages of commands and
. The ribbon is designed to help by default,
in each group carry out lar commands are grouped together making the ribbon very
task oriented. The more popular commands are available directly on each tab; you can directly access the
Here are the elements in a
1. Ribbon2. Tab
every group has it own command icons. 3. Group
Paragraph, Styles, and Editing. 4. Dialog box launcher
dialog box related to that group.
There is no way to delete or replace the Ribbon withOffice. However, you can minimize the Ribbon to make more space available on your screen.
To minimize the Ribbon1. Click 2. From the drop
Ribbon3. To use the Ribbon while it is minimized, click the
you want to use, and then click the option or command you want to use.
4. Click 5. From the drop
RibbonNote: To quickly minimize the Ribbon, doubleof the active tab. DoubleRibbon Keyboard shortcutCtrl+F1.
Here are the elements in a
Ribbon: The whole bar, including all of the tabs. Tab: A tabbed page of the Ribbon such as Home, Insert, etc. Every tab contains several groups and every group has it own command icons. Group: A section of a tab. For example, the Home tab has thParagraph, Styles, and Editing. Dialog box launcherdialog box related to that group.
There is no way to delete or replace the Ribbon with. However, you can minimize the Ribbon to make more space available on your screen.
To minimize the RibbonClick Customize Quick Access ToolbarFrom the dropRibbon. To use the Ribbon while it is minimized, click the you want to use, and then click the option or command you want to use.Click Customize Quick Access ToolbarFrom the dropRibbon
again. To quickly minimize the Ribbon, double
of the active tab. Double
Keyboard shortcut:
Here are the elements in a Word 2007
: The whole bar, including all of the tabs. : A tabbed page of the Ribbon such as Home, Insert, etc. Every tab contains several groups and
every group has it own command icons. : A section of a tab. For example, the Home tab has th
Paragraph, Styles, and Editing. Dialog box launcher: A small icon in the bottomdialog box related to that group.
There is no way to delete or replace the Ribbon with. However, you can minimize the Ribbon to make more space available on your screen.
To minimize the RibbonCustomize Quick Access Toolbar
From the drop-down menu, click
To use the Ribbon while it is minimized, click the you want to use, and then click the option or command you want to use.
Customize Quick Access ToolbarFrom the drop-down menu, click the
again.
To quickly minimize the Ribbon, doubleof the active tab. Double-click a tab again to restore the
: To minimize or restore the Ribbon,
Word 2007 ribbon:
: The whole bar, including all of the tabs. : A tabbed page of the Ribbon such as Home, Insert, etc. Every tab contains several groups and
every group has it own command icons. : A section of a tab. For example, the Home tab has th
Paragraph, Styles, and Editing.
: A small icon in the bottomdialog box related to that group.
There is no way to delete or replace the Ribbon with. However, you can minimize the Ribbon to make more space available on your screen.
To minimize the Ribbon
Customize Quick Access Toolbardown menu, click Minimize t
To use the Ribbon while it is minimized, click the you want to use, and then click the option or command you want to use.
Customize Quick Access Toolbardown menu, click the Minimize
To quickly minimize the Ribbon, double-click a tab again to restore the
To minimize or restore the Ribbon,
2
:
: The whole bar, including all of the tabs.
: A tabbed page of the Ribbon such as Home, Insert, etc. Every tab contains several groups and every group has it own command icons.
: A section of a tab. For example, the Home tab has th
: A small icon in the bottom
There is no way to delete or replace the Ribbon with
the toolbars and menus from the earlier versions of . However, you can minimize the Ribbon to make more space available on your screen.
Customize Quick Access Toolbar. Minimize the
To use the Ribbon while it is minimized, click the you want to use, and then click the option or
Customize Quick Access Toolbar. Minimize
-click the click a tab again to restore the
To minimize or restore the Ribbon,
: A tabbed page of the Ribbon such as Home, Insert, etc. Every tab contains several groups and
: A section of a tab. For example, the Home tab has th
: A small icon in the bottom-right corner of a group, from which you can open a
the toolbars and menus from the earlier versions of . However, you can minimize the Ribbon to make more space available on your screen.
Desktop Publishing
: A tabbed page of the Ribbon such as Home, Insert, etc. Every tab contains several groups and
: A section of a tab. For example, the Home tab has the following groups: Clipboard, Font,
right corner of a group, from which you can open a
the toolbars and menus from the earlier versions of . However, you can minimize the Ribbon to make more space available on your screen.
Desktop Publishing
: A tabbed page of the Ribbon such as Home, Insert, etc. Every tab contains several groups and
e following groups: Clipboard, Font,
right corner of a group, from which you can open a
the toolbars and menus from the earlier versions of . However, you can minimize the Ribbon to make more space available on your screen.
Desktop Publishing
2009
: A tabbed page of the Ribbon such as Home, Insert, etc. Every tab contains several groups and
e following groups: Clipboard, Font,
right corner of a group, from which you can open a
the toolbars and menus from the earlier versions of Microsoft
tab
the
name
press
2009
: A tabbed page of the Ribbon such as Home, Insert, etc. Every tab contains several groups and
e following groups: Clipboard, Font,
right corner of a group, from which you can open a
Microsoft
tab
the
name
press
Drop Cap
A dropappears in a larger than normal and more interesting font than the other characters. So it occupies several lines of the paragraph.
Dropsomething in the dropbasically two styles of like.
Add Shading to Highlight Text
Adding shadeattentionparagraphdifferent color, making it stand out from the rest. This shading can be added in conjunction with any border you may specify for the paragraphthe degree of shading.
To add shading to a paragraph1.
2.3.4.
To remove shading from a paragraph1.2.3.4.
Drop Cap
drop
cap is the first letter of a report, article, chapter, or story that appears in a larger than normal and more interesting font than the other characters. So it occupies several lines of the paragraph.
Drop
caps can be used to add style to a document and draw attention to something in the document
drop
cap before, just you don t know that it s a basically two styles of
Add Shading to Highlight Text
Adding shade
to your attention. What if you want to draw paragraph? One option is to shade the entire different color, making it stand out from the rest. This shading can be added in conjunction with any border you may specify for
paragraph. Word 2007 even allows you to precisely control the degree of shading.
To add shading to a paragraph1.
Position the insertion point in the want to shade.
2.
Click the 3.
In the Paragraph4.
From the shading color palette displayed, select any one of the theme colors of the palette. There are ten colors, and each option under the colors represents a different percentage of shading for that color.
To remove shading from a paragraph1.
Position t2.
Click the 3.
In the Paragraph4.
From the shading color palette displayed, select
is the first letter of a report, article, chapter, or story that appears in a larger than normal and more interesting font than the other characters. So it occupies several lines of the paragraph.
caps can be used to add style to a document and draw attention to the document. Maybe you are not aware that you seems before, just you don t know that it s a
basically two styles of drop caps, dropped an
Add Shading to Highlight Text
to your document text. What if you want to draw ? One option is to shade the entire
different color, making it stand out from the rest. This shading can be added in conjunction with any border you may specify for
. Word 2007 even allows you to precisely control the degree of shading.
To add shading to a paragraphtion the insertion point in the
want to shade.
Click the Home tab from the Ribbon. Paragraph
group, click the downFrom the shading color palette displayed, select any one of the theme colors of the palette. There are ten colors, and each option under the colors represents a different percentage of shading for that color.
To remove shading from a paragraphPosition the insertion point in the Click the Home tab from the Ribbon.
Paragraph
group, click the downFrom the shading color palette displayed, select
is the first letter of a report, article, chapter, or story that appears in a larger than normal and more interesting font than the other characters. So it occupies several lines of the paragraph.
caps can be used to add style to a document and draw attention to . Maybe you are not aware that you seems
before, just you don t know that it s a caps, dropped an
To add a drop caps to your document
1. Type your paragraph as you normally would. 2. Select the first character of the first word at the start of your paragraph. 3. Click the 4. In the 5. From the
choose either 6. Change any other options to format your 7. Click on
Add Shading to Highlight Text
document text
can grab reader s . What if you want to draw attention? One option is to shade the entire
different color, making it stand out from the rest. This shading can be added in conjunction with any border you may specify for
. Word 2007 even allows you to precisely control
To add shading to a paragraph
tion the insertion point in the
tab from the Ribbon. group, click the down
From the shading color palette displayed, select any one of the theme colors of the palette. There are ten colors, and each option under the colors represents a different percentage of shading for that color.
To remove shading from a paragraphhe insertion point in the
tab from the Ribbon. group, click the down
From the shading color palette displayed, select
Chapter 3
is the first letter of a report, article, chapter, or story that appears in a larger than normal and more interesting font than the other characters. So it occupies several lines of the paragraph.
caps can be used to add style to a document and draw attention to . Maybe you are not aware that you seems
before, just you don t know that it s a dropcaps, dropped and in margin. Here it looks
To add a drop caps to your document:
Type your paragraph as you normally would. Select the first character of the first word at the start of your paragraph. Click the InsertIn the Text group, click From the Drop
choose either Dropped or Change any other options to format your Click on OK
Add Shading to Highlight Text
in Word 2007
can grab reader s attention
to an entire ? One option is to shade the entire paragraph
different color, making it stand out from the rest. This shading can be added in conjunction with any border you may specify for
. Word 2007 even allows you to precisely control
tion the insertion point in the paragraph
tab from the Ribbon.
group, click the down-arrow to the right of the From the shading color palette displayed, select any one of the theme colors of the palette. There are ten colors, and each option under the colors represents a different percentage of shading for that color.
To remove shading from a paragraph
he insertion point in the paragraph with shading applied. tab from the Ribbon.
group, click the down-arrow to the right of the From the shading color palette displayed, select
3
Chapter 3
is the first letter of a report, article, chapter, or story that appears in a larger than normal and more interesting font than the other characters. So it occupies several lines of the paragraph.
caps can be used to add style to a document and draw attention to . Maybe you are not aware that you seems
drop
cap. There are d in margin. Here it looks
To add a drop caps to your
Type your paragraph as you normally would. Select the first character of the first word at the start of your paragraph.
Insert
tab of the Ribbongroup, click Drop
Cap dialog box displayed, in the or in margin
Change any other options to format your
in Word 2007
can grab reader s to an entire paragraph
in a different color, making it stand out from the rest. This shading can be added in conjunction with any border you may specify for
. Word 2007 even allows you to precisely control
paragraph
that you
arrow to the right of the From the shading color palette displayed, select any one of the theme colors of the palette. There are ten colors, and each option under the colors represents a different percentage of shading for that color.
with shading applied.
arrow to the right of the From the shading color palette displayed, select No Color. Then, the
Desktop Publishing
Chapter 3 - Formatting Documents
is the first letter of a report, article, chapter, or story that appears in a larger than normal and more interesting font than the
caps can be used to add style to a document and draw attention to . Maybe you are not aware that you seems
. There are d in margin. Here it looks
Type your paragraph as you normally would. Select the first character of the first word at the start of your paragraph.
Ribbon. rop
Cap then click on dialog box displayed, in the
option Change any other options to format your
arrow to the right of the ShadingFrom the shading color palette displayed, select any one of the theme colors of the palette. There are ten colors, and each option under the colors represents a different percentage of shading for that color.
with shading applied.
arrow to the right of the Shading. Then, the paragrap
Desktop Publishing
Formatting Documents
Type your paragraph as you normally would.
Select the first character of the first word at the start of your paragraph.
then click on Dropdialog box displayed, in the Position
Change any other options to format your drop cap
Shading
tool. From the shading color palette displayed, select any one of the theme colors of the palette. There are ten colors, and each option under the colors represents a different percentage of shading for that color.
Shading
tool. paragraph shading will be removed.
Desktop Publishing
2009
Formatting Documents
Select the first character of the first word at the start of your paragraph.
Drop
Cap OptionsPosition
section, you can
From the shading color palette displayed, select any one of the theme colors of the palette. There are ten colors, and each option under the colors represents a different percentage of shading for that color.
shading will be removed.
2009
Formatting Documents
Select the first character of the first word at the start of your paragraph.
Options. section, you can
From the shading color palette displayed, select any one of the theme colors of the palette. There are ten colors, and each option under the colors represents a different percentage of shading for that color.
shading will be removed.
Word 2007 Styles: How to Use it?A style is a set of attributes such as font (color, size, etc), paragraph (alignment, spacing, etc). Word 2007own Word number of builtmost important builtexample, you might use Title Heading for chapter titles, Heading 1 for section headings, Heading 2 for the subheadings, etc. Once you have defined a style, you can quickly and easily format text simply by applying the style without the need to apply texyour documents.
With the headings headings to define cross
These stylesgroup.
To apply the Style1. Place the cursor in the chapter title or
heading in your document.
2. In the heading such as Heading 1
3. To see more the intended style.
Note: For
The heading Heading 2 corresponds to the next highest level; and Heading 3 is the following leve
Using Headings to Create a Table of Contents
How to create a table of contents
A table of contentsthrough what are the contents of a longstyles (either buildof contentsa TOC -
1. Prepare your 2. Apply those headings into the TOC. 3. After the
To create a Table of Contents1. Position the insertion point where you want the TOC to appear, usually at the beginning of the 2. Click the
Word 2007 Styles: How to Use it?A style is a set of formattingattributes such as font (color, size, etc), paragraph (alignment, spacing, etc). Word 2007
allows you to Word styles and also come with a
number of built-in stylesmost important built-example, you might use Title Heading for chapter titles, Heading 1 for section headings, Heading 2 for the subheadings, etc. Once you have defined a style, you can quickly and easily format text simply by applying the style without the need to apply texyour documents.
With the headings stylesheadings to define cross
styles
are on the
To apply the StylePlace the cursor in the chapter title or heading in your document.
In the Stylesheading such as Heading 1
for the next level, etc.
To see more stylesthe Styles group and you can choose any intended style.
For each chapter title and heading, you need to apply the style.
The heading styles and the TOC work together as Word designate Heading 1 titles to the highest level in the TOC. Heading 2 corresponds to the next highest level; and Heading 3 is the following leve
Using Headings to Create a Table of Contents
create a table of contents
table of contents
through what are the contents of a longstyles (either build-in style such as of contents
manually, without using the built
Prepare your Apply those headings into the TOC. After the heading
To create a Table of ContentsPosition the insertion point where you want the TOC to appear, usually at the beginning of the Click the References
Word 2007 Styles: How to Use it?
formatting
instructions. In another term, it is a way to give a name to a group of
attributes such as font formatting(color, size, etc), paragraph formatting(alignment, spacing, etc). Microsoft
allows you to create your and also come with a
styles. Among the -in styles are the standard heading
example, you might use Title Heading for chapter titles, Heading 1 for section headings, Heading 2 for the subheadings, etc. Once you have defined a style, you can quickly and easily format text simply by applying the style without the need to apply text formatting
styles, Word can automatically create a headings to define cross-references. Here we
are on the Home tab, in the
To apply the Style
Place the cursor in the chapter title or heading in your document.
Styles
group, click on a suitable heading such as Title for the highest level,
for the next level, etc.
styles, click the group and you can choose any
intended style.
chapter title and heading, you need to apply the style.
and the TOC work together as Word designate Heading 1 titles to the highest level in the TOC. Heading 2 corresponds to the next highest level; and Heading 3 is the following leve
Using Headings to Create a Table of Contents
create a table of contents
easily using Word 2007?
(TOC) is very useful for a long through what are the contents of a long
in style such as manually, without using the built
Prepare your document by assigning Apply those headings into the TOC.
heading
styles are applied, it's time to collect them all
To create a Table of ContentsPosition the insertion point where you want the TOC to appear, usually at the beginning of the
References
tab of the ribbon.
Word 2007 Styles: How to Use it?
instructions. In another term, it is a way to give a name to a group of formatting
formatting
Microsoft
create your and also come with a
. Among the are the standard heading
example, you might use Title Heading for chapter titles, Heading 1 for section headings, Heading 2 for the subheadings, etc. Once you have defined a style, you can quickly and easily format text simply by applying the style
formatting
individually.
, Word can automatically create a references. Here we
show you how to use
tab, in the Styles
Place the cursor in the chapter title or heading in your document.
group, click on a suitable for the highest level,
for the next level, etc.
, click the More icons in group and you can choose any
chapter title and heading, you need to apply the style.
and the TOC work together as Word designate Heading 1 titles to the highest level in the TOC. Heading 2 corresponds to the next highest level; and Heading 3 is the following leve
Using Headings to Create a Table of Contents
easily using Word 2007?
(TOC) is very useful for a long through what are the contents of a long
documentin style such as Heading 1,
manually, without using the built-in process in
by assigning heading stylesApply those headings into the TOC.
styles are applied, it's time to collect them all
To create a Table of Contents
Position the insertion point where you want the TOC to appear, usually at the beginning of the tab of the ribbon.
4
Word 2007 Styles: How to Use it?
instructions. In another term, it is a way to give a name to a group of
are the standard heading example, you might use Title Heading for chapter titles, Heading 1 for section headings, Heading 2 for the subheadings, etc. Once you have defined a style, you can quickly and easily format text simply by applying the style
individually. Styles
, Word can automatically create a show you how to use
Styles
Place the cursor in the chapter title or
group, click on a suitable for the highest level,
icons in group and you can choose any
chapter title and heading, you need to apply the style.
and the TOC work together as Word designate Heading 1 titles to the highest level in the TOC. Heading 2 corresponds to the next highest level; and Heading 3 is the following leve
Using Headings to Create a Table of Contents
easily using Word 2007?
(TOC) is very useful for a long documentdocument. Adding a TOC to your
1, Heading 2, etc or custom styles). Many people try to create a in process in Microsoft Word
heading styles
styles are applied, it's time to collect them all
Position the insertion point where you want the TOC to appear, usually at the beginning of the tab of the ribbon.
instructions. In another term, it is a way to give a name to a group of
are the standard heading styles: Heading 1, Heading 2, Heading 3, etc. Foexample, you might use Title Heading for chapter titles, Heading 1 for section headings, Heading 2 for the subheadings, etc. Once you have defined a style, you can quickly and easily format text simply by applying the style
Styles
can save a lot of time and help insure consistency in
, Word can automatically create a table of contents (TOC)show you how to use styles
chapter title and heading, you need to apply the style.
and the TOC work together as Word designate Heading 1 titles to the highest level in the TOC. Heading 2 corresponds to the next highest level; and Heading 3 is the following leve
Using Headings to Create a Table of Contents
document. For example, you can use TOC to quickly browse . Adding a TOC to your
2, etc or custom styles). Many people try to create a Microsoft Word
heading styles
that you want to appear in the TOC.
styles are applied, it's time to collect them all
Position the insertion point where you want the TOC to appear, usually at the beginning of the
Desktop Publishing
instructions. In another term, it is a way to give a name to a group of
: Heading 1, Heading 2, Heading 3, etc. Foexample, you might use Title Heading for chapter titles, Heading 1 for section headings, Heading 2 for the subheadings, etc. Once you have defined a style, you can quickly and easily format text simply by applying the style
can save a lot of time and help insure consistency in
table of contents (TOC)styles
to create a TOC later.
and the TOC work together as Word designate Heading 1 titles to the highest level in the TOC. Heading 2 corresponds to the next highest level; and Heading 3 is the following level.
. For example, you can use TOC to quickly browse . Adding a TOC to your document
2, etc or custom styles). Many people try to create a Microsoft Word. There are two steps you take to create
that you want to appear in the TOC.
styles are applied, it's time to collect them all together in the TOC.
Position the insertion point where you want the TOC to appear, usually at the beginning of the
Desktop Publishing
instructions. In another term, it is a way to give a name to a group of
: Heading 1, Heading 2, Heading 3, etc. Foexample, you might use Title Heading for chapter titles, Heading 1 for section headings, Heading 2 for the subheadings, etc. Once you have defined a style, you can quickly and easily format text simply by applying the style
can save a lot of time and help insure consistency in
table of contents (TOC), and you also can use to create a TOC later.
and the TOC work together as Word designate Heading 1 titles to the highest level in the TOC. l.
. For example, you can use TOC to quickly browse
is simple if you have included 2, etc or custom styles). Many people try to create a
. There are two steps you take to create
that you want to appear in the TOC.
together in the TOC.
Position the insertion point where you want the TOC to appear, usually at the beginning of the
Desktop Publishing
2009
instructions. In another term, it is a way to give a name to a group of formatting
: Heading 1, Heading 2, Heading 3, etc. Foexample, you might use Title Heading for chapter titles, Heading 1 for section headings, Heading 2 for the subheadings, etc. Once you have defined a style, you can quickly and easily format text simply by applying the style
can save a lot of time and help insure consistency in
, and you also can use
and the TOC work together as Word designate Heading 1 titles to the highest level in the TOC.
. For example, you can use TOC to quickly browse is simple if you have included
2, etc or custom styles). Many people try to create a table . There are two steps you take to create
Position the insertion point where you want the TOC to appear, usually at the beginning of the document
2009
formatting
: Heading 1, Heading 2, Heading 3, etc. For example, you might use Title Heading for chapter titles, Heading 1 for section headings, Heading 2 for the sub-headings, etc. Once you have defined a style, you can quickly and easily format text simply by applying the style
can save a lot of time and help insure consistency in
, and you also can use
and the TOC work together as Word designate Heading 1 titles to the highest level in the TOC.
. For example, you can use TOC to quickly browse is simple if you have included
table . There are two steps you take to create
document.
3.
4.
To modify a Table of Contents1.
2.3.
4.
Sometime you may need to adjust the horizontal size or width of provides you a way to do so and the to any
To format the horizo1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Note:
tool to the Quick Access Toolbar (QAT). With the
scaling
3.
From the TOC options.
4.
Click either preview.
To modify a Table of Contents
1.
Position the insertion point where you want the TOC inserted.
2.
Click the 3.
From the of Contentsof TOC options.
4.
Click Insert the Table of Contents
Sometime you may need to adjust the horizontal size or width of charactersprovides you a way to do so and the to any characters
To format the horizo1.
Select the
2.
Display the
3.
From the
Character Spacing
4.
Use the
scaling you want applied to the
can select from a pre
value between 1% and 600%.
5.
Click on
Note:
If you find you have a need to scale quite a few selections in your documents, you can add a
tool to the Quick Access Toolbar (QAT). With the
scaling
of any selected text at any time.
From the Table of ContentsTOC options.
Click either Automatic Table 1
To modify a Table of Contents
Position the insertion point where you want the nserted.
Click the ReferencesFrom the Table of Contentsof Contents
icon. Word displays a dropof TOC options.
Insert Table of ContentsTable of Contents
Sometime you may need to adjust the horizontal size or characters
in your document. Actually, Word provides you a way to do so and the
characters
in a selection.
To format the horizontal size of charactersSelect the characters
Display the Font dialog box
From the Font dialog box
Character Spacing
tab.
Use the Scale drop
you want applied to the
can select from a pre
value between 1% and 600%.
OK.
If you find you have a need to scale quite a few selections in your documents, you can add a
tool to the Quick Access Toolbar (QAT). With the
of any selected text at any time.
Table of Contents
group, click
Automatic Table 1
or
To modify a Table of Contents
Position the insertion point where you want the
References
tab of the ribbon. Table of Contents
group, click icon. Word displays a drop
Table of ContentsTable of Contents
tab of the Table of
Sometime you may need to adjust the horizontal size or in your document. Actually, Word
provides you a way to do so and the scalingin a selection.
ntal size of characters
you want to adjust.
dialog box
by pressing
dialog box
displayed, click on the
tab.
drop-down menu to specify the
you want applied to the
can select from a pre-defined scale, or enter any
value between 1% and 600%.
If you find you have a need to scale quite a few selections in your documents, you can add a
tool to the Quick Access Toolbar (QAT). With the
of any selected text at any time.
group, click Table of
or Automatic Table 2
Position the insertion point where you want the
tab of the ribbon.
group, click Table icon. Word displays a drop-down list
Table of Contents. Word displays Table of
Contentsdialog box.
5.
the Table of Contents
dialog boxmake sure that the Formats
6. Click 7. From the
the highest level, or Level 1, in the TOC, and then click 8. From the
necessary options in the color box to change the color to blue).
Adjusting the WidthDocument
Sometime you may need to adjust the horizontal size or in your document. Actually, Word
scaling
can be applied
ntal size of charactersyou want to adjust.
by pressing Ctrl + D
displayed, click on the
down menu to specify the
you want applied to the characters. You
defined scale, or enter any
If you find you have a need to scale quite a few selections in your documents, you can add a
tool to the Quick Access Toolbar (QAT). With the Character
of any selected text at any time.
5
Table of Contents
Automatic Table 2, whichever TOC looks best to you in the instant
Position the insertion point where you want the
Table down list
. Word displays Contents
dialog box.
In Table of
Contents
dialog box, make sure that the Formats
drop-down list is set to Click ModifyFrom the Style
the highest level, or Level 1, in the TOC, and then click From the Modify Style
necessary options in the color box to change the color to blue).
Adjusting the WidthDocument
Sometime you may need to adjust the horizontal size or
can be applied
ntal size of characters
Ctrl + D.
displayed, click on the
down menu to specify the
. You
defined scale, or enter any
If you find you have a need to scale quite a few selections in your documents, you can add a
Character Scaling
Desktop Publishing
Contents
icon. Word displays a drop
, whichever TOC looks best to you in the instant
down list is set to From TemplateModify
button. Style
dialog boxthe highest level, or Level 1, in the TOC, and then click
Modify Style
necessary options in the Formattingcolor box to change the color to blue).
Adjusting the Width
of Characters in Word
If you find you have a need to scale quite a few selections in your documents, you can add a
Scaling
tool in place, you can easily change the
Desktop Publishing
icon. Word displays a drop
, whichever TOC looks best to you in the instant
From Template
dialog box
displayed, click the highest level, or Level 1, in the TOC, and then click
dialog box displayed, change the Formatting
section (i.e. use the color box to change the color to blue).
of Characters in Word
If you find you have a need to scale quite a few selections in your documents, you can add a
tool in place, you can easily change the
Desktop Publishing
2009
icon. Word displays a drop-down list of
, whichever TOC looks best to you in the instant
From Template.
displayed, click TOC 1the highest level, or Level 1, in the TOC, and then click Modify
displayed, change the section (i.e. use the
of Characters in Word
If you find you have a need to scale quite a few selections in your documents, you can add a
tool in place, you can easily change the
2009
down list of
, whichever TOC looks best to you in the instant
TOC 1
to select Modify.
displayed, change the section (i.e. use the Font
of Characters in Word
If you find you have a need to scale quite a few selections in your documents, you can add a scaling
tool in place, you can easily change the
To add a scaling tool to the QAT
1. Click the W ord Opt ionsOptions
2. At the left side of the Customize
3. Using the drop
4. Scroll through the list of commands until you find the command.
5. Select the command by clicking it once. 6. Click the
appears at the right side of the box
7. Click the appears on the Quick Access toolbar.
numbers th
To update a Table of Contents1. Click the 2. From the
Update Table3. From the
displayed, you have two options to choose:4. Update
body text but no new headings (this option is faster). Update entire table:
To add a scaling tool to the QAT
Click the Office but tonW ord Opt ionsOptions
dialog box
At the left side of the Customize
option. Using the Choose Com m ands Fromdrop-down list, choose Scroll through the list of commands until you find the command.
Select the command by clicking it once. Click the Addappears at the right side of the box. Click the OK
appears on the Quick Access toolbar.
numbers that appear in the TOC.
To update a Table of ContentsClick the ReferencesFrom the Table of ContentsUpdate TableFrom the Update displayed, you have two options to choose:Update
page num bers only: body text but no new headings (this option is faster).
Update entire table:
To add a scaling tool to the QAT
Office but ton
W ord Opt ions. Word displays the
dialog box. At the left side of the dialog box
option.
Choose Com m ands Fromdown list, choose All Commands
Scroll through the list of commands until you find the Character
Select the command by clicking it once. Add
button. The command now appears at the right side of the
button. The command now appears on the Quick Access toolbar.
at appear in the TOC.
To update a Table of ContentsReferences
tab of the ribbon. Table of Contents
Update Table
icon. Update Table of Contents
displayed, you have two options to choose:page num bers only:
body text but no new headings (this option is
Update entire table: If you have added or changed a chapter title or
To add a scaling tool to the QAT
and then click
. Word displays the Word
dialog box, click the
Choose Com m ands FromAll Commands
Scroll through the list of commands until Character Scaling
Select the command by clicking it once. button. The command now
appears at the right side of the dialog
button. The command now appears on the Quick Access toolbar.
To update a Table of Contents
tab of the ribbon. Table of Contents
group, click the
Table of Contentsdisplayed, you have two options to choose:
page num bers only: If you've added body text but no new headings (this option is
If you have added or changed a chapter title or
6
and then click Word
, click the
Choose Com m ands From
All Commands. Scroll through the list of commands until
Scaling
Select the command by clicking it once.
button. The command now dialog
button. The command now
Editing Style
box
ContentsLevel1) is now blue.
asking if you want to replace the TOC.
Note: (Level 3) to be blue also, you would do the same procedure selecting TOC 2 or TOC 3 in the box
The TOC is automatically updated whenever you open the documentyou add more titles or headings in your when you add more content that may affect the page
tab of the ribbon.
group, click the
Table of Contents
dialog displayed, you have two options to choose:
If you've added body text but no new headings (this option is
If you have added or changed a chapter title or
Editing Style1. Click on
box. 2. Click on 3. Look in the
Contents
dialog boxLevel1) is now blue.
4. After you click the final asking if you want to replace the TOC.
5. Click OK
Note: If you want to change TOC 2 (Level 2) or TOC 3 (Level 3) to be blue also, you would do the same procedure selecting TOC 2 or TOC 3 in the box
before proceeding to th
The TOC is automatically updated whenever you open the document; but it's a good idea to also update it whenever you add more titles or headings in your when you add more content that may affect the page
If you have added or changed a chapter title or
Desktop Publishing
Editing Style
Click on OK to close the
Click on OK again to close the Look in the Print Preview
dialog box
and you will see that TOC 1 (or Level1) is now blue.
After you click the final asking if you want to replace the TOC.
OK.
If you want to change TOC 2 (Level 2) or TOC 3 (Level 3) to be blue also, you would do the same procedure selecting TOC 2 or TOC 3 in the
before proceeding to the
The TOC is automatically updated whenever you open the ; but it's a good idea to also update it whenever
you add more titles or headings in your when you add more content that may affect the page
If you have added or changed a chapter title or heading
Desktop Publishing
to close the Modif
again to close the StylePrint Preview
area of the and you will see that TOC 1 (or
After you click the final OK, a message appears asking if you want to replace the TOC.
If you want to change TOC 2 (Level 2) or TOC 3 (Level 3) to be blue also, you would do the same procedure selecting TOC 2 or TOC 3 in the
e Modify Style
The TOC is automatically updated whenever you open the ; but it's a good idea to also update it whenever
you add more titles or headings in your when you add more content that may affect the page
heading.
Desktop Publishing
2009
Modify Style dialog
Style
dialog boxarea of the Table of
and you will see that TOC 1 (or
, a message appears
If you want to change TOC 2 (Level 2) or TOC 3 (Level 3) to be blue also, you would do the same procedure selecting TOC 2 or TOC 3 in the Style dialog
Modify Style
dialog box
The TOC is automatically updated whenever you open the ; but it's a good idea to also update it whenever
you add more titles or headings in your documentwhen you add more content that may affect the page
2009
dialog
dialog box. Table of
and you will see that TOC 1 (or
, a message appears
If you want to change TOC 2 (Level 2) or TOC 3 (Level 3) to be blue also, you would do the same
dialog dialog box.
The TOC is automatically updated whenever you open the ; but it's a good idea to also update it whenever
document
or when you add more content that may affect the page
box
Desktop Publishing
2009
7
Note: Avoid editing entries in the TOC itself; if you ever update the TOC you will lose those changes. To change text that appears in the TOC, be sure to edit this text in the body of the document and then click Update Table to compile the changes.
Word 2007Page breakspage. So, there are few things you need to take care when using a page break, such as:
1. Prevent a page break in the middle of a
2. Prevent a page break between p
3. Specify a page break before a
You can insert a automatic page There are a two ways of inserting page
To insert a page break1. Click where you want to start a new page. 2. On the 3. Alternatively, you can press
page break.
To prevent page breaks between paragraphs1. Select the
a single page.
2. On the
Box Launcher, and then click the
tab.
3. Under the
next
4. Click
5. Then, apply the page break.
To prevent page breaks in the middle of a paragraph1. Select the
breaking onto two pages. 2. On the
Boxtab.
3. Under the together
4. Click 5. Then, apply the page break.
To specify a page break before a paragraph1. Click the 2. On the
Breaks3. Under the 4. Click 5. Then, apply the page break.
Word 2007
page break
breaks
force the following text, table or image to appear on the next
page. So, there are few things you need to take care when using a page break, such as:
Prevent a page break in the middle of a
Prevent a page break between p
Specify a page break before a
You can insert a page breakautomatic page breaksThere are a two ways of inserting page
To insert a page breakClick where you want to start a new page. On the InsertAlternatively, you can press page break.
To prevent page breaks between paragraphsSelect the
paragraphs that you want to keep together on
a single page.
On the Page Layout
Box Launcher, and then click the
tab.
Under the Pagination
next
check box.
Click OK.
Then, apply the page break.
To prevent page breaks in the middle of a paragraphSelect the paragraphbreaking onto two pages. On the Page LayoutBox
Launcher, and then click the tab.
Under the Paginationtogether
check box. Click OK. Then, apply the page break.
To specify a page break before a paragraphClick the paragraphOn the Page
Breaks
tab.
Under the PaginationClick OK. Then, apply the page break.
page break
force the following text, table or image to appear on the next
page. So, there are few things you need to take care when using a page
Prevent a page break in the middle of a
Prevent a page break between p
Specify a page break before a
page break
anywhere in your document, or you can specify where Microsoft Word positions breaks.
There are a two ways of inserting page
To insert a page break
Click where you want to start a new page. Insert
tab, in the Alternatively, you can press
To prevent page breaks between paragraphsparagraphs that you want to keep together on
a single page.
Page Layout
tab, click the
Box Launcher, and then click the
Pagination
section, select the
check box.
Then, apply the page break.
To prevent page breaks in the middle of a paragraphparagraph
that you want to prevent from breaking onto two pages.
Page Layout
tab, click the Launcher, and then click the
Pagination
section, select the check box.
Then, apply the page break.
To specify a page break before a paragraphparagraph
that you want to follow the page break.
Layout tab, click the
Pagination
section, select the
Then, apply the page break.
force the following text, table or image to appear on the next page. So, there are few things you need to take care when using a page
Prevent a page break in the middle of a
Prevent a page break between paragraphs
Specify a page break before a paragraph
anywhere in your document, or you can specify where Microsoft Word positions
There are a two ways of inserting page breaks
Click where you want to start a new page. tab, in the Pages group, click
Alternatively, you can press Ctrl + Enter
To prevent page breaks between paragraphsparagraphs that you want to keep together on
tab, click the
Box Launcher, and then click the Line and Page
section, select the
Then, apply the page break.
To prevent page breaks in the middle of a paragraphthat you want to prevent from
breaking onto two pages.
tab, click the Launcher, and then click the Line and Page
section, select the
Then, apply the page break.
To specify a page break before a paragraphthat you want to follow the page break.
tab, click the Paragraph
section, select the
Then, apply the page break.
8
force the following text, table or image to appear on the next page. So, there are few things you need to take care when using a page
Prevent a page break in the middle of a paragraph
aragraphs
paragraph
anywhere in your document, or you can specify where Microsoft Word positions
into your Microsoft Word 20
Click where you want to start a new page.
group, click Page BreakCtrl + Enter
to insert a
To prevent page breaks between paragraphs
paragraphs that you want to keep together on
tab, click the Paragraph
Line and Page Breaks
section, select the Keep with
To prevent page breaks in the middle of a paragraphthat you want to prevent from
tab, click the Paragraph
Line and Page Breaks
section, select the Keep lines
To specify a page break before a paragraph
that you want to follow the page break. Paragraph
Dialog Box
section, select the Page break before
force the following text, table or image to appear on the next page. So, there are few things you need to take care when using a page
anywhere in your document, or you can specify where Microsoft Word positions
Microsoft Word 20
Page Break. to insert a
paragraphs that you want to keep together on
Dialog
Breaks
Keep w ith
To prevent page breaks in the middle of a paragraph
that you want to prevent from
Dialog Breaks
Keep lines
that you want to follow the page break.
Dialog Box
Launcher, and then click the
Page break before
check box.
Desktop Publishing
force the following text, table or image to appear on the next page. So, there are few things you need to take care when using a page
anywhere in your document, or you can specify where Microsoft Word positions
Microsoft Word 2007 documents:
Launcher, and then click the
check box.
Desktop Publishing
anywhere in your document, or you can specify where Microsoft Word positions
documents:
Launcher, and then click the
Desktop Publishing
2009
anywhere in your document, or you can specify where Microsoft Word positions
Launcher, and then click the Line and Page
2009
anywhere in your document, or you can specify where Microsoft Word positions
Line and Page
Inserting TableThere are
1.
2.
3.4.
To Insert a Table (method 1) 1.2.
3.
To Draw a Table1.2.
3.
4.
5.6.
To delete a column in a table 1.
Chapter 4
Inserting TableThere are three ways
1.
Clicking columns and rows you select from the grid, with all the cells of equal size.
2.
You can use the Insert Table the number of rows and columns as well as their sizes.
3.
You can also create 4.
When table was created, you can then enter text, numbers, and graphics iintersections of a row and a column.
To Insert a Table (method 1) 1.
Click the 2.
In the Tabledown list.
3.
Drag the intended table columns and rows from
you can use Word's draw
To Draw a Table1.
Click the 2.
In the Tablelist.
3.
Click on Layout view (if you are not already in that view) and changes the mouse pointer so it looks like a pencil.
4.
Use the mouse pointer to define the outside borders of your table, much as you would draw in a
5.
Use the pencil to draw the columns and rows into 6.
Press Esc
To delete a column in a table 1.
Move your mouse pointer to the top of the table column that you wish to delete until you see a small arrow pointing downwar
Chapter 4
Inserting Table
three ways
to insert
Clicking the Table button creates columns and rows you select from the grid, with all the cells of equal size.
You can use the Insert Table the number of rows and columns as well as their sizes. You can also create a tableWhen table was created, you can then enter text, numbers, and graphics into the table's cells, which are the boxes at the intersections of a row and a column.
To Insert a Table (method 1) Click the Insert tab of the Ribbon.
Table
group, click the down list.
Drag the intended table columns and rows from
you can use Word's draw
To Draw a Table
Click the Insert tab of the Ribbon. Table
group, click the
Click on Draw TableLayout view (if you are not already in that view) and changes the mouse pointer so it looks like a pencil. Use the mouse pointer to define the outside borders of your table, much as you would draw in a Use the pencil to draw the columns and rows into
Esc
when you are done.
To delete a column in a table Move your mouse pointer to the top of the table column that you wish to delete until you see a small rrow pointing downwar
Working with Tables
to insert a table in Word 2007 document: button creates
columns and rows you select from the grid, with all the cells of
You can use the Insert Table dialog boxthe number of rows and columns as well as their sizes.
a table
by drawing cells the size you want.When table was created, you can then enter text, numbers, and
nto the table's cells, which are the boxes at the intersections of a row and a column.
To Insert a Table (method 1)
tab of the Ribbon. group, click the Table
Drag the intended table columns and rows from For example, 5 X 5 tables. tablethe document.
To Insert a Table (method 2)
command.
section, specify the table
convenient you can use Word's draw a table feature.
tab of the Ribbon. group, click the Table
Draw Table
from the list of options. Word changes to Print Layout view (if you are not already in that view) and changes the mouse pointer so it looks like a pencil. Use the mouse pointer to define the outside borders of your table, much as you would draw in a drawingUse the pencil to draw the columns and rows into
when you are done.
To delete a column in a table
Move your mouse pointer to the top of the table column that you wish to delete until you see a small rrow pointing downward and click once. The entire column is highlighted.
Working with Tables
in Word 2007 document: button creates a table with the number of
columns and rows you select from the grid, with all the cells of
dialog box, where you can specify the number of rows and columns as well as their sizes.
by drawing cells the size you want.When table was created, you can then enter text, numbers, and
nto the table's cells, which are the boxes at the intersections of a row and a column.
tab of the Ribbon.
Table
icon. Word displays a drop
Drag the intended table columns and rows from For example, 5 X 5 tables. table
will automatically insert into the document.
To Insert a Table (method 2) 1. Click the 2. In the Table3. From the drop
command.
4. From the section, specify the table.
5. Click OK6. As an alternative to using the
convenient I nsert Tablefeature.
tab of the Ribbon.
Table
icon. Word displays a drop
om the list of options. Word changes to Print Layout view (if you are not already in that view) and changes the mouse pointer so it looks like a pencil.
Use the mouse pointer to define the outside borders of your table, drawing
programUse the pencil to draw the columns and rows into
Move your mouse pointer to the top of the table column that you wish to delete until you see a small d and click once. The entire column is highlighted.
9
Working with Tables
in Word 2007 document:
with the number of columns and rows you select from the grid, with all the cells of
, where you can specify the number of rows and columns as well as their sizes.
by drawing cells the size you want.When table was created, you can then enter text, numbers, and
nto the table's cells, which are the boxes at the
icon. Word displays a drop
Drag the intended table columns and rows from the tableFor example, 5 X 5 tables.
will automatically insert into
To Insert a Table (method 2) Click the Insert tab of the Ribbon.
Table
group, click the From the drop-down list displayed, click the
From the I nsert Tablesection, specify the Num ber of colum ns
OK. As an alternative to using the
I nsert Table
icon. Word displays a drop
om the list of options. Word changes to Print Layout view (if you are not already in that view) and changes the
Use the mouse pointer to define the outside borders of your table, program.
Use the pencil to draw the columns and rows into the table
Move your mouse pointer to the top of the table column that you wish to delete until you see a small d and click once. The entire column is highlighted.
Desktop Publishing
Working with Tables, Spellings
with the number of columns and rows you select from the grid, with all the cells of
, where you can specify
by drawing cells the size you want.
When table was created, you can then enter text, numbers, and nto the table's cells, which are the boxes at the
icon. Word displays a drop-
the table
grid. For example, 5 X 5 tables. The
will automatically insert into
To Insert a Table (method 2)
tab of the Ribbon. group, click the Table
down list displayed, click the
I nsert Table
dialog boxNum ber of colum ns
As an alternative to using the
command,
icon. Word displays a drop-down
om the list of options. Word changes to Print Layout view (if you are not already in that view) and changes the
Use the mouse pointer to define the outside borders of your table,
the table.
Move your mouse pointer to the top of the table column that you wish to delete until you see a small d and click once. The entire column is highlighted.
Desktop Publishing
, Spellings
and Grammar
tab of the Ribbon.
Table
icon. down list displayed, click the
dialog box
displayed, in the Num ber of colum ns
and Num ber of row s
Move your mouse pointer to the top of the table column that you wish to delete until you see a small d and click once. The entire column is highlighted.
Desktop Publishing
2009
and Grammar
down list displayed, click the I nsert Table
displayed, in the Table sizeNum ber of row s
Move your mouse pointer to the top of the table column that you wish to delete until you see a small
2009
and Grammar
I nsert Table
Table size
Num ber of row s
of the
Move your mouse pointer to the top of the table column that you wish to delete until you see a small
2. Right
To create table with specific column widths
1. Create a onerow table should fill the whole width of your document, from margin to margin.
2. Use the mouse to adjust the width of the first two columns, making the column widths as wide as
To delete a column in a table1. Move your mouse pointer to the top of the table column that
you wish to delete until you see a small arrow pointing downward and click once. The entire column is highlighted.
2. RightColumns.
To delete the entire table1. Highlight the entire table that you wish to delete. 2. On the Table Tools Layout tab, in the Rows & Columns group,
click on Delete icon and click the Delete Table option.
Right-click on the highlighted column and click on Delete Columns.
To create table with specific column widths
Create a onerow table should fill the whole width of your document, from margin to margin. Use the mouse to adjust the width of the first two columns, making the column widths as wide as
To delete a column in a tableMove your mouse pointer to the top of the table column that you wish to delete until you see a small arrow pointing downward and click once. The entire column is highlighted. Right-click on the highlighted columColumns.
To delete the entire tableHighlight the entire table that you wish to delete. On the Table Tools Layout tab, in the Rows & Columns group, click on Delete icon and click the Delete Table option.
click on the highlighted column and click on Delete Columns.
To create table with specific column
Create a one-row, three-row table should fill the whole width of your document, from margin to margin. Use the mouse to adjust the width of the first two columns, making the column widths as wide as
To delete a column in a tableMove your mouse pointer to the top of the table column that you wish to delete until you see a small arrow pointing downward and click once. The entire column is highlighted.
click on the highlighted colum
To delete the entire tableHighlight the entire table that you wish to delete. On the Table Tools Layout tab, in the Rows & Columns group, click on Delete icon and click the Delete Table option.
click on the highlighted column and click on Delete Columns.
To create table with specific column
-column table. This onerow table should fill the whole width of your document, from margin to margin.
Use the mouse to adjust the width of the first two columns, making the column widths as wide as
you need. 3.
4.
Split Cells icon. 5.
columns control box, specify that you want the cell split into 8 columns. 6.
To delete a column in a table
Move your mouse pointer to the top of the table column that you wish to delete until you see a small arrow pointing downward and click once. The entire column is highlighted.
click on the highlighted colum
To delete the entire table
Highlight the entire table that you wish to delete. On the Table Tools Layout tab, in the Rows & Columns group, click on Delete icon and click the Delete Table option.
10
click on the highlighted column and click on Delete Columns.
To create table with specific column
column table. This one-row table should fill the whole width of your
Use the mouse to adjust the width of the first two columns, making the column widths as wide as
you need.
Place the insertion p
From the Table Tools Layout tab, in the Merge group, click the Split Cells icon.
From the Split Cells dialog box displayed, in the Number of columns control box, specify that you want the cell split into 8 columns.
Click OK.
Move your mouse pointer to the top of the table column that you wish to delete until you see a small arrow pointing downward and click once. The entire column is highlighted.
click on the highlighted column and click on Delete
To delete a row in a table
row that you wish to delete until you see an arrow pointing inward and click once. The entire row is highlighted.
Delete Rows.
Highlight the entire table that you wish to delete.
On the Table Tools Layout tab, in the Rows & Columns group, click on Delete icon and click the Delete Table option.
click on the highlighted column and click on Delete Columns.
row table should fill the whole width of your
Use the mouse to adjust the width of the first two columns, making the column widths as wide as
Place the insertion point in the third column of the table. From the Table Tools Layout tab, in the Merge group, click the
From the Split Cells dialog box displayed, in the Number of columns control box, specify that you want the cell split into 8 columns.
Move your mouse pointer to the top of the table column that you wish to delete until you see a small arrow pointing downward and click once. The entire column is highlighted.
n and click on Delete
To delete a row in a table1. Move your mouse pointer to the left of the table
row that you wish to delete until you see an arrow pointing inward and click once. The entire row is highlighted.
2. Right-Delete Rows.
On the Table Tools Layout tab, in the Rows & Columns group, click on Delete icon and click the Delete Table option.
Desktop Publishing
click on the highlighted column and click on Delete Columns.
oint in the third column of the table. From the Table Tools Layout tab, in the Merge group, click the
From the Split Cells dialog box displayed, in the Number of columns control box, specify that you want the cell split into 8 columns.
Move your mouse pointer to the top of the table column that you wish to delete until you see a small arrow pointing
n and click on Delete
To delete a row in a tableMove your mouse pointer to the left of the table
row that you wish to delete until you see an arrow pointing inward and click once. The entire row is
-click on the highlighte
On the Table Tools Layout tab, in the Rows & Columns group,
Desktop Publishing
oint in the third column of the table. From the Table Tools Layout tab, in the Merge group, click the
From the Split Cells dialog box displayed, in the Number of columns control box, specify that you want the cell split into 8 columns.
To delete a row in a table
Move your mouse pointer to the left of the table row that you wish to delete until you see an arrow pointing inward and click once. The entire row is
click on the highlighted row and click on
Desktop Publishing
2009
oint in the third column of the table.
From the Table Tools Layout tab, in the Merge group, click the
From the Split Cells dialog box displayed, in the Number of columns control box, specify that you want the cell split into 8 columns.
Move your mouse pointer to the left of the table row that you wish to delete until you see an arrow pointing inward and click once. The entire row is
d row and click on
2009
From the Table Tools Layout tab, in the Merge group, click the
From the Split Cells dialog box displayed, in the Number of columns control box, specify that you want the cell split into 8 columns.
Move your mouse pointer to the left of the table row that you wish to delete until you see an arrow pointing inward and click once. The entire row is
d row and click on
To turn off the
1.2.
3.
4.
5.6.
HandlingIf you take advantage of easier than
One of the most common document elements to format is different unusual to set them off from surrounding text by adding additional space before them. Word lets you do this in the style definition for the
When thadditional space before the paragraph, you may be surprised when Word sometimes space. For example, when the appears right after a page break or a columninclude that extra space. Instead, the headingthe page or
Adjusting spaces1.
2.
3.
4.
To turn off the 1.
Click the Office Button then select the Word Options
2.
From the Word Options dialog box displayed, on the Popular tab, click the Language Settings
3.
From the Microsoft Office Language Settings 2007 dialog box displayed, verify that your preferred language is selected under Primary editing language.
4.
Under the Enabled editing languages: section, select any unwanted languages and click the Remove
5.
Click OK. 6.
Now Word 2007 will only check the less of those annoying squiggly lines.
Handling
Line SpacingIf you take advantage of easier than formatting
One of the most common document elements to format is different unusual to set them off from surrounding text by adding additional space before them. Word lets you do this in the style definition for the heading
When the headingadditional space before the paragraph, you may be surprised when Word sometimes fails to add that expected space. For example, when the appears right after a page break or a column
break, Word normally doesn't include that extra space. Instead, the heading
appears right up at the top of the page or column
Adjusting spaces1.
Click the then click
2.
From the dialog box displayed, click Advanceddialog box.
3.
Scroll to the bottom of the options in the dialog box.
4.
Click the plus sign to the left of Layout Opt ionsshows a long list of compatibility options it can
To turn off the editing languageClick the Office Button then select the Word Options From the Word Options dialog box displayed, on the Popular tab, click the Language Settings button. From the Microsoft Office Language Settings 2007 dialog box displayed, verify that your preferred language is selected under Primary editing language.
Under the Enabled editing languages: section, select any unwanted languages and click the Remove Click OK.
Now Word 2007 will only check the less of those annoying squiggly lines.
Line SpacingIf you take advantage of styles
formatting
manually. You can define styles for all sorts of elements in your documents.
One of the most common document elements to format is different unusual to set them off from surrounding text by adding additional space before them. Word lets you do this in the style
heading. You can specify virtually any amount of additional space before the
heading
style includes additional space before the paragraph, you may be surprised when Word
to add that expected space. For example, when the appears right after a page break or a
break, Word normally doesn't include that extra space. Instead, the
appears right up at the top of column.
Adjusting spaces
Click the Office But tonthen click Word OptionsFrom the W ord Opt ionsdialog box displayed, click
ced
at the left of the dialog box.
Scroll to the bottom of the options in the dialog box.Click the plus sign to the left
Layout Opt ions. Word shows a long list of compatibility options it can
editing languageClick the Office Button then select the Word Options
section, select any unwanted languages and click the Remove
Now Word 2007 will only check the less of those annoying squiggly lines.
Line Spacing
in Word 2007 styles
in your Word documents, they can mamanually. You can define styles for all sorts of elements in your documents.
One of the most common document elements to format is different unusual to set them off from surrounding text by adding additional space before them. Word lets you do this in the style
. You can specify virtually any amount of additional space before the
style includes additional space before the paragraph, you may be surprised when Word
to add that expected space. For example, when the heading appears right after a page break or a
break, Word normally doesn't include that extra space. Instead, the
appears right up at the top of
Office But ton
and Word Options.
W ord Opt ions
dialog box displayed, click at the left of the
Scroll to the bottom of the options in the dialog box.
Click the plus sign to the left . Word
shows a long list of compatibility options it can
editing language
Click the Office Button then select the Word Options
section, select any unwanted languages and click the Remove
Now Word 2007 will only check the spelling and grammar
less of those annoying squiggly lines.
in Word 2007
in your Word documents, they can mamanually. You can define styles for all sorts of elements in your documents.
One of the most common document elements to format is different unusual to set them off from surrounding text by adding additional space before them. Word lets you do this in the style
. You can specify virtually any amount of additional space before the
11
Click the Office Button then select the Word Options button.
section, select any unwanted languages and click the Remove
spelling and grammar
for your preferred language so you should see
in your Word documents, they can mamanually. You can define styles for all sorts of elements in your documents.
One of the most common document elements to format is different headingunusual to set them off from surrounding text by adding additional space before them. Word lets you do this in the style
. You can specify virtually any amount of additional space before the
Desktop Publishing
.
section, select any unwanted languages and click the Remove button.
for your preferred language so you should see
in your Word documents, they can make your formattingmanually. You can define styles for all sorts of elements in your documents.
heading
levels. When unusual to set them off from surrounding text by adding additional space before them. Word lets you do this in the style
. You can specify virtually any amount of additional space before the
Desktop Publishing
for your preferred language so you should see
formatting
much more consistent and manually. You can define styles for all sorts of elements in your documents.
levels. When formattingunusual to set them off from surrounding text by adding additional space before them. Word lets you do this in the style
. You can specify virtually any amount of additional space before the heading
Desktop Publishing
2009
for your preferred language so you should see
much more consistent and manually. You can define styles for all sorts of elements in your documents.
formatting
headings, it unusual to set them off from surrounding text by adding additional space before them. Word lets you do this in the style
heading
that you want.
2009
for your preferred language so you should see
much more consistent and
headings, it is not unusual to set them off from surrounding text by adding additional space before them. Word lets you do this in the style
that you want.
use.
5. Scroll through the list of options until you find thecolumn
6. If the check mark beside this option is selected, then Word ignores your "space before" specification when the paragraph with that specification occurs right after a page break or a your "space before" setting is honored in these instances.
7. Click
You should note that if your of a page, Word suppresses that extra space, no matter what. The reason is because Word "eats up" the extra space, as if it was really at the bottom of the previous page.
Proofreading Documents in Word 2007
Word 2007 automatically proofreads your document for grammar, spelling, and style errors as you type. You can correct the errors immediately as they occur or at the end of your Word session.
You can customize how Word proofreads your documents by setting the desired proofreading options before you work on your document.
To proof read your Word documents1. Click the
Options2. From the
click 3. Under the AutoCorrect Opti
AutoCorrect Options4. From the
the check box from the spelling checker
5. Clear this option will make Word ignore any spelling errors while you types. Click 6. Under When correcting spelling and grammar in Word section, click the Writing Style: 7. Scroll down to the
suitable check box. 8. Click
use.
Scroll through the list of options until you find thecolumn
break
If the check mark beside this option is selected, then Word ignores your "space before" specification when the paragraph with that specification occurs right after a page break or a your "space before" setting is honored in these instances. Click OK.
You should note that if your of a page, Word suppresses that extra space, no matter what. The reason is because Word "eats up" the extra space, as if it was really at the bottom of the previous page.
Proofreading Documents in Word 2007
Word 2007 automatically proofreads your document for grammar, spelling, and style errors as you type. You can correct the errors immediately as they occur or at the end of your Word session.
You can customize how Word proofreads your documents by the desired proofreading options before you work on
your document.
To proof read your Word documentsClick the Office But tonOptions
button. From the W ord Opt ionsclick ProofingUnder the AutoCorrect OptiAutoCorrect OptionsFrom the AutoCorrectthe check box from the spelling checkerClear this option will make Word ignore any spelling errors while you types. Click Under When correcting spelling and grammar in Word section, click the Writing Style: Scroll down to the
suitable check box. Click OK to close the
Scroll through the list of options until you find thebreak.
If the check mark beside this option is selected, then Word ignores your "space before" specification when the paragraph with that specification occurs right after a page break or a your "space before" setting is honored in these instances.
You should note that if your headingof a page, Word suppresses that extra space, no matter what. The reason is because Word "eats up" the extra space, as if it was really at the bottom of the previous page.
Proofreading Documents in Word 2007
Word 2007 automatically proofreads your document for grammar, spelling, and style errors as you type. You can correct the errors immediately as they occur or at the end
You can customize how Word proofreads your documents by the desired proofreading options before you work on
To proof read your Word documentsOffice But ton, and then click the button.
W ord Opt ions
Proofing. Under the AutoCorrect OptiAutoCorrect Options
button.AutoCorrect
dialog box displayed, clear the check box Autom at ica lly use suggest ions from the spelling checkerClear this option will make Word ignore any spelling errors while you types. Click Under When correcting spelling and grammar in Word section, click the Writing Style: Scroll down to the Style:
suitable check box.
to close the Grammar Settings
Scroll through the list of options until you find the
If the check mark beside this option is selected, then Word ignores your "space before" specification when the paragraph with that specification occurs right after a page break or a your "space before" setting is honored in these instances.
heading
style specifies space before the of a page, Word suppresses that extra space, no matter what. The reason is because Word "eats up" the extra space, as if it was really at the bottom of the previous page.
Proofreading Documents in Word 2007
Word 2007 automatically proofreads your document for grammar, spelling, and style errors as you type. You can correct the errors immediately as they occur or at the end
You can customize how Word proofreads your documents by the desired proofreading options before you work on
To proof read your Word documents
, and then click the
dialog box displayed,
Under the AutoCorrect Options section, click the button.
dialog box displayed, clear Autom at ica lly use suggest ions
from the spelling checker. Clear this option will make Word ignore any spelling errors while you types. Click Under When correcting spelling and grammar in Word section, click the Writing Style:
Style: section and select the
Grammar Settings
12
Scroll through the list of options until you find the
option called
If the check mark beside this option is selected, then Word ignores your "space before" specification when the paragraph with that specification occurs right after a page break or a your "space before" setting is honored in these instances.
style specifies space before the of a page, Word suppresses that extra space, no matter what. The reason is because Word "eats up" the extra space, as if it was really at the bottom of the previous page.
Proofreading Documents in Word 2007
Word 2007 automatically proofreads your document for grammar, spelling, and style errors as you type. You can correct the errors immediately as they occur or at the end
You can customize how Word proofreads your documents by the desired proofreading options before you work on
, and then click the Word
dialog box displayed,
ons section, click the
dialog box displayed, clear Automatically use suggestions
Clear this option will make Word ignore any spelling errors while you types. Click Under When correcting spelling and grammar in Word section, click the Writing Style:
section and select the
Grammar Settings
dialog box.
option called Suppress Space Before after a hard page or
If the check mark beside this option is selected, then Word ignores your "space before" specification when the paragraph with that specification occurs right after a page break or a your "space before" setting is honored in these instances.
style specifies space before the headingof a page, Word suppresses that extra space, no matter what. The reason is because Word "eats up" the extra space, as
Clear this option will make Word ignore any spelling errors while you types. Click Under When correcting spelling and grammar in Word section, click the Writing Style:
dialog box.
Desktop Publishing
Suppress Space Before after a hard page or
If the check mark beside this option is selected, then Word ignores your "space before" specification when the paragraph with that specification occurs right after a page break or a column break. If it is not selected, then
heading, and that headingof a page, Word suppresses that extra space, no matter what. The reason is because Word "eats up" the extra space, as
Clear this option will make Word ignore any spelling errors while you types. Click Under When correcting spelling and grammar in Word section, click the Writing Style:
Desktop Publishing
Suppress Space Before after a hard page or
If the check mark beside this option is selected, then Word ignores your "space before" specification when the break. If it is not selected, then
heading
naturally falls at the top of a page, Word suppresses that extra space, no matter what. The reason is because Word "eats up" the extra space, as
Clear this option will make Word ignore any spelling errors while you types. Click OK. Under When correcting spelling and grammar in Word section, click the Writing Style: Settings
Desktop Publishing
2009
Suppress Space Before after a hard page or
If the check mark beside this option is selected, then Word ignores your "space before" specification when the break. If it is not selected, then
naturally falls at the top of a page, Word suppresses that extra space, no matter what. The reason is because Word "eats up" the extra space, as
Settings
button.
2009
Suppress Space Before after a hard page or
If the check mark beside this option is selected, then Word ignores your "space before" specification when the break. If it is not selected, then
naturally falls at the top of a page, Word suppresses that extra space, no matter what. The reason is because Word "eats up" the extra space, as
9.10.
Add a Document Watermark in Word 2007
A documentthat your Word 2007
Word 2007 has many options for creating watermarks. Although default watermarks with your own custom watermark
To add a default Word watermark1.2.
3.
4.
To add a custom Word watermark1.2.
3.
4.
5.
9.
Click OK
10.
When you are ready to proofread your document, click the through and correct any errors that Word has found. Then from the suggestions pop
Add a Document Watermark in Word 2007
document
watermarkthat your Word 2007
Word 2007 has many options for creating watermarks. Although default watermarks with your own custom watermark
will stand out from the
To add a default Word watermark1.
Open Word 2007. 2.
Click the 2007 ribbon.
3.
In the Page BackgroundWatermark
4.
From the menu, you can click on any available watermarks and you will see the watermark
To add a custom Word watermark1.
Open Word 2007. 2.
Click the 2007 ribbon.
3.
In the Page BackgroundWatermark
4.
Click on the open the
5.
From the dialog box, you have 3 options to choose:
a. No current
b. Picture button and choose a picture to be your
c. Text
again to close the
When you are ready to proofread your document, click the through and correct any errors that Word has found. Then from the suggestions pop
Add a Document Watermark in Word 2007
watermark
is just a 'simple text' appear at the background of your Word documents. It can help signify that your Word 2007 document
Word 2007 has many options for creating watermarks. Although default watermarks with your own custom
will stand out from the
To add a default Word watermarkOpen Word 2007.
Click the Page Layout2007 ribbon.
Page BackgroundWatermark
icon to open a menu.From the menu, you can click on any available watermarks and you will see the watermark
is inserted in your
To add a custom Word watermarkOpen Word 2007.
Click the Page Layout2007 ribbon.
Page BackgroundWatermark
icon to open a menu. Click on the Custom Watermarkopen the Printed WatermarkFrom the dialog box, you have 3 options to
No watermarkcurrent watermarkPicture watermarkbutton and choose a picture to be your Text
watermark
again to close the Word OptionsWhen you are ready to proofread your document, click the through and correct any errors that Word has found. Then from the suggestions pop
Add a Document Watermark in Word 2007
is just a 'simple text' appear at the background of your Word documents. It can help signify document
should be treated as "Do not copy", "Sample", "Confidential", "Dra
Word 2007 has many options for creating watermarks. Although default watermarks with your own custom text or image. You can also tweak the
will stand out from the document
To add a default Word watermark
Page Layout
tab in the Word
Page Background
group, click the icon to open a menu.
From the menu, you can click on any available watermarks and you will see the
is inserted in your document
To add a custom Word watermark
Page Layout
tab in the Word
Page Background
group, click thicon to open a menu.
Custom Watermark
button to Printed Watermark
dialog box. From the dialog box, you have 3 options to
watermark
- to remove the watermark. watermark
- to use a picture as the button and choose a picture to be your
watermark
- to create a custom
Word Options
dialog box.
When you are ready to proofread your document, click the through and correct any errors that Word has found. Then from the suggestions pop
Add a Document Watermark in Word 2007
is just a 'simple text' appear at the background of your Word documents. It can help signify should be treated as "Do not copy", "Sample", "Confidential", "Dra
Word 2007 has many options for creating watermarks. Although default or image. You can also tweak the
document.
in the Word
group, click the
From the menu, you can click on any available watermarks and you will see the
document.
in the Word
group, click the
button to dialog box.
From the dialog box, you have 3 options to
to remove the
to use a picture as the button and choose a picture to be your document
to create a custom text
13
dialog box.
When you are ready to proofread your document, click the Proofing Errorsthrough and correct any errors that Word has found. Then from the suggestions pop
Add a Document Watermark in Word 2007
is just a 'simple text' appear at the background of your Word documents. It can help signify should be treated as "Do not copy", "Sample", "Confidential", "Dra
Word 2007 has many options for creating watermarks. Although default or image. You can also tweak the
to use a picture as the watermarkdocument
watermarktext
watermark6.
the watermark's language.7.
8.
down menu.9.
appears correctly on paper. A default is Auto.
Color:
watermark10.
out or prevent washing out the 11.
should appear diagonally or horizontally. 12.
Desktop Publishing
Proofing Errorsthrough and correct any errors that Word has found. Then from the suggestions pop
is just a 'simple text' appear at the background of your Word documents. It can help signify should be treated as "Do not copy", "Sample", "Confidential", "Dra
Word 2007 has many options for creating watermarks. Although default watermarkor image. You can also tweak the watermark
watermark. You need to click on the watermark.
watermark
(let say we choose this).
Language: Click the dropthe watermark's language.
Text: Enter your desired
Font: Change the down menu.
Size: Change the appears correctly on paper. A default is Auto.
Click the dropwatermark
color.
Check or uncheck out or prevent washing out the
Layout: To determine whether the should appear diagonally or horizontally.
Click the OK button
Desktop Publishing
Proofing Errors
button in the status bar to sort
through and correct any errors that Word has found. Then from the suggestions pop-up, select the correct
is just a 'simple text' appear at the background of your Word documents. It can help signify should be treated as "Do not copy", "Sample", "Confidential", "Dra
watermark
types are provided, you can create watermark
size, font, color, and how much the
. You need to click on the
(let say we choose this). Click the drop
the watermark's language.
Enter your desired watermarkChange the watermark
Change the watermarkappears correctly on paper. A default is Auto.
Click the drop-down menu to change the
Check or uncheck "Semitransparent"out or prevent washing out the watermark
To determine whether the should appear diagonally or horizontally.
OK button
when
Desktop Publishing
2009
button in the status bar to sort up, select the correct
is just a 'simple text' appear at the background of your Word documents. It can help signify should be treated as "Do not copy", "Sample", "Confidential", "Draft", etc.
types are provided, you can create size, font, color, and how much the
. You need to click on the Select Picture
(let say we choose this).
Click the drop-down menu to modify
watermark
textwatermark
font from the drop
watermark
size to ensure it appears correctly on paper. A default is Auto.
down menu to change the
"Semitransparent"watermark
text.
To determine whether the watermarkshould appear diagonally or horizontally.
when
finish.
2009
button in the status bar to sort
up, select the correct
word
is just a 'simple text' appear at the background of your Word documents. It can help signify
types are provided, you can create size, font, color, and how much the
Select Picture
u to modify
text. font from the drop-
size to ensure it appears correctly on paper. A default is Auto.
down menu to change the
"Semitransparent"
to wash
watermark
Word 2007 Status BarThe W ord 2 0 0 7 the current document.
It displays page, total words in informationturn it off if you don't need the bar.
Right-clicking the menu. The
1. It controls what you see on the as well as certain controls.
2. It lets you turn o
To control the display on the Customize status bar menu1. The menu's options are enabled (selected) when a check mark
appears next to them.2. The items at the top of the menu (from
Numberdocument.
3. The options from are used to turn off or on those features.
4. The last three options on the menu control whether the View or Zoom shortcuts appear on the
Note: You can trCustomize
Word 2007 Status BarW ord 2 0 0 7 status bar
the current document.
It displays information
page, total words in information
about which editing toggles you have turned on or you can
turn it off if you don't need the
clicking the status barmenu. The Customize Status Bar
It controls what you see on the as well as certain controls. It lets you turn o
To control the display on the Customize status bar menuThe menu's options are enabled (selected) when a check mark appears next to them.The items at the top of the menu (from Number
to document.
The options from are used to turn off or on those features. The last three options on the menu control whether the View or Zoom shortcuts appear on the
You can try to check or select the available options in the Customize Status Bar and see the changes to your documents.
Word 2007 Status Bar
status bar
is the area at the bottom of the Word window that gives
about what page you are on, line number on the
page, total words in the documentabout which editing toggles you have turned on or you can
turn it off if you don't need the information
status bar
produces the helpful Status Bar
menu does two things: It controls what you see on the as well as certain controls.
It lets you turn on or off some Word features.
To control the display on the Customize status bar menuThe menu's options are enabled (selected) when a check mark appears next to them.
The items at the top of the menu (from to W ord Count
The options from Caps Lockare used to turn off or on those features. The last three options on the menu control whether the View or Zoom shortcuts appear on the
y to check or select the available options in the and see the changes to your documents.
is the area at the bottom of the Word window that gives
about what page you are on, line number on the the document, etc. It also shows some other
about which editing toggles you have turned on or you can information
provided shows on the
produces the helpful menu does two things:
It controls what you see on the status bar
n or off some Word features.
To control the display on the Customize status bar menuThe menu's options are enabled (selected) when a check mark
The items at the top of the menu (from W ord Count) display information
Caps Lock
down through are used to turn off or on those features. The last three options on the menu control whether the View or Zoom shortcuts appear on the status bar
y to check or select the available options in the and see the changes to your documents.
14
is the area at the bottom of the Word window that gives
about what page you are on, line number on the , etc. It also shows some other
about which editing toggles you have turned on or you can provided shows on the
produces the helpful Customize Status Barmenu does two things:
status bar, informational tidbits
n or off some Word features.
To control the display on the Customize status bar menuThe menu's options are enabled (selected) when a check mark
The items at the top of the menu (from Form at ted Page information
about your
down through Macro Recordingare used to turn off or on those features.
The last three options on the menu control whether the View or status bar.
y to check or select the available options in the and see the changes to your documents.
is the area at the bottom of the Word window that gives
about what page you are on, line number on the , etc. It also shows some other
about which editing toggles you have turned on or you can provided shows on the status
Status Bar
, informational tidbits
To control the display on the Customize status bar menu
The menu's options are enabled (selected) when a check mark
Form at ted Page about your
Macro Recording
The last three options on the menu control whether the View or
y to check or select the available options in the
Desktop Publishing
is the area at the bottom of the Word window that gives information
Desktop Publishing
information
and some controls on
Desktop Publishing
2009
and some controls on
2009
and some controls on
Desktop Publishing
2009
15
MICROSOFT PUBLISHER
Chapter 5-Overview on MS Publisher 2007
In This Chapter
Deciding when to use Microsoft Publisher 2007
Understanding desktop publishing
Exploring the design process
Using Publisher templates
Desktop publishing uses page layout software and a personal computer to combine text, type, drawings, and images on a page to create books, newsletters, marketing brochures, flyers, greeting cards, and Web sites, for example. Anything you can print on a page can be put into a page layout program. Microsoft Publisher 2007 lets you place elements on a page, precisely position them, modify them, and specify a print job by using techniques that commercial printers require. Whether you print to your inkjet or laser printer, run down the street to Quick Copy Shop, or send your files to a commercial printer, Microsoft Publisher 2007 helps you prepare your work for that level of quality.
When Should You Use Microsoft Publisher 2007 Many programs let you design and print pages to various levels of sophistication. These programs include word processors such as Microsoft Word 2007 and Corel WordPerfect Office X3; graphics programs such as CorelDraw and Adobe Illustrator; and even low-end integrated packages such as Microsoft Works and Broderbund Think Free Office 3. The program I use for writing, Microsoft Word 2007, enables me to type text, format text, import pictures, create drawings, and even work with images.
If you can do all that in Microsoft Word 2007, why do you need a desktop publishing or page layout program like Microsoft Publisher 2007? The short answer is control. Microsoft Publisher 2007 lets you control these elements with finer precision and also offers you many special tools. So, if you just want to stick your company s logo at the top of your letters and insert a copy of your scanned-in signature at the bottom, you don t need Publisher to do that.
If you want to create a company logo by combining a couple of graphics from different sources, write some text, add some color, and then separate the output to give to a commercial print service to print, Publisher is a better choice. If you want to create high-quality marketing materials that will help you attract new customers and keep existing customers, Publisher is definitely the way to go. It does these things well.
How Desktop Publishing Works Page layout software combines various parts into a single document, or publication. The following list briefly covers the parts you can meld. Nearly all objects on a page are in frames or blocks that are created when you import or create the object:
Text: Text is the stuff you type: all those individual characters that form words, sentences, and paragraphs, for example.
Type: Type and typography are the various letter forms you can use to make your text more attractive. Publisher lets you access WordArt, a text manipulation program that lets you add fancy effects to your text.
Picture: Computers make two kinds of pictures: drawn (vector, or object oriented) and painted (raster, or bitmapped) images. You can import both types into a picture frame. While Publisher doesn t ship with a ton of clip art, you can go to the Microsoft Office Web site to access a huge amount of clip art, including thousands of clip art images, photographs, Web-related graphics, animated GIFs (those cute pictures that seem to wiggle around on Web pages), and more! In fact the Microsoft Office Web site has more than 150,000 free images and sounds
Desktop Publishing
2009
16
Drawn object: Publisher isnt a drawing program, although some tools on its Objects toolbar enable you to create drawn images, such as lines, ovals and circles, rectangles and squares, and a whole bunch of custom shapes.
Table: Although you can import tables from other programs as objects, as either drawings or Object Linking and Embedding (OLE) objects managed by other applications, Publisher has its own Table tool.
You can use Publisher to create these elements from scratch, or you can use other programs to create the objects and then use Publisher to place them in your publication. If you have used a previous version of Publisher or Microsoft Office, most things you see on the screen will seem familiar.
However, if your first exposure to Publisher and/or Office is with version 2007, you might need a brief tour. The first thing you ll probably notice is that the user interface in Microsoft Publisher 2007 is quite a bit different from the rest of the Microsoft Office 2007 products. Microsoft Publisher 2007 utilizes the more traditional menu system found in Microsoft Office 2003 and earlier. The other Microsoft Office products use Microsoft s new Ribbon interface that is intended to make it easier and faster to find the commands and features when you need them.
1. Title bar: At the very top of the Publisher window, you ll find the Title bar. The Title bar shows you the name of the current publication and whether the publication is a Print Publication or a Web Publication.
2. Menu bar: Just below the Title bar you ll find the Menu bar. The Menu bar contains the menus. The Menu bar gives you access to all the features and functions of Publisher. Everything from creating publications to specifying program settings to getting help.
3. Standard toolbar: This toolbar is located right below the Menu bar. The Standard toolbar s main job is to let you control the appearance of the text in your publication.
4. Publisher Tasks pane: This little guy likes to hang out on the left side of the screen just under the Standard toolbar. Although often hidden, it expands to provide links that guide you through the steps necessary to complete the design of your publication.
5. Objects toolbar: This toolbar is located on the left side of the screen. It has the tools to help you create Text boxes, Tables, Pictures, and the like.
6. Publicat ion w orkspace: In the middle of the screen you ll see a large white box. The shape of this box varies with the type of publication you are creating. This white box represents the page upon which you create your publication.
7. Rulers: The rulers located above and to the left of the publication workspace are provided to help you layout and properly align objects on your page.
8. Scroll bars: On the right and bottom of the screens you see scroll bars that let you scroll vertically and horizontally when your entire document doesn t fit on the screen.
9. Page Select ion bar: The Page Selection bar, located at the bottom left of the screen, lets you quickly go to any page in your publication. This may not seem like a big deal in a one-
The Design ProcessPage design is an iterative process. You can always find a better way to make a point wior to refine a graphical image, for example. You can always return to a publication later and find something you could have done better. Like all creative endeavors, a wellexperimenting, and offering thoughtful criticism at all stages. The sections that follow describe some methods that designers use to make their pages stand out from the crowd.
StoryboardingTo get a good start on the design process, you camethod is storyboarding. progression.Movie designers use storyboards to illustrate key frames in a movie, which enables them to present the movie in a preproduction form that others can view and understand. You can use this same technique. Many people like to mock up their design projects witseveral pages, create storyboards.
But this is all a matter of preference: The important thing is to plan your publication before you create it. The tools for creating frames, lines, and boxes make these page elements easy to create and modify inside Publisher. Publisher has a collection of templates that help you create professional looking publications. When you first launch Publisher, you see the templates in t
The Publication Types pane on the left provides a list of the various types of publications that you can create with Publisher, while the center pane shows a list of the most popular types of publications. When you click on a type of publication in the Pubwhat the various publications of that particular type will look like. (In other words, the list of available templates changewith the type of publication you chwhen they create a publication for you. When you create a document by using the Publisher templates, the result is a dummy of the document you re creating.
The Figuresample document with a headline, graphics blocks, and text frames with sample text. Each element on the page can be modified, but the document s overallups, should show similar use of text, graphics, and overall design. Try moving away from your design and looking at it from afarChoose View its purpose is obvious or whether clutter is obscuring its purpose. If you have too many page elementssome.
Assembling a pageAfter you block out a page design, you can replace the dummy text, pictures, and other frames with the data you want to include on the page. This is the assembly stage of page composition. Depending on the type of selected, you can apply one of the Edit or Insert menu commands to bring the data into Publisher.
Chances are great that after you compose and fill all the frames with real data, the page will require more tweaking. Publisher contaitools for repositioning, resizing, and fitting objects on a page.
Printing a pageAfter your page is composed the way you want it, you re ready to print. You can choose to print files to local printers and select from any of thethat came with Windows XP or Windows Vista. Printing to a local printer is no different in Publisher than it is in most other Windows applications:simply choose File
page flyer, but if you are working on a 300
The Design ProcessPage design is an iterative process. You can always find a better way to make a point wior to refine a graphical image, for example. You can always return to a publication later and find something you could have done better. Like all creative endeavors, a wellexperimenting, and offering thoughtful criticism at all stages. The sections that follow describe some methods that designers use to make their pages stand out from the crowd.
Storyboarding
To get a good start on the design process, you camethod is storyboarding. progression.
Movie designers use storyboards to illustrate key frames in a movie, which enables them to present the movie in a preproduction form that others can view and understand. You can use this same technique. Many people like to mock up their design projects witseveral pages, create storyboards.
But this is all a matter of preference: The important thing is to plan your publication before you create it. The tools for eating frames, lines, and boxes make these page elements easy to create and modify inside Publisher. Publisher has a
collection of templates that help you create professional looking publications. When you first launch Publisher, you see the templates in the Catalog window as a collection of thumbnails showing sample documents you can create.
The Publication Types pane on the left provides a list of the various types of publications that you can create with Publisher, while the center pane shows a list of the most popular types of publications. When you click on a type of publication in the Pubwhat the various publications of that particular type will look like. (In other words, the list of available templates changewith the type of publication you chwhen they create a publication for you. When you create a document by using the Publisher templates, the result is a dummy of the document you re creating.
The Figure
shows a four panel brochure created with one of the Brochures templates. The template helps generate a sample document with a headline, graphics blocks, and text frames with sample text. Each element on the page can be modified, but the document s overallups, should show similar use of text, graphics, and overall design. Try moving away from your design and looking at it from afar. Better yet, try zooming out so that you can see Choose View Zoom from the main menu and choose 33% or 25% from the submenu that appears. Determine whether its purpose is obvious or whether clutter is obscuring its purpose. If you have too many page elementssome.
Assembling a pageAfter you block out a page design, you can replace the dummy text, pictures, and other frames with the data you want to include on the page. This is the assembly stage of page composition. Depending on the type of selected, you can apply one of the Edit or Insert menu commands to bring the data into Publisher.
Chances are great that after you compose and fill all the frames with real data, the page will require more tweaking. Publisher contaitools for repositioning, resizing, and fitting objects on a page.
Printing a pageAfter your page is composed the way you want it, you re ready to print. You can choose to print files to local printers and select from any of thethat came with Windows XP or Windows Vista. Printing to a local printer is no different in Publisher than it is in most other Windows applications:simply choose File
page flyer, but if you are working on a 300
The Design Process
Page design is an iterative process. You can always find a better way to make a point wior to refine a graphical image, for example. You can always return to a publication later and find something you could have done better. Like all creative endeavors, a wellexperimenting, and offering thoughtful criticism at all stages. The sections that follow describe some methods that designers use to make their pages stand out from the crowd.
To get a good start on the design process, you camethod is storyboarding. Storyboards
Movie designers use storyboards to illustrate key frames in a movie, which enables them to present the movie in a preproduction form that others can view and understand. You can use this same technique. Many people like to mock up their design projects with pencil and paper. They create a dummy of their publication and, when the publication spans several pages, create storyboards.
But this is all a matter of preference: The important thing is to plan your publication before you create it. The tools for eating frames, lines, and boxes make these page elements easy to create and modify inside Publisher. Publisher has a
collection of templates that help you create professional looking publications. When you first launch Publisher, you see he Catalog window as a collection of thumbnails showing sample documents you can create.
The Publication Types pane on the left provides a list of the various types of publications that you can create with Publisher, while the center pane shows a list of the most popular types of publications. When you click on a type of publication in the Publication Types pane, the center pane changes to show a list of thumbnail images that show you what the various publications of that particular type will look like. (In other words, the list of available templates changewith the type of publication you chwhen they create a publication for you. When you create a document by using the Publisher templates, the result is a dummy of the document you re creating.
shows a four panel brochure created with one of the Brochures templates. The template helps generate a sample document with a headline, graphics blocks, and text frames with sample text. Each element on the page can be modified, but the document s overallups, should show similar use of text, graphics, and overall design. Try moving away from your design and looking at it
Better yet, try zooming out so that you can see Zoom from the main menu and choose 33% or 25% from the submenu that appears. Determine whether
its purpose is obvious or whether clutter is obscuring its purpose. If you have too many page elements
Assembling a page
After you block out a page design, you can replace the dummy text, pictures, and other frames with the data you want to include on the page. This is the assembly stage of page composition. Depending on the type of selected, you can apply one of the Edit or Insert menu commands to bring the data into Publisher.
Chances are great that after you compose and fill all the frames with real data, the page will require more tweaking. Publisher contains a number of specialized tools for repositioning, resizing, and fitting objects on
Printing a page
After your page is composed the way you want it, you re ready to print. You can choose to print files to local printers and select from any of thethat came with Windows XP or Windows Vista. Printing to a local printer is no different in Publisher than it is in most other Windows applications:simply choose File
Print.
page flyer, but if you are working on a 300
Page design is an iterative process. You can always find a better way to make a point wior to refine a graphical image, for example. You can always return to a publication later and find something you could have done better. Like all creative endeavors, a wellexperimenting, and offering thoughtful criticism at all stages. The sections that follow describe some methods that designers use to make their pages stand out from the crowd.
To get a good start on the design process, you caStoryboards
are like block diagrams. Cartoonists use storyboards to show a story s
Movie designers use storyboards to illustrate key frames in a movie, which enables them to present the movie in a preproduction form that others can view and understand. You can use this same technique. Many people like to mock up
h pencil and paper. They create a dummy of their publication and, when the publication spans several pages, create storyboards.
But this is all a matter of preference: The important thing is to plan your publication before you create it. The tools for eating frames, lines, and boxes make these page elements easy to create and modify inside Publisher. Publisher has a
collection of templates that help you create professional looking publications. When you first launch Publisher, you see he Catalog window as a collection of thumbnails showing sample documents you can create.
The Publication Types pane on the left provides a list of the various types of publications that you can create with Publisher, while the center pane shows a list of the most popular types of publications. When you click on a type of
lication Types pane, the center pane changes to show a list of thumbnail images that show you what the various publications of that particular type will look like. (In other words, the list of available templates changewith the type of publication you choose in the Publication Types pane.) In effect, storyboarding is what the templates do when they create a publication for you. When you create a document by using the Publisher templates, the result is a dummy of the document you re creating.
shows a four panel brochure created with one of the Brochures templates. The template helps generate a sample document with a headline, graphics blocks, and text frames with sample text. Each element on the page can be modified, but the document s overall
look comes from using a particular Publisher template. Your dummies, or mockups, should show similar use of text, graphics, and overall design. Try moving away from your design and looking at it
Better yet, try zooming out so that you can see Zoom from the main menu and choose 33% or 25% from the submenu that appears. Determine whether
its purpose is obvious or whether clutter is obscuring its purpose. If you have too many page elements
After you block out a page design, you can replace the dummy text, pictures, and other frames with the data you want to include on the page. This is the assembly stage of page composition. Depending on the type of selected, you can apply one of the Edit or Insert menu commands to bring the data into Publisher.
Chances are great that after you compose and fill all the frames with real data, the page will require more
ns a number of specialized tools for repositioning, resizing, and fitting objects on
After your page is composed the way you want it, you re ready to print. You can choose to print files to local printers and select from any of the
print drivers that came with Windows XP or Windows Vista. Printing to a local printer is no different in Publisher than it is in most other Windows applications:
page flyer, but if you are working on a 300-page catalog, that feature comes in mighty handy.
Page design is an iterative process. You can always find a better way to make a point wior to refine a graphical image, for example. You can always return to a publication later and find something you could have done better. Like all creative endeavors, a well-designed publication can be improved by planning experimenting, and offering thoughtful criticism at all stages. The sections that follow describe some methods that designers use to make their pages stand out from the crowd.
To get a good start on the design process, you can block out the way you want your publication to look. One blockare like block diagrams. Cartoonists use storyboards to show a story s
Movie designers use storyboards to illustrate key frames in a movie, which enables them to present the movie in a preproduction form that others can view and understand. You can use this same technique. Many people like to mock up
h pencil and paper. They create a dummy of their publication and, when the publication spans
But this is all a matter of preference: The important thing is to plan your publication before you create it. The tools for eating frames, lines, and boxes make these page elements easy to create and modify inside Publisher. Publisher has a
collection of templates that help you create professional looking publications. When you first launch Publisher, you see he Catalog window as a collection of thumbnails showing sample documents you can create.
The Publication Types pane on the left provides a list of the various types of publications that you can create with Publisher, while the center pane shows a list of the most popular types of publications. When you click on a type of
lication Types pane, the center pane changes to show a list of thumbnail images that show you what the various publications of that particular type will look like. (In other words, the list of available templates change
oose in the Publication Types pane.) In effect, storyboarding is what the templates do when they create a publication for you. When you create a document by using the Publisher templates, the result is a
shows a four panel brochure created with one of the Brochures templates. The template helps generate a sample document with a headline, graphics blocks, and text frames with sample text. Each element on the page can be
look comes from using a particular Publisher template. Your dummies, or mockups, should show similar use of text, graphics, and overall design. Try moving away from your design and looking at it
Better yet, try zooming out so that you can see Zoom from the main menu and choose 33% or 25% from the submenu that appears. Determine whether
its purpose is obvious or whether clutter is obscuring its purpose. If you have too many page elements
After you block out a page design, you can replace the dummy text, pictures, and other frames with the data you want to include on the page. This is the assembly stage of page composition. Depending on the type of selected, you can apply one of the Edit or Insert menu commands to bring the data into Publisher.
Chances are great that after you compose and fill all the frames with real data, the page will require more
ns a number of specialized tools for repositioning, resizing, and fitting objects on
After your page is composed the way you want it, you re ready to print. You can choose to print files to
print drivers that came with Windows XP or Windows Vista. Printing to a local printer is no different in Publisher than it is in most other Windows applications:
You
17
page catalog, that feature comes in mighty handy.
Page design is an iterative process. You can always find a better way to make a point wior to refine a graphical image, for example. You can always return to a publication later and find something you could
designed publication can be improved by planning experimenting, and offering thoughtful criticism at all stages. The sections that follow describe some methods that designers use to make their pages stand out from the crowd.
n block out the way you want your publication to look. One blockare like block diagrams. Cartoonists use storyboards to show a story s
Movie designers use storyboards to illustrate key frames in a movie, which enables them to present the movie in a preproduction form that others can view and understand. You can use this same technique. Many people like to mock up
h pencil and paper. They create a dummy of their publication and, when the publication spans
But this is all a matter of preference: The important thing is to plan your publication before you create it. The tools for eating frames, lines, and boxes make these page elements easy to create and modify inside Publisher. Publisher has a
collection of templates that help you create professional looking publications. When you first launch Publisher, you see he Catalog window as a collection of thumbnails showing sample documents you can create.
The Publication Types pane on the left provides a list of the various types of publications that you can create with Publisher, while the center pane shows a list of the most popular types of publications. When you click on a type of
lication Types pane, the center pane changes to show a list of thumbnail images that show you what the various publications of that particular type will look like. (In other words, the list of available templates change
oose in the Publication Types pane.) In effect, storyboarding is what the templates do when they create a publication for you. When you create a document by using the Publisher templates, the result is a
shows a four panel brochure created with one of the Brochures templates. The template helps generate a sample document with a headline, graphics blocks, and text frames with sample text. Each element on the page can be
look comes from using a particular Publisher template. Your dummies, or mockups, should show similar use of text, graphics, and overall design. Try moving away from your design and looking at it
Better yet, try zooming out so that you can see the overall layout but cannot read the text. Zoom from the main menu and choose 33% or 25% from the submenu that appears. Determine whether
its purpose is obvious or whether clutter is obscuring its purpose. If you have too many page elements
After you block out a page design, you can replace the dummy text, pictures, and other frames with the data you want to include on the page. This is the assembly stage of page composition. Depending on the type of selected, you can apply one of the Edit or Insert menu commands to bring the data into Publisher.
Desktop Publishing
page catalog, that feature comes in mighty handy.
Page design is an iterative process. You can always find a better way to make a point wior to refine a graphical image, for example. You can always return to a publication later and find something you could
designed publication can be improved by planning experimenting, and offering thoughtful criticism at all stages. The sections that follow describe some methods that
n block out the way you want your publication to look. One blockare like block diagrams. Cartoonists use storyboards to show a story s
Movie designers use storyboards to illustrate key frames in a movie, which enables them to present the movie in a preproduction form that others can view and understand. You can use this same technique. Many people like to mock up
h pencil and paper. They create a dummy of their publication and, when the publication spans
But this is all a matter of preference: The important thing is to plan your publication before you create it. The tools for eating frames, lines, and boxes make these page elements easy to create and modify inside Publisher. Publisher has a
collection of templates that help you create professional looking publications. When you first launch Publisher, you see he Catalog window as a collection of thumbnails showing sample documents you can create.
The Publication Types pane on the left provides a list of the various types of publications that you can create with Publisher, while the center pane shows a list of the most popular types of publications. When you click on a type of
lication Types pane, the center pane changes to show a list of thumbnail images that show you what the various publications of that particular type will look like. (In other words, the list of available templates change
oose in the Publication Types pane.) In effect, storyboarding is what the templates do when they create a publication for you. When you create a document by using the Publisher templates, the result is a
shows a four panel brochure created with one of the Brochures templates. The template helps generate a sample document with a headline, graphics blocks, and text frames with sample text. Each element on the page can be
look comes from using a particular Publisher template. Your dummies, or mockups, should show similar use of text, graphics, and overall design. Try moving away from your design and looking at it
the overall layout but cannot read the text. Zoom from the main menu and choose 33% or 25% from the submenu that appears. Determine whether
its purpose is obvious or whether clutter is obscuring its purpose. If you have too many page elements
After you block out a page design, you can replace the dummy text, pictures, and other frames with the data you want to include on the page. This is the assembly stage of page composition. Depending on the type of selected, you can apply one of the Edit or Insert menu commands to bring the data into Publisher.
Desktop Publishing
page catalog, that feature comes in mighty handy.
Page design is an iterative process. You can always find a better way to make a point with design, to use type and color, or to refine a graphical image, for example. You can always return to a publication later and find something you could
designed publication can be improved by planning experimenting, and offering thoughtful criticism at all stages. The sections that follow describe some methods that
n block out the way you want your publication to look. One blockare like block diagrams. Cartoonists use storyboards to show a story s
Movie designers use storyboards to illustrate key frames in a movie, which enables them to present the movie in a preproduction form that others can view and understand. You can use this same technique. Many people like to mock up
h pencil and paper. They create a dummy of their publication and, when the publication spans
But this is all a matter of preference: The important thing is to plan your publication before you create it. The tools for eating frames, lines, and boxes make these page elements easy to create and modify inside Publisher. Publisher has a
collection of templates that help you create professional looking publications. When you first launch Publisher, you see he Catalog window as a collection of thumbnails showing sample documents you can create.
The Publication Types pane on the left provides a list of the various types of publications that you can create with Publisher, while the center pane shows a list of the most popular types of publications. When you click on a type of
lication Types pane, the center pane changes to show a list of thumbnail images that show you what the various publications of that particular type will look like. (In other words, the list of available templates change
oose in the Publication Types pane.) In effect, storyboarding is what the templates do when they create a publication for you. When you create a document by using the Publisher templates, the result is a
shows a four panel brochure created with one of the Brochures templates. The template helps generate a sample document with a headline, graphics blocks, and text frames with sample text. Each element on the page can be
look comes from using a particular Publisher template. Your dummies, or mockups, should show similar use of text, graphics, and overall design. Try moving away from your design and looking at it
the overall layout but cannot read the text. Zoom from the main menu and choose 33% or 25% from the submenu that appears. Determine whether
its purpose is obvious or whether clutter is obscuring its purpose. If you have too many page elements
After you block out a page design, you can replace the dummy text, pictures, and other frames with the data you want to include on the page. This is the assembly stage of page composition. Depending on the type of selected, you can apply one of the Edit or Insert menu commands to bring the data into Publisher.
Desktop Publishing
2009
page catalog, that feature comes in mighty handy.
th design, to use type and color,
or to refine a graphical image, for example. You can always return to a publication later and find something you could designed publication can be improved by planning before the fact,
experimenting, and offering thoughtful criticism at all stages. The sections that follow describe some methods that
n block out the way you want your publication to look. One blockare like block diagrams. Cartoonists use storyboards to show a story s
Movie designers use storyboards to illustrate key frames in a movie, which enables them to present the movie in a preproduction form that others can view and understand. You can use this same technique. Many people like to mock up
h pencil and paper. They create a dummy of their publication and, when the publication spans
But this is all a matter of preference: The important thing is to plan your publication before you create it. The tools for eating frames, lines, and boxes make these page elements easy to create and modify inside Publisher. Publisher has a
collection of templates that help you create professional looking publications. When you first launch Publisher, you see he Catalog window as a collection of thumbnails showing sample documents you can create.
The Publication Types pane on the left provides a list of the various types of publications that you can create with Publisher, while the center pane shows a list of the most popular types of publications. When you click on a type of
lication Types pane, the center pane changes to show a list of thumbnail images that show you what the various publications of that particular type will look like. (In other words, the list of available templates change
oose in the Publication Types pane.) In effect, storyboarding is what the templates do when they create a publication for you. When you create a document by using the Publisher templates, the result is a
shows a four panel brochure created with one of the Brochures templates. The template helps generate a sample document with a headline, graphics blocks, and text frames with sample text. Each element on the page can be
look comes from using a particular Publisher template. Your dummies, or mockups, should show similar use of text, graphics, and overall design. Try moving away from your design and looking at it
the overall layout but cannot read the text.
Zoom from the main menu and choose 33% or 25% from the submenu that appears. Determine whether its purpose is obvious or whether clutter is obscuring its purpose. If you have too many page elements, try eliminating
After you block out a page design, you can replace the dummy text, pictures, and other frames with the data you want to include on the page. This is the assembly stage of page composition. Depending on the type of object frame orselected, you can apply one of the Edit or Insert menu commands to bring the data into Publisher.
2009
th design, to use type and color,
or to refine a graphical image, for example. You can always return to a publication later and find something you could before the fact,
experimenting, and offering thoughtful criticism at all stages. The sections that follow describe some methods that
n block out the way you want your publication to look. One block-out are like block diagrams. Cartoonists use storyboards to show a story s
Movie designers use storyboards to illustrate key frames in a movie, which enables them to present the movie in a preproduction form that others can view and understand. You can use this same technique. Many people like to mock up
h pencil and paper. They create a dummy of their publication and, when the publication spans
But this is all a matter of preference: The important thing is to plan your publication before you create it. The tools for eating frames, lines, and boxes make these page elements easy to create and modify inside Publisher. Publisher has a
collection of templates that help you create professional looking publications. When you first launch Publisher, you see
The Publication Types pane on the left provides a list of the various types of publications that you can create with Publisher, while the center pane shows a list of the most popular types of publications. When you click on a type of
lication Types pane, the center pane changes to show a list of thumbnail images that show you what the various publications of that particular type will look like. (In other words, the list of available templates changes
oose in the Publication Types pane.) In effect, storyboarding is what the templates do when they create a publication for you. When you create a document by using the Publisher templates, the result is a
shows a four panel brochure created with one of the Brochures templates. The template helps generate a sample document with a headline, graphics blocks, and text frames with sample text. Each element on the page can be
look comes from using a particular Publisher template. Your dummies, or mock-ups, should show similar use of text, graphics, and overall design. Try moving away from your design and looking at it
Zoom from the main menu and choose 33% or 25% from the submenu that appears. Determine whether , try eliminating
After you block out a page design, you can replace the dummy text, pictures, and other frames with the data you want frame or
tool
If you intend to have your publication printed by a commercPublisher file to the printer. The printer then has the most flexibility to print your publication correctly. If your commercial printer doesn t have Publisher, you can send your publication as a PDFextract and modify images but cannot make many other types of changes or corrections.
Getting Out of the Gate with PublisherYou start Microsoft Publisher 2007 in one of two ways:
1. DoubleChoose Start
Whichever way you start Publisher, you re greeted by the handy Catalog window you see in Figurethe Catalog window shows templates for the most popular publication types and postcards, for example view by choosing other categories from the Publication Types pane, on the leftprojects?)
If you re familiar with earlier versions of Microsoft Publisher, you may be wondering what happened to its wizards. They have been replaced by Publisher templates and the new Publisher Tasks pane. Using a Publisher publication in Microsoft Publisher 2007. After you select a publication type and choose a template from the Catalog window, the Publisher Tasks pane appears, presenting you with a set of dialog boxes that leads you through the creation of a project based on selections you make.
If for some reason Publisher is already open and you re working somewhere else in the program, you can always return to the Catalog window by choosingFile New from the main menu.The Catalog can go on. You can click and drag the Catalog window s title bar as you would drag any window s title bar.
Creating a fax cover sheet the quick and Microsoft Publisher 2007 has hundreds of templates for more than 25 types of publications; you can see the list of available publication types. Some of the more useful publications are in the Business Forms category, where you can find
Expense rep
Fax covers
Inventory lists
Invoices
Purchase orders
Quotes
Refunds
Statements
Time billings
Weekly recordsThe Fax Cover publication type provides a quick example of how to use a Publisher template to quickly create a useful business publication:1) I n the Publicat ion Types pane ( the list ing on the left side of the Catalog w indow ) , click the Business
Forms link.a) The center pane of the Catalog window updates to show the available Business Forms categories.
2) Scroll down to the Fax Cover section and then a) The selected Fax Cover sheet is highlighted, and a larger sample version appears in the top
screen.3) Click the Create button located in the bottom
If you intend to have your publication printed by a commercPublisher file to the printer. The printer then has the most flexibility to print your publication correctly. If your commercial printer doesn t have Publisher, you can send your publication as a PDFextract and modify images but cannot make many other types of changes or corrections.
Getting Out of the Gate with PublisherYou start Microsoft Publisher 2007 in one of two ways:
Double-click the icon for the progrChoose Start Programs
Whichever way you start Publisher, you re greeted by the handy Catalog window you see in Figurethe Catalog window shows templates for the most popular publication types and postcards, for example view by choosing other categories from the Publication Types pane, on the leftprojects?)
If you re familiar with earlier versions of Microsoft Publisher, you may be wondering what happened to its wizards. They have been replaced by Publisher templates and the new Publisher Tasks pane. Using a Publisher template is the easiest way to create a publication in Microsoft Publisher 2007. After you select a publication type and choose a template from the Catalog window, the Publisher Tasks pane appears, presenting you with a set of dialog boxes that leads you hrough the creation of a project based on selections
you make.
If for some reason Publisher is already open and you re working somewhere else in the program, you can always return to the Catalog window by choosing
New from the main menu.The Catalog window is a can go on. You can click and drag the Catalog window s title bar as you would drag any window s title bar.
Creating a fax cover sheet the quick and Microsoft Publisher 2007 has hundreds of templates for more than 25 types of publications; you can see the list of available publication types. Some of the more useful publications are in the Business Forms category, where you can find
Expense reportsFax covers
Inventory listsInvoices
Purchase ordersQuotes
Refunds
Statements
Time billings
Weekly recordsThe Fax Cover publication type provides a quick example of how to use a Publisher template to quickly create a useful business publication:
he Publicat ion Types pane ( the list ing on the left side of the Catalog w indow ) , click the Business Forms link.
The center pane of the Catalog window updates to show the available Business Forms categories.Scroll down to the Fax Cover section and then
The selected Fax Cover sheet is highlighted, and a larger sample version appears in the topscreen.
Click the Create button located in the bottom
If you intend to have your publication printed by a commercPublisher file to the printer. The printer then has the most flexibility to print your publication correctly. If your commercial printer doesn t have Publisher, you can send your publication as a PDFextract and modify images but cannot make many other types of changes or corrections.
Getting Out of the Gate with PublisherYou start Microsoft Publisher 2007 in one of two ways:
click the icon for the progrPrograms Microsoft Office
Whichever way you start Publisher, you re greeted by the handy Catalog window you see in Figurethe Catalog window shows templates for the most popular publication types
business cards, brochures, and postcards, for example
but you can change the view by choosing other categories from the Publication Types pane, on the left. (Anyone for paper folding
If you re familiar with earlier versions of Microsoft Publisher, you may be wondering what happened to its wizards. They have been replaced by Publisher templates and the new Publisher Tasks pane. Using a
template is the easiest way to create a publication in Microsoft Publisher 2007. After you select a publication type and choose a template from the Catalog window, the Publisher Tasks pane appears, presenting you with a set of dialog boxes that leads you hrough the creation of a project based on selections
If for some reason Publisher is already open and you re working somewhere else in the program, you can always return to the Catalog window by choosing
New from the main menu.
window is a modal dialog box, which means that you need to make a selection in it or dismiss it before you can go on. You can click and drag the Catalog window s title bar as you would drag any window s title bar.
Creating a fax cover sheet the quick and Microsoft Publisher 2007 has hundreds of templates for more than 25 types of publications; you can see the list of available publication types. Some of the more useful publications are in the Business Forms category, where you can find
orts
Inventory lists
Purchase orders
Weekly records
The Fax Cover publication type provides a quick example of how to use a Publisher template to quickly create a useful
he Publicat ion Types pane ( the list ing on the left side of the Catalog w indow ) , click the Business
The center pane of the Catalog window updates to show the available Business Forms categories.Scroll down to the Fax Cover section and then
The selected Fax Cover sheet is highlighted, and a larger sample version appears in the top
Click the Create button located in the bottom
If you intend to have your publication printed by a commercPublisher file to the printer. The printer then has the most flexibility to print your publication correctly. If your commercial printer doesn t have Publisher, you can send your publication as a PDFextract and modify images but cannot make many other types of changes or corrections.
Getting Out of the Gate with Publisher
You start Microsoft Publisher 2007 in one of two ways:click the icon for the program on the Windows desktop.
Microsoft Office Microsoft Office Publisher 2007, as shown in Figure
Whichever way you start Publisher, you re greeted by the handy Catalog window you see in Figurethe Catalog window shows templates for the most
business cards, brochures, but you can change the
view by choosing other categories from the Publication . (Anyone for paper folding
If you re familiar with earlier versions of Microsoft Publisher, you may be wondering what happened to its wizards. They have been replaced by Publisher templates and the new Publisher Tasks pane. Using a
template is the easiest way to create a publication in Microsoft Publisher 2007. After you select a publication type and choose a template from the Catalog window, the Publisher Tasks pane appears, presenting you with a set of dialog boxes that leads you hrough the creation of a project based on selections
If for some reason Publisher is already open and you re working somewhere else in the program, you can always return to the Catalog window by choosing
dialog box, which means that you need to make a selection in it or dismiss it before you can go on. You can click and drag the Catalog window s title bar as you would drag any window s title bar.
Creating a fax cover sheet the quick and Microsoft Publisher 2007 has hundreds of templates for more than 25 types of publications; you can see the list of available publication types. Some of the more useful publications are in the Business Forms category, where you can find
The Fax Cover publication type provides a quick example of how to use a Publisher template to quickly create a useful
he Publicat ion Types pane ( the list ing on the left side of the Catalog w indow ) , click the Business
The center pane of the Catalog window updates to show the available Business Forms categories.Scroll down to the Fax Cover section and then
The selected Fax Cover sheet is highlighted, and a larger sample version appears in the top
Click the Create button located in the bottom
18
If you intend to have your publication printed by a commercPublisher file to the printer. The printer then has the most flexibility to print your publication correctly. If your commercial printer doesn t have Publisher, you can send your publication as a PDFextract and modify images but cannot make many other types of changes or corrections.
You start Microsoft Publisher 2007 in one of two ways:
am on the Windows desktop.Microsoft Office Publisher 2007, as shown in Figure
Whichever way you start Publisher, you re greeted by the handy Catalog window you see in Figurethe Catalog window shows templates for the most
business cards, brochures, but you can change the
view by choosing other categories from the Publication . (Anyone for paper folding
If you re familiar with earlier versions of Microsoft Publisher, you may be wondering what happened to its wizards. They have been replaced by Publisher templates and the new Publisher Tasks pane. Using a
template is the easiest way to create a publication in Microsoft Publisher 2007. After you select a publication type and choose a template from the Catalog window, the Publisher Tasks pane appears, presenting you with a set of dialog boxes that leads you hrough the creation of a project based on selections
If for some reason Publisher is already open and you re working somewhere else in the program, you can always return to the Catalog window by choosing
dialog box, which means that you need to make a selection in it or dismiss it before you can go on. You can click and drag the Catalog window s title bar as you would drag any window s title bar.
Creating a fax cover sheet the quick and easy way Microsoft Publisher 2007 has hundreds of templates for more than 25 types of publications; you can see the list of available publication types. Some of the more useful publications are in the Business Forms category, where you can find
The Fax Cover publication type provides a quick example of how to use a Publisher template to quickly create a useful
he Publicat ion Types pane ( the list ing on the left side of the Catalog w indow ) , click the Business
The center pane of the Catalog window updates to show the available Business Forms categories.Scroll down to the Fax Cover section and then select one of the 35 Fax Cover examples.
The selected Fax Cover sheet is highlighted, and a larger sample version appears in the top
Click the Create button located in the bottom-right portion of the screen.
If you intend to have your publication printed by a commercial printer, you will probably want to send the entire Publisher file to the printer. The printer then has the most flexibility to print your publication correctly. If your commercial printer doesn t have Publisher, you can send your publication as a PDFextract and modify images but cannot make many other types of changes or corrections.
am on the Windows desktop.
Microsoft Office Publisher 2007, as shown in Figure
Whichever way you start Publisher, you re greeted by the handy Catalog window you see in Figure
working somewhere else in the program, you can always return to the Catalog window by choosing
dialog box, which means that you need to make a selection in it or dismiss it before you can go on. You can click and drag the Catalog window s title bar as you would drag any window s title bar.
Microsoft Publisher 2007 has hundreds of templates for more than 25 types of publications; you can see the list of available publication types. Some of the more useful publications are in the Business Forms category, where you can find
The Fax Cover publication type provides a quick example of how to use a Publisher template to quickly create a useful
he Publicat ion Types pane ( the list ing on the left side of the Catalog w indow ) , click the Business
The center pane of the Catalog window updates to show the available Business Forms categories.select one of the 35 Fax Cover examples.
The selected Fax Cover sheet is highlighted, and a larger sample version appears in the top
right portion of the screen.
Desktop Publishing
ial printer, you will probably want to send the entire Publisher file to the printer. The printer then has the most flexibility to print your publication correctly. If your commercial printer doesn t have Publisher, you can send your publication as a PDF
file. The commercial printer can then
extract and modify images but cannot make many other types of changes or corrections.
Microsoft Office Publisher 2007, as shown in Figure
Whichever way you start Publisher, you re greeted by the handy Catalog window you see in Figure
working somewhere else in the program, you can always return to the Catalog window by choosing
dialog box, which means that you need to make a selection in it or dismiss it before you can go on. You can click and drag the Catalog window s title bar as you would drag any window s title bar.
Microsoft Publisher 2007 has hundreds of templates for more than 25 types of publications; you can see the list of available publication types. Some of the more useful publications are in the Business Forms category, where you can find
The Fax Cover publication type provides a quick example of how to use a Publisher template to quickly create a useful
he Publicat ion Types pane ( the list ing on the left side of the Catalog w indow ) , click the Business
The center pane of the Catalog window updates to show the available Business Forms categories.select one of the 35 Fax Cover examples.
The selected Fax Cover sheet is highlighted, and a larger sample version appears in the top
right portion of the screen.
Desktop Publishing
ial printer, you will probably want to send the entire Publisher file to the printer. The printer then has the most flexibility to print your publication correctly. If your
file. The commercial printer can then extract and modify images but cannot make many other types of changes or corrections.
Microsoft Office Publisher 2007, as shown in Figure
Whichever way you start Publisher, you re greeted by the handy Catalog window you see in Figure. Your first glimpse of
working somewhere else in the program, you can always return to the Catalog window by choosing
dialog box, which means that you need to make a selection in it or dismiss it before you can go on. You can click and drag the Catalog window s title bar as you would drag any window s title bar.
Microsoft Publisher 2007 has hundreds of templates for more than 25 types of publications; you can see the list of available publication types. Some of the more useful publications are in the Business Forms category, where you can find
The Fax Cover publication type provides a quick example of how to use a Publisher template to quickly create a useful
he Publicat ion Types pane ( the list ing on the left side of the Catalog w indow ) , click the Business
The center pane of the Catalog window updates to show the available Business Forms categories.select one of the 35 Fax Cover examples.
The selected Fax Cover sheet is highlighted, and a larger sample version appears in the top-right portion of the
Desktop Publishing
2009
ial printer, you will probably want to send the entire Publisher file to the printer. The printer then has the most flexibility to print your publication correctly. If your
file. The commercial printer can then
Your first glimpse of
dialog box, which means that you need to make a selection in it or dismiss it before you can go on. You can click and drag the Catalog window s title bar as you would drag any window s title bar.
Microsoft Publisher 2007 has hundreds of templates for more than 25 types of publications; you can see the list of available publication types. Some of the more useful publications are in the Business Forms category, where you can find
The Fax Cover publication type provides a quick example of how to use a Publisher template to quickly create a useful
he Publicat ion Types pane ( the list ing on the left side of the Catalog w indow ) , click the Business
The center pane of the Catalog window updates to show the available Business Forms categories.
right portion of the
2009
ial printer, you will probably want to send the entire
Publisher file to the printer. The printer then has the most flexibility to print your publication correctly. If your file. The commercial printer can then
Your first glimpse of
dialog box, which means that you need to make a selection in it or dismiss it before you
Microsoft Publisher 2007 has hundreds of templates for more than 25 types of publications; you can see the list of available publication types. Some of the more useful publications are in the Business Forms category, where you can find
The Fax Cover publication type provides a quick example of how to use a Publisher template to quickly create a useful
he Publicat ion Types pane ( the list ing on the left side of the Catalog w indow ) , click the Business
right portion of the
a)
The Publisher Tasks pane stands ready to help you customize the publication. Its main features include the ones in this list:
1. The Page Opt ions tab: chameleon. It changes depending on the type of publication you are working on. If you are working on a Fax Cover sheet, it might display a business logo that you can click and drag onto your publication. If youworking on a newsletter, it shows a Columns section that lets you change the layout of your publication by changing the number of columns.
2. The Opt ions tab: easily select a different template to use and also change t
3. The Font Schem es tab: that were created by armies of highly paid design consultants to be pleasing to the eye (the fonts, not the consultants). Selecting a font scheme instantly applies the new fonts to your publication.
4. The Color Schemes tab: of highly paid consultants who created the font schemes also created the color schemes. As with the font schemes, you also have the option of creating your own color scheme.
Facts about Publisher templates and the Publisher Tasks paneYou need to know few important points about the Publisher templates and the Publisher Tasks pane; these tools are used to create new onpublications inside Publisher:
The Print Preview fedocument will look when it is printed.
Publications created with Publisher templates are composed of many individual objects.
As handy as templates are, if you re using templates only to create documents in Publisher, you re do with the program
Meet the publication typesEach publication type can generate several versions of
Get Well. You can set a height and width, and you can also decide whether you want to have graphics and borders on your banner.
a)
Publisher creates the Fax Cover for you and presents you with the Publisher Tasks pane visible to the right of the publication,
The Publisher Tasks pane stands ready to help you customize the publication. Its main features include the ones in this list:
The Page Opt ions tab: chameleon. It changes depending on the type of publication you are working on. If you are working on a Fax Cover sheet, it might display a business logo that you can click and drag onto your publication. If youworking on a newsletter, it shows a Columns section that lets you change the layout of your publication by changing the number of columns.
The Opt ions tab: easily select a different template to use and also change the paper size. The Font Schem es tab: that were created by armies of highly paid design consultants to be pleasing to the eye (the fonts, not the consultants). Selecting a font scheme instantly applies the new fonts to your publication. The Color Schemes tab: of highly paid consultants who created the font schemes also created the color schemes. As with the font schemes, you also have the option of creating your own color scheme.
Facts about Publisher templates and the Publisher Tasks paneYou need to know few important points about the Publisher templates and the Publisher Tasks pane; these tools are used to create new onpublications inside Publisher:
The Print Preview fedocument will look when it is printed. Publications created with Publisher templates are composed of many individual objects.As handy as templates are, if you re using templates only to create documents in Publisher, you re just scratching the surface of what you can do with the program
Meet the publication typesEach publication type can generate several versions of
Get Well. You can set a height and width, and you can also decide whether you want to have graphics and borders on your banner.
Publisher creates the Fax Cover for you and presents you with the Publisher Tasks pane visible to the right of the publication,
The Publisher Tasks pane stands ready to help you customize the publication. Its main features include the
The Page Opt ions tab: chameleon. It changes depending on the type of publication you are working on. If you are working on a Fax Cover sheet, it might display a business logo that you can click and drag onto your publication. If youworking on a newsletter, it shows a Columns section that lets you change the layout of your publication by changing the number of columns.
The Opt ions tab: From this tab, you can quickly and easily select a different template to use and also
he paper size.
The Font Schem es tab: Change the font scheme for the entire publication. that were created by armies of highly paid design consultants to be pleasing to the eye (the fonts, not the consultants). Selecting a font scheme instantly applies the new fonts to your publication. The Color Schemes tab: of highly paid consultants who created the font schemes also created the color schemes. As with the font schemes, you also have the option of creating your own color scheme.
Facts about Publisher templates and the Publisher Tasks paneYou need to know few important points about the Publisher templates and the Publisher Tasks pane; these tools are used to create new onpublications inside Publisher:
The Print Preview feature lets you see how your document will look when it is printed. Publications created with Publisher templates are composed of many individual objects.As handy as templates are, if you re using templates only to create documents in Publisher,
just scratching the surface of what you can do with the program
Meet the publication typesEach publication type can generate several versions of
Get Well. You can set a height and width, and you can also decide whether you want to have graphics and borders on your banner.
Publisher creates the Fax Cover for you and presents you with the Publisher Tasks pane visible to the right of the publication,
The Publisher Tasks pane stands ready to help you customize the publication. Its main features include the
The Page Opt ions tab: This tab is a bit of a chameleon. It changes depending on the type of publication you are working on. If you are working on a Fax Cover sheet, it might display a business logo that you can click and drag onto your publication. If youworking on a newsletter, it shows a Columns section that lets you change the layout of your publication by changing the number of columns.
From this tab, you can quickly and easily select a different template to use and also
Change the font scheme for the entire publication. that were created by armies of highly paid design consultants to be pleasing to the eye (the fonts, not the consultants). Selecting a font scheme instantly applies the new fonts to your publication. The Color Schemes tab: On this tab, you can change of highly paid consultants who created the font schemes also created the color schemes. As with the font schemes, you also have the option of creating your own color scheme.
Facts about Publisher templates and the Publisher Tasks paneYou need to know few important points about the Publisher templates and the Publisher Tasks pane; these tools are used to create new on-screen
ature lets you see how your document will look when it is printed.
Publications created with Publisher templates are composed of many individual objects.
As handy as templates are, if you re using templates only to create documents in Publisher,
just scratching the surface of what you can
Meet the publication types
Each publication type can generate several versions of
Get Well. You can set a height and width, and you can also decide whether you want to have graphics and borders
Publisher creates the Fax Cover for you and presents you with the Publisher Tasks pane visible
The Publisher Tasks pane stands ready to help you customize the publication. Its main features include the
This tab is a bit of a chameleon. It changes depending on the type of publication you are working on. If you are working on a Fax Cover sheet, it might display a business logo that you can click and drag onto your publication. If you
are working on a newsletter, it shows a Columns section that lets you change the layout of your publication by
From this tab, you can quickly and easily select a different template to use and also
Change the font scheme for the entire publication. that were created by armies of highly paid design consultants to be pleasing to the eye (the fonts, not the consultants). Selecting a font scheme instantly applies the new fonts to your publication.
tab, you can change of highly paid consultants who created the font schemes also created the color schemes. As with the font schemes, you also have the option of creating your own color scheme.
Facts about Publisher templates and the Publisher Tasks paneYou need to know few important points about the Publisher templates and the Publisher Tasks pane;
screen
ature lets you see how your
Publications created with Publisher templates are
As handy as templates are, if you re using templates only to create documents in Publisher,
just scratching the surface of what you can
Each publication type can generate several versions of
Get Well. You can set a height and width, and you can also decide whether you want to have graphics and borders
19
Publisher creates the Fax Cover for you and presents you with the Publisher Tasks pane visible
The Publisher Tasks pane stands ready to help you customize the publication. Its main features include the
This tab is a bit of a chameleon. It changes depending on the type of publication you are working on. If you are working on a Fax Cover sheet, it might display a business logo that
are working on a newsletter, it shows a Columns section that lets you change the layout of your publication by
From this tab, you can quickly and easily select a different template to use and also
Change the font scheme for the entire publication. that were created by armies of highly paid design consultants to be pleasing to the eye (the fonts, not the consultants). Selecting a font scheme instantly applies the new fonts to your publication.
tab, you can change the color scheme. Just don t go thinking that the same group of highly paid consultants who created the font schemes also created the color schemes. As with the font schemes, you also have the option of creating your own color scheme.
Facts about Publisher templates and the Publisher Tasks pane
publications of the same class, depending on the selections you make. Publisher has 27 publication types (28 selection):
when you want to create a publication from scratch. You can choose the page size you want without Publisher adding any sample pictures or text. You start with a clean slate
create advertisements for your business.
different award certificates.
eight types of banners: Informational, Sale, Event, Welcome, Congratu
Get Well. You can set a height and width, and you can also decide whether you want to have graphics and borders
Desktop Publishing
Change the font scheme for the entire publication. Fontthat were created by armies of highly paid design consultants to be pleasing to the eye (the fonts, not the consultants). Selecting a font scheme instantly applies the new fonts to your publication.
scheme. Just don t go thinking that the same group of highly paid consultants who created the font schemes also created the color schemes. As with the font schemes,
Facts about Publisher templates and the Publisher Tasks pane
publications of the same class, depending on the selections you make. Publisher has 27 publication types (28 if you count the Blank Page Sizes selection):
Blank Page Sizes: when you want to create a publication from scratch. You can choose the page size you want without Publisher adding any sample pictures or text. You start with a clean slate
Advertisements: create advertisements for your business.
Aw ard Cert if icates: different award certificates.
Banners: eight types of banners: Informational, Sale, Event, Welcome, Congratu
Get Well. You can set a height and width, and you can also decide whether you want to have graphics and borders
Desktop Publishing
Font
schemes
that were created by armies of highly paid design consultants to be pleasing to the eye (the fonts, not the consultants). Selecting a font scheme instantly applies the new fonts to your publication.
scheme. Just don t go thinking that the same group of highly paid consultants who created the font schemes also created the color schemes. As with the font schemes,
Facts about Publisher templates and the Publisher Tasks pane
publications of the same class, depending on the selections you make. Publisher has 27 publication
if you count the Blank Page Sizes
Blank Page Sizes: when you want to create a publication from scratch. You can choose the page size you want without Publisher adding any sample pictures or text. You start with a clean slate
Advertisements: Use these templates to create advertisements for your business.
Aw ard Cert if icates: different award certificates.
Banners: This publication type offers eight types of banners: Informational, Sale, Event, Welcome, Congratulations, Holiday, Romance, and
Get Well. You can set a height and width, and you can also decide whether you want to have graphics and borders
Desktop Publishing
2009
are collections of fonts that were created by armies of highly paid design consultants to be pleasing to the eye (the fonts, not the
scheme. Just don t go thinking that the same group of highly paid consultants who created the font schemes also created the color schemes. As with the font schemes,
publications of the same class, depending on the selections you make. Publisher has 27 publication
if you count the Blank Page Sizes
Blank Page Sizes: Use these templates when you want to create a publication from scratch. You can choose the page size you want without Publisher adding any sample pictures or text. You start with a clean slate.
Use these templates to create advertisements for your business.
Aw ard Cert if icates: Choose from 22 different award certificates.
This publication type offers eight types of banners: Informational, Sale, Event,
lations, Holiday, Romance, and Get Well. You can set a height and width, and you can also decide whether you want to have graphics and borders
2009
are collections of fonts that were created by armies of highly paid design consultants to be pleasing to the eye (the fonts, not the
scheme. Just don t go thinking that the same group of highly paid consultants who created the font schemes also created the color schemes. As with the font schemes,
publications of the same class, depending on the selections you make. Publisher has 27 publication
if you count the Blank Page Sizes
Use these templates when you want to create a publication from scratch. You can choose the page size you want without Publisher adding any sample pictures or
Use these templates to create advertisements for your business.
Choose from 22
This publication type offers eight types of banners: Informational, Sale, Event,
lations, Holiday, Romance, and Get Well. You can set a height and width, and you can also decide whether you want to have graphics and borders
Brochures:
Business Cards:
Business Form s: Quote, Refund, Statement, Time Billing, and Weekly Record. As you click ePublication Types pane, a picture of the default form appears on the right side of the screen.
Calendars:
Catalogs:
E-mail:
Envelopes: Cards styles. Publisher remembers the stthat style.
Flyers: announcement.
Gift Certificates:
Greeting
Impo rSelectto update so thatreport thatto create?
Invitation p a r t y
Labels:Computer labels match
LetteAfter
asks whether
Menus:Special,
Newsletters:
Papeof creatinthese
PostcaInvitationAnnouncement
Programs:
Quickprofessiona
Resumes:
Signs:to Wheelchair
Web
With
whenknows whe
You aren tpicture withexample. Tasks panepublicationvisible, clickPublisher Publisher templates that you
Create your
If the hundi n t r o d u c e sYou can always
To create
Brochures: Four different brochure styles are offered: Informational, Price List, Event, and FundBusiness Cards: Choose from more than 50 styles of business cards.Business Form s: Quote, Refund, Statement, Time Billing, and Weekly Record. As you click ePublication Types pane, a picture of the default form appears on the right side of the screen. Calendars: Choose from 46 fullCatalogs: Create ten different kinds of catalogs to advertise
mail: Use any of these ten eEnvelopes: The Envelopes templates create more than 50 envelope styles that match the Letterheads and Business Cards styles. Publisher remembers the stthat style.
Flyers: This publication type includes styles for Informational, Special Offer, Sale, Event, Fundannouncement.
Gift Certificates: eeting Ca r d s :
o r t Word Documents:Select
from 36 difupdate so that
report that
you create? Use th
Invitation C a r d sp a r t y , birthday partyLabels:
You can createComputer
Disk,
labels match s t a n d a r dLetterhead: The
you create a letterhead whether you
Menus:
If you have Special, and Wine/DesseNewsletters:
CreatePaper Folding Projects
eating paper e
items are fuPostcards: These Invitation, HolidaAnnouncement, Reminde
ograms:
Createk
Publicationsofessional desig
Resumes:
Choose Signs:
Create 40Wheelchair
Access.
Sites: Use these
Compliments w h e n
you have productknows where they
en t
limited to accepting with
another
example.
And, you
pane
to make
publication. If theclick
the Publisher Publisher
Tasks toolbarPublisher
well helps templates output and
you re proud to show
Create your
own templates
hundreds of templates i n t r o d u c e s
aren talways create
eate
a template
Four different brochure styles are offered: Informational, Price List, Event, and FundChoose from more than 50 styles of business cards.
Business Form s: You have ten choices: Expense Report, Fax Cover, Inventory List, Invoice, Purchase Order, Quote, Refund, Statement, Time Billing, and Weekly Record. As you click ePublication Types pane, a picture of the default form appears on the right side of the screen.
Choose from 46 fullCreate ten different kinds of catalogs to advertise
Use any of these ten e-mail templates to create targeted eThe Envelopes templates create more than 50 envelope styles that match the Letterheads and Business
Cards styles. Publisher remembers the st
This publication type includes styles for Informational, Special Offer, Sale, Event, Fund
Gift Certificates: create
your own gift certifica
It offers 20 cDocuments:
Theseifferent styles.
it has the loocreated in Mithe Import W
C a r d s : These temp la tes, birthday party, housewarming,
create
labels
Cassette, CD/DVD, s t a n d a r d
Avery
Letterheadcreate a letterhead for
you
want to basehave your own/Dessert menus eate
almost 7 0Projects: Buildr figures). Thfun to give, ane
templates Holiday Party Invitation
Reminder, aneate
Music, Religious Publications: Use thes
design and layout.Choose f r o m Entry
40
single-page Access.
these
templates Compliments C a r d s :
product
samples t hey
came from
accepting
whatever r
or one border
can always
changes tothe
Publisher
Publisher
Tasks toolbar
to display helps you quickly and makes the
show to others
templates
templates
the pen t
enough forcreate
templates
template
of your
Four different brochure styles are offered: Informational, Price List, Event, and FundChoose from more than 50 styles of business cards.
You have ten choices: Expense Report, Fax Cover, Inventory List, Invoice, Purchase Order, Quote, Refund, Statement, Time Billing, and Weekly Record. As you click ePublication Types pane, a picture of the default form appears on the right side of the screen.
Choose from 46 full-page and 3 walletCreate ten different kinds of catalogs to advertise
mail templates to create targeted eThe Envelopes templates create more than 50 envelope styles that match the Letterheads and Business
Cards styles. Publisher remembers the style you used and asks whether you want to base your next envelope on
This publication type includes styles for Informational, Special Offer, Sale, Event, Fund
your own gift certificacategories ofThese
templatesstyles.
This is a
look and feel Microsoft W o r dWord Documents
temp la tes help housewarming,
showelabels in any of the
CD/DVD, Video,
labels. The
head
templates
for
your business base
your next letterheadown
restaurant, the menus i n a variety
7 0
different
d
your own paperThe four typesand they re p re t ty
s
create 13 categoriety Invitation, Holida
and Tent Fold.Religious Service
these templatelayout.
y Level, Chronological, page s i g n s
eve
templates
to create
Choose f r o msamples
and freebie
whatever
theder
with anothealways use the Publisher
to
the design
Tasks paneasks button
display i t .
quickly modifythe
result a document others
the precedingfor
you, don t
of your very
your own, follow
20
Four different brochure styles are offered: Informational, Price List, Event, and Fund
Choose from more than 50 styles of business cards.You have ten choices: Expense Report, Fax Cover, Inventory List, Invoice, Purchase Order,
Quote, Refund, Statement, Time Billing, and Weekly Record. As you click ePublication Types pane, a picture of the default form appears on the right side of the screen.
page and 3 wallet-size calendars.Create ten different kinds of catalogs to advertise
mail templates to create targeted eThe Envelopes templates create more than 50 envelope styles that match the Letterheads and Business
yle you used and asks whether you want to base your next envelope on
This publication type includes styles for Informational, Special Offer, Sale, Event, Fund
your own gift certificates! Choose from 35 gift certificate styles.of
cards. Each
templates
let yo
great tool if l of other publications d
and you wantDocuments
templates.help you createshower, e v e n tthe
following 11ideo,
Jar/Product,
Avery number
offer you mobusiness or personal
letterhead
onrestaurant, the Menus
a variety o f styles.
styles o f newsletters paper
tiger airs
range from
pretty
when printedcategories of
Holiday Greeting.
Each categoService, and Theatertemplates when you
onological,
oreverything from
eate
over 70 dif r o m
35 styles o feebies t o give
the
templates giveanother, for
Publisher
design o f your pane
is not
on the
Knowing modify
these document
eceding
section don t despair.
own.
follow
these
Four different brochure styles are offered: Informational, Price List, Event, and Fund
Choose from more than 50 styles of business cards.
You have ten choices: Expense Report, Fax Cover, Inventory List, Invoice, Purchase Order,
Quote, Refund, Statement, Time Billing, and Weekly Record. As you click ePublication Types pane, a picture of the default form appears on the right side of the screen.
size calendars.
Create ten different kinds of catalogs to advertise your wares.
mail templates to create targeted e-mail marketing campaigns.The Envelopes templates create more than 50 envelope styles that match the Letterheads and Business
yle you used and asks whether you want to base your next envelope on
This publication type includes styles for Informational, Special Offer, Sale, Event, Fund
tes! Choose from 35 gift certificate styles.
of these categories you gussy up f you have a
publications
want
it to lootemplates.
create
invitation c a r d se v e n t , ce lebra t i on
11
styles: Mailing oduct,
Binder, number i s provided
more than 50
personal
use, Publisheron
that style. Menus templates
newsletters
in
r
force! Afraid
easy to createprinted
from af
postcards: eeting, Holiday
category offers severaTheater programs
you
want to
or
Curriculum rom
Authorized Personnel
different multipleo f
With Compliments
away and yo
give
you. You
Desktop Publishing
Four different brochure styles are offered: Informational, Price List, Event, and Fund
You have ten choices: Expense Report, Fax Cover, Inventory List, Invoice, Purchase Order, Quote, Refund, Statement, Time Billing, and Weekly Record. As you click each type of business form in the Publication Types pane, a picture of the default form appears on the right side of the screen.
your wares.
mail marketing campaigns.The Envelopes templates create more than 50 envelope styles that match the Letterheads and Business
yle you used and asks whether you want to base your next envelope on
This publication type includes styles for Informational, Special Offer, Sale, Event, Fund
tes! Choose from 35 gift certificate styles.categories of fers
p text you createda Microsoft W o r
you have crlook like that brochure
c a r d s
for your ce lebra t i on , or fund
Mailing Address,, Bookplate,
ovided
after the label
styles o f letterheadPublisher remembers the
let you create
a variety of sizes d
to fly? Creatcreate
(the Boat) a
color printerds: Informational
y
Thank Youfers several t y p e s
ograms
with a few
create single
Curriculum
Vitae résumés Authorized Personnel
multiple-page WebCompliments cards.
you want to mak
ou
can replace
Desktop Publishing
Four different brochure styles are offered: Informational, Price List, Event, and Fund-raiser.
You have ten choices: Expense Report, Fax Cover, Inventory List, Invoice, Purchase Order, ach type of business form in the
Publication Types pane, a picture of the default form appears on the right side of the screen.
mail marketing campaigns.
The Envelopes templates create more than 50 envelope styles that match the Letterheads and Business yle you used and asks whether you want to base your next envelope on
This publication type includes styles for Informational, Special Offer, Sale, Event, Fund
tes! Choose from 35 gift certificate styles.
offers
you many choicescreated
in MicrosoftW o r d document created in Publish
that brochure
you
your party, theme fund-raiser. ess,
Shipping, Return, a n d Identificationlabel name.
letterhead
thatremembers the style
create Regular,
sizes and layoutseate origami () to difficult (thr
or on colorInformational, Special O
ou, Thank You
of postcards.
clicks of the
single- page publications
itae résumés
with style!Authorized Personnel
Only to Lemonade
eb
sites quickly ds.
The cardsmake sure tha
eplace
one font with
Desktop Publishing
2009
raiser.
You have ten choices: Expense Report, Fax Cover, Inventory List, Invoice, Purchase Order,
ach type of business form in the
The Envelopes templates create more than 50 envelope styles that match the Letterheads and Business yle you used and asks whether you want to base your next envelope on
This publication type includes styles for Informational, Special Offer, Sale, Event, Fund-raiser, and
choices. osoft
W o r d 2document that you
Publisher. Havu worked so h
theme p a r t y , holiday
Return
AddrIdentification. All these
that
you can print. style you used and
, Take-Out, Daily
layouts. (the Japanese the Parrot).
red paper. Offer, Sale, Eventou, We ve Moved
ds.
mouse. publications
wit
style!
Lemonade
for
quickly and easily.ds
come in handy that the recipien
with
another,
2009
You have ten choices: Expense Report, Fax Cover, Inventory List, Invoice, Purchase Order,
ach type of business form in the
The Envelopes templates create more than 50 envelope styles that match the Letterheads and Business yle you used and asks whether you want to base your next envelope on
raiser, and
d 2007. u want Have a
hard
holiday
ress, these
print.
and
Daily
e art
Still,
Event, e ve Moved,
with a
Sale
.
handy ecipient
,
one
steps:1. Sta
2.
3.
4.
steps:
Star t by creating
You can create
2.
Choose Fi l e
The Save As
3.
Type a name
4.
In the Save
eating a publication.
eate
one from
Fi le
Save As fr
As
dialog box appears,
name for your
Save
As Type d
publication.
om
scratch or
rom the main
appears,
new template
drop-down l i s t
or
start with an
main
menu.
template
i n the File
l i s t
box, select
21
an
existing template
File
Name text
select P u b l i s h e r
Notice thatIn location
5. Click
Your template Click theupper-leftlist of templates
Desktop Publishing
template and customize
text
box.
P u b l i s h e r
T e m p l a t e
that
Publisher
location t o the Templates
Save.
template
is nowthe
My Templates left
corner of
of templates
you ve
Desktop Publishing
and customize
T e m p l a t e (*.pub).
automatically emplates
folde
now
available f o remplates
link
the Catalog windowyou ve
created.
Desktop Publishing
2009
and customize
it to your tastes
(*.pub).
automatically
changes folder.
f o r
use.
right therwindow
toeated.
2009
tastes.
changes
the Save
re in the to
see the
Desktop Publishing
2009
22
Chapter 6-Working with Pages
In This Chapter
Moving around in your publication
Positioning objects precisely with guides and rulers
Using Master Pages to create common page elements
Inserting and deleting pages
When you start a publication, Publisher determines the publication s basic settings for you
the number of pages, the page size, and some margin guides, for example. This default feature is all well and good if you like the decisions Publisher makes, but what if you want to change a setting? You may need to change the margins, for example, to accommodate your design and the capabilities of your printer.
Moving from page to page The current page is the active page
the page on which your cursor is located. At any time, only one page in your document is the current page, even when you re viewing more than one page at a time. The current page is indicated in the page-navigation controls, located in the lower-left corner of the Publisher window. The current page is the one represented by the buff-colored page. All other pages are white. After you have more than one page in your publication, you can move to another page in several ways: Choose Edit Gos To Page from the main menu, and then type the number of the page you want to work on in the Go to Page dialog box.
Scrolling within a page You use the scroll bars, arrows, and boxes along the right side and at the bottom of your screen to view different parts of the current page. Here s what you can do with the various scroll bar parts:
Scroll arrow s: Click a scroll arrow to slide your view a little bit in the direction of that arrow. If you press and hold down the mouse button, the publication continues to scroll.
Scroll boxes: Drag the scroll box to slide your view any amount in that same direction.
Scroll bar: Click above or below the scroll box in the horizontal or vertical scroll bar to slide your view up or down a screen- full at a time.
These techniques affect only your view of the current page and do not move between pages. They re standard Windows interface techniques that work in any Windows window.
Two-page spreads Many publications, including this very book, are designed with pairs of pages that form facing pages. Facing pages, also known as a two-page spread, are what your readers see
and what you, as a designer, design for.
If you re looking at a single page and want to see your layout as a two-page spread (to see two facing pages side by side), choose View Two-Page Spread from the main menu. Odd-numbered pages (1, 3, 5, and so on) are displayed on the right side of the Publisher screen, whereas even-numbered pages (2, 4, 6, and so on) are displayed on the left side.
Whole Page and Page Width views In addition to switching between one- and two-page views, you can view whole pages at one time or view pages in the largest magnification that still shows the entire width of the page or the two-page spread.
Desktop Publishing
2009
23
Choose View Zoom W hole Page or press Ctr l+ Shift+ L to resize the current page or two-page spread so that it appears at the largest possible magnification to fill your screen. This view gives you an overview of your layout.
If you select one or more objects before choosing the View Zoom command, you see a new option on the Zoom submenu: Selected Objects. When you choose this option, Publisher resizes your page to the largest magnification Lining Things Up
That still shows the selected objects.
No matter how comfortable you are with your mouse, aligning things freehand is tough work. I know because I have a cordless, optical, laser-precision mouse, and I still have trouble getting things to line up without some help. Fortunately, the Publisher electronic guidance devices can help to steady your trembling hands so that objects fall into perfect place with ease. This section looks at layout guides and ruler guides and then shows you how to activate the powerful Snap To commands to get everything to line up neatly.
Margin and grid guides Layout guides are an excellent way to determine where to place various objects on each page. Layout guides don t appear on your printout. On- screen, however, these blue or pink lines provide visual references on every page. Using the Publisher Snap To feature, you can almost magically align objects with these blue or pink lines.
Publisher provides three types of layout guides: 1. Margin guides define the boundary of your printable area. 2. Grid guides let you set up a grid to make it easier to design your publication. 3. Baseline guides help you align text across the columns of a multi- column publication.
If you don t want your text to be aligned across columns, turn off the feature. Choose Format Paragraph. Then, on the Indents sand Spacing tab, deselect the Align Text to Baseline Guides check box. Professional designers
whether they work on a computer or on paper
generally lay out pages according to grids. For example, when creating a three-fold brochure, they use a three-part grid to visually separate the three panels of each page where that brochure eventually will be folded. Or, they may divide no folding pages into a grid of rows and columns to see how different parts of the page visually relate to each other and to the page as a whole. In this way, designers can ensure that their pages are readable, are not crowded, and are visually appealing with appropriate spacing and correct alignment
You set the margins for your printed page on the Margin Guides tab of the Layout Guides dialog box. Different printers require different margin settings. If you set margins narrower than your printer will print, your page doesn t print properly. Text and figures are cut off at the margins.
Ruler Guides In addition to setting layout guides, you can set ruler guides anywhere on your page. Ruler guides let you arrange elements on your page at any horizontal or vertical position you want. You can create as many ruler guides as you need. This list describes how to work with ruler guides:
To create a vert ical guide: Position the mouse cursor over the vertical ruler until the cursor changes to a double-headed arrow. Then click and drag from the vertical ruler right to the desired position on your layout. A green dotted line appears and remains when you release the mouse button.
To create a horizonta l guide: Position the mouse cursor over the horizontal ruler. Then click and drag from the horizontal ruler down to the desired position on your layout.
To place a vertical guide in the exact center of your view: Choose Arrange Ruler Guides Add Vertical Ruler Guide. Publisher places a vertical guide in the exact center of the page. To place a horizontal guide in the exact center of your view : Choose Arrange Ruler Guides Add Horizontal Ruler Guide. Publisher places a horizontal guide across the center of the page.
Desktop Publishing
2009
24
To move a ruler guide: Just click and drag it. To remove a ruler guide: Click and drag the ruler off the page. To remove all ruler guides: Choose the Arrange Ruler Guides Clear All Ruler Guides command.
Creating Master Pages When you create a multiple-page publication, you may want certain objects to appear on all or most of the pages. These objects can include the publication s title, your name, page numbers, a company logo or some other image, a plea to send money
whatever. Publisher lets you create a Master page that contains objects that appear on each page of your publication.
To understand Publisher Master Pages, imagine each regular publication page as a piece of see-through tracing paper laid over a cardboard backing. You can see all the objects on the backing, along with the layer of objects on the tracing paper. As you move from page to page, the tracing paper changes, but the backing remains the same. If you change something on the tracing paper, only the tracing paper changes. If you change something on any objects on a Master page are repeated on foreground pages throughout the publication. Those Master page objects that aren t obscured by objects above them in the foreground print together with any foreground objects pre- sent on each foreground page. To work with the Master page or any object on it, you must first move the foreground pages out of the way, just as you would lift tracing paper from a cardboard backing.
Working with multiple Master pages When you start a publication, Publisher creates just one Master page for you. This strategy works fine for many publications, but sometimes you need a little more flexibility. For example, you may want to create a newsletter that has the same Master page elements (such as pictures or WordArt) on the front and back pages but different page elements on the inside pages. For this, you need to have more than one Master page (two, in this case).
To create a second Master page if you have only one, open the Master Page view by choosing View Master Page (or pressing Ctrl+M). The Edit Master Pages task pane lets you create new master pages. It also displays a list of all the master pages that you have already created. Click the New Master Page button, located at the bottom of the Edit Master Pages task pane, and then click OK.
When you create a new background, the new Master page is blank. If you want elements on the existing Master page to appear on the new Master page, you have to put them there yourself. Publisher permanently deletes all objects on that Master page.
If you delete a Master page (and all its objects) and later decide that you really would rather not have done so, you can probably recover it by clicking the down arrow on the Undo button on the Standard toolbar and selecting Delete Master Page from the drop-down list.
To move between Master pages Choose View Master Page from the main menu (or press Ctrl+M) and then select a Master page in the Edit Master Pages task pane.
After you create your new Master page, you still have to tell Publisher which pages should use it. Go to the page to which you want to apply a different Master page and choose Format Apply Master Page. The Apply Master Page task pane. In the Apply Master Page task pane, select a Master page from the drop-down list under the page icon.
Adding Master page objects Adding objects to Master pages is just like adding objects to foreground pages. Because Master page and foreground objects must share the final, printed page, however, you should consider a couple of things before you add a Master page object: If you have only one Master page: Any object you put on it is repeated on every foreground page.
If you have two Master pages: Any object you put on the left Master page
Desktop Publishing
2009
25
is repeated on every left-hand foreground page; any object you put on the right Master page is repeated on every right-hand foreground page; and any object you put on both Master pages is repeated on every left- and right-hand foreground page. You can eliminate all Master page objects from specific foreground pages.
Creating headers and footers To create headers and footers, follow these steps:
1. Choose View Header and Footer from the main menu. Publisher displays a blinking cursor in the page header along with the Header and Footer toolbar. 2. Type the text that you want to appear in the header. The text you type appears in your header, at the blinking cursor. 3. Click the Show Header/Footer button on the Header and Footer tool- bar to switch to the footer. Microsoft Publisher displays a blinking cursor in the page footer. 4. Type the information that you want to appear at the bottom of every page. The text you type appears in your footer, at the blinking cursor. 5. Click the Close button on the Header and Footer toolbar when you finish adding text to your headers and footers.
Adding pages When you create a blank publication or use the Quick Publication template, Publisher creates only one page to begin with. Regardless of how many pages Publisher creates by default, you can always add more blank pages if you need them.
New pages may not appear entirely blank. They may display the margin and other layout guides that you set up to appear on every page of your publication. They may also display some Master page objects.
1. Move to the page or spread that you want to immediately precede, follow, or flank your new pages. 2. Choose Insert Page. The Insert Page dialog box appears. This dialog box is one of the most useful ones you encounter, and its options for page creation can save you a lot of time. 3. then type the number of new pages that you are require after that select the position and go to options, click insert blank pages. 4. Click OK
Deleting pages When you delete a page, all the objects on that page are also deleted. Only objects off the page, on the scratch area, remain untouched. Publisher then automatically renumbers the remaining pages so that you don t end up with a wacky page sequence.
Follow these steps to delete a page: 1. Move to the page you want to delete. 2. Choose Edit Delete Page from the main menu. 3. Respond to the Publisher prompts asking you to confirm your deletion. You have two main choices:
In Single Page view: When you choose the Edit Delete Page command, Publisher displays a confirmation box asking whether you really want to delete the page if the selected page contains any objects. Click yes to delete the page. Click No if you re having second thoughts. Use this command with caution. Press Ctrl+Z if you accidentally delete a page. If the page you select for deletion is blank, you receive no warning before the page is deleted.
In Two-Page Spread view: Publisher opens the Delete Page dialog box. Click the radio button for the option you want: Both Pages, Left Page Only, or Right Page Only. 4. Click OK
Desktop Publishing
2009
26
Chapter 7-Color by the Numbers
In This Chapter
Figuring out what color is
Using color in your publication to get your message across
Matching the colors on your monitor to colors on your printer
Color sells. What once appeared to be dull, listless text looks like super- text when you add color. Microsoft Publisher 2007 makes incorporating.
Color Mode 1. Right-click your desktop and choose Properties from the pop-up
menu that appears. 2. This step opens the Display Properties dialog box. 3. In the Display Properties dialog box, select the Appearance tab
and then click the advanced button. 4. The Advanced Appearance dialog box appears. 5. Click the Color1 button to display the Color sample box. 6. The Color1 button is located in the center-right area of the
dialog box. 7. On the resulting pop-up palette, click the other button.
The Windows Color dialog box appears, the holy grail of all color manipulation.
Changing the Color Scheme A color scheme is a set of colors associated with a publication. Publisher comes with more than 90 color-coordinated color schemes. The easiest way to change the color scheme is from the Publisher Tasks pane. If the Publisher Tasks
Pane isn t showing; choose View Task Pane from the main menu
If you don t find any of the more than 90 color schemes to your liking, you re free to create one (or more) of your own. On the Color Schemes tab of the Format Publication task pane, click the Create New Color Scheme link. In the Create New Color Scheme dialog box, select your favorite colors. The Preview and Sample areas give you an idea of the potential impact of your new color scheme. Type a name in the Color Scheme Name text box and click the Save button. Your new color scheme appears in the color scheme list in the task pane.
Desktop Publishing
2009
27
Color Matching
Every device that can display color also has a range of colors, or color gamut, it can create. Computer monitors have a color gamut, as do desktop scanners and printers. Because color monitors emit light, their color gamut is larger than the color gamut of printers. That s why the color that prints on
Your color printer often doesn t match the color you see on your color monitor. Color matching is a process that attempts to match the colors on one device to the nearest color available on another. The results are often less than satisfying.
Desktop Publishing
2009
28
Chapter 8-Objects and Frames
In This Chapter
Understanding frames (what they are and why you need them)
Working with frames
Creating and working with drawn objects Publication design element: a text or graphic frame, a line, a circle, or some other item on a page. Objects fall into different categories, and each category has a set of properties. After you know how one object in a category works, you can understand the behaviors and properties of related objects in that category. If you in the language of Microsoft Publisher 2007, an object represent any have a good set of objects, you can conquer the world.
Working with frames
Publisher provides four frame types:
Text: A text frame is a container for text. Text frames can be linked to create Publisher stories. In Publisher-speak, a story consists of all the text that s contained in one frame
or that continues to another, linked frame. Some text frames are part of a Business Information Set, which contains information about you or your organization. See the section Adding In Your Business Info, later in this chapter, for details.
Table: This frame type is a container for tables. It helps you arrange text in tidy rows and columns. Table frames are useful for presenting large amounts of data in a clear, easy-to-understand format.
Picture: Picture frames have special properties that let you modify the way graphics look in them.
WordArt: WordArt creates graphical objects based on type
the characters and symbols you make with your keyboard. By using WordArt, you can create many special text effects that are useful in headlines and other places.
Each of the program s four frame types behaves a little differently. In addition to holding different sorts of objects, each type varies in how you create, delete, and otherwise manipulate it.
Creating frames To create a frame, you select the appropriate tool on the Objects toolbar and click and drag with the tool on your layout.
Follow these steps to draw a text box or picture frame: 1. Click the Text Box tool or Picture Frame tool on the Objects toolbar. 2. Choose one of these options:
Picture Frame: You re treated to a variety of choices. If you choose Clip Art Picture from File or From Scanner or Camera, you need to either navigate to the location of the stored file or select the piece of clip art or graphic that you want to insert. At this point, your job is done, and you can sit back, relax, and admire the artwork that now appears in your project.
Text Box or Picture Frame Using the Empty Picture Frame Option: The cursor changes to a crosshair. Move the crosshair over the publication page or scratch area. The sliding ruler lines and the status bar s position box show your exact position. Click and drag to create the outline of your frame.
As you drag, the program draws a sample to show you the size and shape of your new frame. The status bar s size box indicates the frame s size. 3. Release the mouse button to create the frame.
Publisher creates your text or picture frame and selects it so that you can work with it further.
Desktop Publishing
2009
29
Picture frames and text boxes look the same except that text boxes can have buttons used to link frames for automatic content flow control.
To draw a table, the steps are pretty much the same as
for creating a text or picture frame. After you release the mouse button to create the frame, when Publisher opens the Create Table dialog box,
You then need to follow these additional steps: 1. Select the number of rows and columns you want in your table. 2. (Optional) Choose a format for your table. 3. Click the OK button. Your table frame is now complete.
The WordArt frame is somewhat different. When you draw a frame for that object type, the WordArt Gallery
opens.
1. Select the WordArt style that appeals to your discerning eye and then click OK. The Edit WordArt Text dialog window opens. 2. Type the text of your Word Art and then click OK. If you re feeling extra creative, you can change the font and its attributes (size or bold or italics) before clicking the OK button. 3. Continue formatting your WordArt. Because the WordArt graphic is still selected, you notice that the WordArt toolbar appears directly on top of your WordArt. You can use the toolbar to do lots of cool things to your WordArt. If you re not happy with the words in your WordArt, double-click the frame; when you do, the WordArt text box opens on your screen, and you can make changes. After you draw a frame, Publisher automatically deselects whichever frame tool you might have been using and then activates the Select Objects tool so that you can manipulate your object. This feature is a pain to use if you want to draw several frames of the same type one right after the other. To make a frame tool stay selected, double-click the tool icon. When you re done drawing frames with that tool, deselect the tool by clicking any tool in the toolbox. This technique works for any tool in the toolbox (for example, the Line, Box, and Circle tools), not just for frame tools.
Selecting frames and objects A frame is automatically selected after you finish drawing it. You can tell that a frame is selected because it displays eight little circles, or selection handles, around its perimeter. Some selected frames display more than just selection handles. For example, a text box may display a Go to Previous Text Box button or a Go to Next Text Box button. To select a single frame: Just click it. The frame
along with its contents, will be selected. To select additional frames: Hold down the Shift or Ctrl key and click the frames. To deselect one frame from a range of selected objects: Hold down the Shift or Ctrl key and click the frame. To select multiple frames that is close to one another: Click and drag around the frames. As you drag, Publisher shows you a selection box
a dotted line that indicates the area you re encompassing. When the selection box surrounds all the frames (or objects) you want to select, release the mouse button. To select everything on the current publication page (or pages) and the scratch area: Choose the Edit Select All command or press Ctrl+A. (You don t need to select the Select Objects tool to perform this task.)
Desktop Publishing
2009
30
Editing frames You can make two types of deletions:
1. Delete the entire frame itself, which also deletes all its contents. 2. Delete the contents of the frame by selecting the contents themselves.
To delete a frame, you select the frame and choose Edit Delete Object from the main menu. You can also select the frame and press Delete. In the case of a table frame, you have a container with many drawers ; you can delete the contents of each cell in the table by selecting the contents of that cell and pressing Delete. When you have selected text in a text frame or an insertion point in a cell of a table frame, you can press Ctrl+Shift+X to delete the frame. Using only the Delete key in those cases deletes the selected text or the contents of the current cell in the table.
The Edit menu s Cut, Copy, and Paste commands work as described in this list:
Cut: Choose Edit Cut or press Ctrl+X to place the current selection on the Windows Clipboard and remove it from your layout. The previous contents of the Clipboard are lost. Copy: Choose Edit Copy or press Ctrl+C to make a copy of your selected element and place it on the Clipboard. The selection remains intact on your layout. The previous contents of the Clipboard are lost. To quickly copy a selected frame or the selected object, press Ctrl within the frame and drag the frame to a new location. Copying is a great time- saver and an ideal way to make exact duplicates of frames you ve already drawn. Paste: Choose Edit Paste or press Ctrl+V to place the contents of the Clipboard on your layout at your current position. The previous contents of the Clipboard remain intact. You can apply the Paste command any number of times you want.
Most Publisher users typically start out by creating frames. If you ve ever used a drawing program, you re probably familiar with basic drawing elements such as ovals, lines, and rectangles. Publisher is nothing more than a fancy drawing program.
Line tool: Creates lines on your layout. Click and drag a line from a starting point (where you click and begin dragging) to an ending point (where you release the mouse button). Arrow: Looks and feels pretty much like a line except it has a pointy head on it! Oval tool: Creates an oval. If you want to create a perfect circle, press the Shift key while you click and drag. Rectangle tool: Create a rectangle. Press the Shift key while you click and drag to create a square. AutoShapes tool: Creates more complex shapes. This is very special tool because it lets you easily create interesting shapes that you can use for captions, callouts, product bursts, and many other purposes. The Basic Shapes pop-up menu for the AutoShapes Tool. Click to select the shape that you want from the menu and then drag to create your object on the layout.
Objectives:1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Introduction Adobe PageMaker is a powerful page layout application, which we can use to create professional looking publications. It is an application that offers a high degree of over many aspects of page design. PageMaker gives powerful control over the placement of text and graphics for short and long documents. It helps us create templates brochure and newsletters. To learn how to use it to its fullest capabilities, we nprinciples and techniques. In this module we will cover basic topics including the interface, master pages, multiple columns, importing and formatting text, importing and manipulating graphics, wrapping text around graphics and printing.
Interface
B. Margins appear as dotted or pink lines. C. Page icons show the master pagesD. Rulers help you align objects on the page. E. The Colors and Styles palettes are used to add, delete, and edit colors and styles. F. The pasteboard stores items for later use. G. The Contr
Chapter
Objectives:
1.
INTRODUCTION
2.
INTERFACE
3.
CREATING A NEW DOCUMENT
4.
MANAGING DOCUMENTS LAYOUT
5.
ASSIGNMENT
Introduction Adobe PageMaker is a powerful page layout application, which we can use to create professional looking publications. It is an application that offers a high degree of over many aspects of page design. PageMaker gives powerful control over the placement of text and graphics for short and long documents. It helps us create templates brochure and newsletters. To learn how to use it to its fullest capabilities, we nprinciples and techniques. In this module we will cover basic topics including the interface, master pages, multiple columns, importing and formatting text, importing and manipulating graphics, wrapping text around graphics and
ting.
Interface
Margins appear as dotted or pink lines. Page icons show the master pagesRulers help you align objects on the page. The Colors and Styles palettes are used to add, delete, and edit colors and styles. The pasteboard stores items for later use. The Control palette provides commands for making precise changes to text and graphics.
Chapter
INTRODUCTION
INTERFACE
CREATING A NEW DOCUMENT
MANAGING DOCUMENTS LAYOUT
ASSIGNMENT
Introduction
Adobe PageMaker is a powerful page layout application, which we can use to create professional looking publications. It is an application that offers a high degree of over many aspects of page design. PageMaker gives powerful control over the placement of text and graphics for short and long documents. It helps us create templates brochure and newsletters. To learn how to use it to its fullest capabilities, we need to understand basic principles and techniques. In this module we will cover basic topics including the interface, master pages, multiple columns, importing and formatting text, importing and manipulating graphics, wrapping text around graphics and
Margins appear as dotted or pink lines. Page icons show the master pagesRulers help you align objects on the page. The Colors and Styles palettes are used to add, delete, and edit colors and styles. The pasteboard stores items for later use.
ol palette provides commands for making precise changes to text and graphics.
Chapter
9 - Introduction
CREATING A NEW DOCUMENT
MANAGING DOCUMENTS LAYOUT
Adobe PageMaker is a powerful page layout application, which we can use to create professional looking publications. It is an application that offers a high degree of control over many aspects of page design. PageMaker gives powerful control over the placement of text and graphics for short and long documents. It helps us create templates brochure and newsletters. To learn how to use it to its fullest
eed to understand basic principles and techniques. In this module we will cover basic topics including the interface, master pages, multiple columns, importing and formatting text, importing and manipulating graphics, wrapping text around graphics and
Margins appear as dotted or pink lines.
Page icons show the master pages
(L for left, and R for Right) and the regular pages in the publication. Rulers help you align objects on the page. The Colors and Styles palettes are used to add, delete, and edit colors and styles. The pasteboard stores items for later use.
ol palette provides commands for making precise changes to text and graphics.
Introduction
MANAGING DOCUMENTS LAYOUT
Adobe PageMaker is a powerful page layout application, which we can use to create professional looking publications. It is an
control over many aspects of page design. PageMaker gives powerful control over the placement of text and graphics for short and long documents. It helps us create templates brochure and newsletters. To learn how to use it to its fullest
eed to understand basic principles and techniques. In this module we will cover basic topics including the interface, master pages, multiple columns, importing and formatting text, importing and manipulating graphics, wrapping text around graphics and
The Work AreaWhen you create a publication, PageMaker opens a publication window that contains an empty page centered on the pasteboard. The page and pasteboard, where you lay out text and graphics, are similar to the work space used in tpasteThe Toolbox palette and the Control palette are important parts of the PageMaker window. The Template palette appears at the launch to help us select the type of new document we wish to work with. The Picture palette and the Color palavailable for choosing clip art, graphics or text. The Style palette is used to apply styles to the text. A.objects.
(L for left, and R for Right) and the regular pages in the publication. Rulers help you align objects on the page.
The Colors and Styles palettes are used to add, delete, and edit colors and styles. The pasteboard stores items for later use.
ol palette provides commands for making precise changes to text and graphics.
31
Introduction, Page Layout and Design with
The Work AreaWhen you create a publication, PageMaker opens a publication window that contains an empty page centered on the pasteboard. The page and pasteboard, where you lay out text and graphics, are similar to the work space used in tpaste-up. The Toolbox palette and the Control palette are important parts of the PageMaker window. The Template palette appears at the launch to help us select the type of new document we wish to work with. The Picture palette and the Color palavailable for choosing clip art, graphics or text. The Style palette is used to apply styles to the text. A.
The toolbox includes tools for creat ing or edit ing objects.
(L for left, and R for Right) and the regular pages in the publication.
The Colors and Styles palettes are used to add, delete, and edit colors and styles.
ol palette provides commands for making precise changes to text and graphics.
Desktop Publishing
Page Layout and Design with
The Work Area
When you create a publication, PageMaker opens a publication window that contains an empty page centered on the pasteboard. The page and pasteboard, where you lay out text and graphics, are similar to the work space used in t
The Toolbox palette and the Control palette are important parts of the PageMaker window. The Template palette appears at the launch to help us select the type of new document we wish to work with. The Picture palette and the Color palavailable for choosing clip art, graphics or text. The Style palette is used to apply styles to the text.
The toolbox includes tools for creat ing or edit ing
(L for left, and R for Right) and the regular pages in the publication.
The Colors and Styles palettes are used to add, delete, and edit colors and styles.
ol palette provides commands for making precise changes to text and graphics.
Desktop Publishing
PAGEMAKER
Page Layout and Design with
When you create a publication, PageMaker opens a publication window that contains an empty page centered on the pasteboard. The page and pasteboard, where you lay out text and graphics, are similar to the work space used in t
The Toolbox palette and the Control palette are important parts of the PageMaker window. The Template palette appears at the launch to help us select the type of new document we wish to work with. The Picture palette and the Color palavailable for choosing clip art, graphics or text. The Style palette is used to apply styles to the text.
The toolbox includes tools for creat ing or edit ing
(L for left, and R for Right) and the regular pages in the publication.
The Colors and Styles palettes are used to add, delete, and edit colors and styles.
ol palette provides commands for making precise changes to text and graphics.
Desktop Publishing
2009
PAGEMAKER
Page Layout and Design with PageMaker
When you create a publication, PageMaker opens a publication window that contains an empty page centered on the pasteboard. The page and pasteboard, where you lay out text and graphics, are similar to the work space used in t
The Toolbox palette and the Control palette are important parts of the PageMaker window. The Template palette appears at the launch to help us select the type of new document we wish to work with. The Picture palette and the Color palette are made available for choosing clip art, graphics or text. The Style palette
The toolbox includes tools for creat ing or edit ing
(L for left, and R for Right) and the regular pages in the publication.
2009
PAGEMAKER
Page Layout and Design with
PageMaker
When you create a publication, PageMaker opens a publication window that contains an empty page centered on the pasteboard. The page and pasteboard, where you lay out text and graphics, are similar to the work space used in traditional
The Toolbox palette and the Control palette are important parts of the PageMaker window. The Template palette appears at the launch to help us select the type of new document we wish to
ette are made available for choosing clip art, graphics or text. The Style palette
The toolbox includes tools for creat ing or edit ing
The Title barIt is displayed at the top of the PageMaker window. The words Adobe PageMaker 7.0 at the left edge indicate that we are working in PageMaker. Once we open the saved, it is identified as Untitled 1 (2, 3 and so on). The control buttons Minimize, Maximize Restore and Exit, located to the right of the title bar, help us to control the stat
The Menu barMost of the PageMaker's functions can be located and activated using the Menu bar. This bar contains commands that are used to make modification to the PageMaker document. We just have to click on the menu to revealor menu commands that are available. We can then make selection by clicking the item of our choice.
The ToolbarImmediately below the Menu bar is the Toolbar. It is composed of buttons that provide shortcuts to the most frequently used commmakes choices or establish parameters.
Working with PalettesPageMaker includes several palettes. Some of them are
1. The Colors palette 2. The Control3. The Hyper4. The Layers palette 5. The Master Pages palette 6. The Styles palette
In addition, some plugthe Window menu.
The following tec
1. Choose the appropriate Show or Hide command from the Window menu to control the display of the palette or
group of palettes. (Use the Window > Plug
2. Open and close most palettes using keyboard shortcuts. You can also show or hide all palettes and the toolbox
by pressing the Tab key (make sure an insertion point is not selected in your text).
3. To hide all palettes but not th
within a larger palette; the Layers and Master Pages palettes are also grou
5. Click a palette's tab to make it appear at the front of the group.
6. Drag a palette to a convenient place on your desktop and leave it
7. To move an entire palette group, drag its title bar.
8. To display a palette's
9. To change the height or width of a palette, drag the size box at the lower right corner of the palette.
10. To increase your work space, click the zoom box in the far right corner of
group, or, to preserve the width of a palette when you collapse it, double
The Title bar
It is displayed at the top of the PageMaker window. The words Adobe PageMaker 7.0 at the left edge indicate that we are working in PageMaker. Once we open the saved, it is identified as Untitled 1 (2, 3 and so on). The control buttons Minimize, Maximize Restore and Exit, located to the right of the title bar, help us to control the stat
The Menu bar
Most of the PageMaker's functions can be located and activated using the Menu bar. This bar contains commands that are used to make modification to the PageMaker document. We just have to click on the menu to revealor menu commands that are available. We can then make selection by clicking the item of our choice.
The Toolbar
Immediately below the Menu bar is the Toolbar. It is composed of buttons that provide shortcuts to the most frequently used commands. Clicking a tool bar button activates a specific command or provides a dialog box from, which we can, makes choices or establish parameters.
Working with PalettesPageMaker includes several palettes. Some of them are
The Colors palette The Control
palette The Hyper-links paletteThe Layers palette The Master Pages palette The Styles palette
In addition, some plug-the Window menu.
The following techniques can help you save time when you are working with palettes:
Choose the appropriate Show or Hide command from the Window menu to control the display of the palette or
group of palettes. (Use the Window > Plug
Open and close most palettes using keyboard shortcuts. You can also show or hide all palettes and the toolbox
by pressing the Tab key (make sure an insertion point is not selected in your text).
To hide all palettes but not th
within a larger palette; the Layers and Master Pages palettes are also grou
Click a palette's tab to make it appear at the front of the group.
Drag a palette to a convenient place on your desktop and leave it
To move an entire palette group, drag its title bar.
To display a palette's
To change the height or width of a palette, drag the size box at the lower right corner of the palette.
To increase your work space, click the zoom box in the far right corner of
group, or, to preserve the width of a palette when you collapse it, double
It is displayed at the top of the PageMaker window. The words Adobe PageMaker 7.0 at the left edge indicate that we are working in PageMaker. Once we open the saved, it is identified as Untitled 1 (2, 3 and so on). The control buttons Minimize, Maximize Restore and Exit, located to the right of the title bar, help us to control the stat
Most of the PageMaker's functions can be located and activated using the Menu bar. This bar contains commands that are used to make modification to the PageMaker document. We just have to click on the menu to revealor menu commands that are available. We can then make selection by clicking the item of our choice.
Immediately below the Menu bar is the Toolbar. It is composed of buttons that provide shortcuts to the most frequently ands. Clicking a tool bar button activates a specific command or provides a dialog box from, which we can,
makes choices or establish parameters.
Working with Palettes
PageMaker includes several palettes. Some of them are
The Colors palette
palette
links palette
The Layers palette
The Master Pages palette
The Styles palette
-in palettes, such as the Library palette, are installed automatically and are listed separately on
hniques can help you save time when you are working with palettes:
Choose the appropriate Show or Hide command from the Window menu to control the display of the palette or
group of palettes. (Use the Window > Plug
Open and close most palettes using keyboard shortcuts. You can also show or hide all palettes and the toolbox
by pressing the Tab key (make sure an insertion point is not selected in your text).
To hide all palettes but not th
within a larger palette; the Layers and Master Pages palettes are also grou
Click a palette's tab to make it appear at the front of the group.
Drag a palette to a convenient place on your desktop and leave it
To move an entire palette group, drag its title bar.
To display a palette's
menu commands, click the triangle in the upper right corner of the palette.
To change the height or width of a palette, drag the size box at the lower right corner of the palette.
To increase your work space, click the zoom box in the far right corner of
group, or, to preserve the width of a palette when you collapse it, double
It is displayed at the top of the PageMaker window. The words Adobe PageMaker 7.0 at the left edge indicate that we are working in PageMaker. Once we open the document it displays the name of toe active document. If the document is not saved, it is identified as Untitled 1 (2, 3 and so on). The control buttons Minimize, Maximize Restore and Exit, located to the right of the title bar, help us to control the stat
Most of the PageMaker's functions can be located and activated using the Menu bar. This bar contains commands that are used to make modification to the PageMaker document. We just have to click on the menu to revealor menu commands that are available. We can then make selection by clicking the item of our choice.
Immediately below the Menu bar is the Toolbar. It is composed of buttons that provide shortcuts to the most frequently ands. Clicking a tool bar button activates a specific command or provides a dialog box from, which we can,
makes choices or establish parameters.
PageMaker includes several palettes. Some of them are
in palettes, such as the Library palette, are installed automatically and are listed separately on
hniques can help you save time when you are working with palettes:
Choose the appropriate Show or Hide command from the Window menu to control the display of the palette or
group of palettes. (Use the Window > Plug
Open and close most palettes using keyboard shortcuts. You can also show or hide all palettes and the toolbox
by pressing the Tab key (make sure an insertion point is not selected in your text).
To hide all palettes but not the toolbox, press Shift+Tab.
within a larger palette; the Layers and Master Pages palettes are also grou
Click a palette's tab to make it appear at the front of the group.
Drag a palette to a convenient place on your desktop and leave it
To move an entire palette group, drag its title bar.
menu commands, click the triangle in the upper right corner of the palette.
To change the height or width of a palette, drag the size box at the lower right corner of the palette.
To increase your work space, click the zoom box in the far right corner of
group, or, to preserve the width of a palette when you collapse it, double
32
It is displayed at the top of the PageMaker window. The words Adobe PageMaker 7.0 at the left edge indicate that we are
document it displays the name of toe active document. If the document is not saved, it is identified as Untitled 1 (2, 3 and so on). The control buttons Minimize, Maximize Restore and Exit, located to the right of the title bar, help us to control the status of the PageMaker window.
Most of the PageMaker's functions can be located and activated using the Menu bar. This bar contains commands that are used to make modification to the PageMaker document. We just have to click on the menu to revealor menu commands that are available. We can then make selection by clicking the item of our choice.
Immediately below the Menu bar is the Toolbar. It is composed of buttons that provide shortcuts to the most frequently ands. Clicking a tool bar button activates a specific command or provides a dialog box from, which we can,
PageMaker includes several palettes. Some of them are -
in palettes, such as the Library palette, are installed automatically and are listed separately on
hniques can help you save time when you are working with palettes:
Choose the appropriate Show or Hide command from the Window menu to control the display of the palette or
group of palettes. (Use the Window > Plug-in Palettes command to show or hide palet
Open and close most palettes using keyboard shortcuts. You can also show or hide all palettes and the toolbox
by pressing the Tab key (make sure an insertion point is not selected in your text).
e toolbox, press Shift+Tab.
a palette's tab. You can drag a palette outside of an existing
group to create a separate palette or drag it over an existing
group to add the palette to that group. (The Cont
Library, Scripts, and Data Merge palettes cannot be grouped
with other palettes.) By default, the Colors and Styles
palettes are grouped together so that they appear as panels
within a larger palette; the Layers and Master Pages palettes are also grou
Click a palette's tab to make it appear at the front of the group.
Drag a palette to a convenient place on your desktop and leave it
To move an entire palette group, drag its title bar.
menu commands, click the triangle in the upper right corner of the palette.
To change the height or width of a palette, drag the size box at the lower right corner of the palette.
To increase your work space, click the zoom box in the far right corner of
group, or, to preserve the width of a palette when you collapse it, double
It is displayed at the top of the PageMaker window. The words Adobe PageMaker 7.0 at the left edge indicate that we are
document it displays the name of toe active document. If the document is not saved, it is identified as Untitled 1 (2, 3 and so on). The control buttons Minimize, Maximize Restore and Exit, located to
us of the PageMaker window.
Most of the PageMaker's functions can be located and activated using the Menu bar. This bar contains commands that are used to make modification to the PageMaker document. We just have to click on the menu to revealor menu commands that are available. We can then make selection by clicking the item of our choice.
Immediately below the Menu bar is the Toolbar. It is composed of buttons that provide shortcuts to the most frequently ands. Clicking a tool bar button activates a specific command or provides a dialog box from, which we can,
in palettes, such as the Library palette, are installed automatically and are listed separately on
hniques can help you save time when you are working with palettes:
Choose the appropriate Show or Hide command from the Window menu to control the display of the palette or
in Palettes command to show or hide palet
Open and close most palettes using keyboard shortcuts. You can also show or hide all palettes and the toolbox
by pressing the Tab key (make sure an insertion point is not selected in your text).
e toolbox, press Shift+Tab.
4. To rearrange, separate, or reorganize palettes, drag
a palette's tab. You can drag a palette outside of an existing
group to create a separate palette or drag it over an existing
group to add the palette to that group. (The Cont
Library, Scripts, and Data Merge palettes cannot be grouped
with other palettes.) By default, the Colors and Styles
palettes are grouped together so that they appear as panels
within a larger palette; the Layers and Master Pages palettes are also grou
Click a palette's tab to make it appear at the front of the group.
Drag a palette to a convenient place on your desktop and leave it opens
menu commands, click the triangle in the upper right corner of the palette.
To change the height or width of a palette, drag the size box at the lower right corner of the palette.
To increase your work space, click the zoom box in the far right corner of
group, or, to preserve the width of a palette when you collapse it, double
Desktop Publishing
It is displayed at the top of the PageMaker window. The words Adobe PageMaker 7.0 at the left edge indicate that we are document it displays the name of toe active document. If the document is not
saved, it is identified as Untitled 1 (2, 3 and so on). The control buttons Minimize, Maximize Restore and Exit, located to us of the PageMaker window.
Most of the PageMaker's functions can be located and activated using the Menu bar. This bar contains commands that are used to make modification to the PageMaker document. We just have to click on the menu to revealor menu commands that are available. We can then make selection by clicking the item of our choice.
Immediately below the Menu bar is the Toolbar. It is composed of buttons that provide shortcuts to the most frequently ands. Clicking a tool bar button activates a specific command or provides a dialog box from, which we can,
in palettes, such as the Library palette, are installed automatically and are listed separately on
hniques can help you save time when you are working with palettes:
Choose the appropriate Show or Hide command from the Window menu to control the display of the palette or
in Palettes command to show or hide palet
Open and close most palettes using keyboard shortcuts. You can also show or hide all palettes and the toolbox
by pressing the Tab key (make sure an insertion point is not selected in your text).
To rearrange, separate, or reorganize palettes, drag
a palette's tab. You can drag a palette outside of an existing
group to create a separate palette or drag it over an existing
group to add the palette to that group. (The Cont
Library, Scripts, and Data Merge palettes cannot be grouped
with other palettes.) By default, the Colors and Styles
palettes are grouped together so that they appear as panels
within a larger palette; the Layers and Master Pages palettes are also grouped together in this way.
opens
while you work.
menu commands, click the triangle in the upper right corner of the palette.
To change the height or width of a palette, drag the size box at the lower right corner of the palette.
To increase your work space, click the zoom box in the far right corner of the title bar to collapse the palette
group, or, to preserve the width of a palette when you collapse it, double-click a palette's tab. (If you resized
Desktop Publishing
It is displayed at the top of the PageMaker window. The words Adobe PageMaker 7.0 at the left edge indicate that we are document it displays the name of toe active document. If the document is not
saved, it is identified as Untitled 1 (2, 3 and so on). The control buttons Minimize, Maximize Restore and Exit, located to
Most of the PageMaker's functions can be located and activated using the Menu bar. This bar contains commands that are used to make modification to the PageMaker document. We just have to click on the menu to revealor menu commands that are available. We can then make selection by clicking the item of our choice.
Immediately below the Menu bar is the Toolbar. It is composed of buttons that provide shortcuts to the most frequently ands. Clicking a tool bar button activates a specific command or provides a dialog box from, which we can,
in palettes, such as the Library palette, are installed automatically and are listed separately on
Choose the appropriate Show or Hide command from the Window menu to control the display of the palette or
in Palettes command to show or hide palettes for installed plug
Open and close most palettes using keyboard shortcuts. You can also show or hide all palettes and the toolbox
by pressing the Tab key (make sure an insertion point is not selected in your text).
To rearrange, separate, or reorganize palettes, drag
a palette's tab. You can drag a palette outside of an existing
group to create a separate palette or drag it over an existing
group to add the palette to that group. (The Cont
Library, Scripts, and Data Merge palettes cannot be grouped
with other palettes.) By default, the Colors and Styles
palettes are grouped together so that they appear as panels
ped together in this way.
while you work.
menu commands, click the triangle in the upper right corner of the palette.
To change the height or width of a palette, drag the size box at the lower right corner of the palette.
the title bar to collapse the palette
click a palette's tab. (If you resized
Desktop Publishing
2009
It is displayed at the top of the PageMaker window. The words Adobe PageMaker 7.0 at the left edge indicate that we are document it displays the name of toe active document. If the document is not
saved, it is identified as Untitled 1 (2, 3 and so on). The control buttons Minimize, Maximize Restore and Exit, located to
Most of the PageMaker's functions can be located and activated using the Menu bar. This bar contains commands that are used to make modification to the PageMaker document. We just have to click on the menu to reveal
the menu items
Immediately below the Menu bar is the Toolbar. It is composed of buttons that provide shortcuts to the most frequently ands. Clicking a tool bar button activates a specific command or provides a dialog box from, which we can,
in palettes, such as the Library palette, are installed automatically and are listed separately on
Choose the appropriate Show or Hide command from the Window menu to control the display of the palette or
tes for installed plug-ins.)
Open and close most palettes using keyboard shortcuts. You can also show or hide all palettes and the toolbox
To rearrange, separate, or reorganize palettes, drag
a palette's tab. You can drag a palette outside of an existing
group to create a separate palette or drag it over an existing
group to add the palette to that group. (The Cont
Library, Scripts, and Data Merge palettes cannot be grouped
with other palettes.) By default, the Colors and Styles
palettes are grouped together so that they appear as panels
ped together in this way.
menu commands, click the triangle in the upper right corner of the palette.
To change the height or width of a palette, drag the size box at the lower right corner of the palette.
the title bar to collapse the palette
click a palette's tab. (If you resized
2009
It is displayed at the top of the PageMaker window. The words Adobe PageMaker 7.0 at the left edge indicate that we are
document it displays the name of toe active document. If the document is not saved, it is identified as Untitled 1 (2, 3 and so on). The control buttons Minimize, Maximize Restore and Exit, located to
Most of the PageMaker's functions can be located and activated using the Menu bar. This bar contains commands that the menu items
Immediately below the Menu bar is the Toolbar. It is composed of buttons that provide shortcuts to the most frequently ands. Clicking a tool bar button activates a specific command or provides a dialog box from, which we can,
in palettes, such as the Library palette, are installed automatically and are listed separately on
Choose the appropriate Show or Hide command from the Window menu to control the display of the palette or
ins.)
Open and close most palettes using keyboard shortcuts. You can also show or hide all palettes and the toolbox
To rearrange, separate, or reorganize palettes, drag
a palette's tab. You can drag a palette outside of an existing
group to create a separate palette or drag it over an existing
group to add the palette to that group. (The Control,
Library, Scripts, and Data Merge palettes cannot be grouped
with other palettes.) By default, the Colors and Styles
palettes are grouped together so that they appear as panels
the title bar to collapse the palette
click a palette's tab. (If you resized
11.
Toolbox paletteThis is the most essential of all the palettes. From it, we can select the Text or Pointer tools, activate the basic graphic tools, or choose to rotate, crop and zoom.
A. Use the pointer tool to select, move, and resize text objects angraphics.
B. Use the rotating tool to select and rotate objects.C. Use the line tool to draw straight lines in any direction. D. Use the rectangle tool to draw squares and rectangles. E. Use the ellipse tool to draw circles and ellipses. F. Use the polygon tool toG. Use the hand tool to scroll the page, or to preview and test
hyperlinks. H. Use the text tool to type, select, and edit text. I. Use the cropping tool to trim imported graphics. J. Use the constrained line tool to draw vertical or horizontal linK. Use the frame tools to create placeholder shapes. L. Use the zoom tool to magnify or reduce an area of the page.
Control PaletteAnother essential PageMaker component is tile Control Palette. This contextually sensitive panel places most of the common settings and commands within convenient reach of the user, saving multiple steps involved in activating menu commands and working within dialog boxes. It automatically changes to reflect the context of the tool that is being used.
If the Control Pal
1.
Template paletteBy default Maker. This palette helps us to configure the layout parameters of our document automatically. The Template Paland 310 templates. Each category contains numerous individual templates from, which we may choose.
To display the Template Palette if is not visible:
1.
the palette, the first click of the zoom box returns the group to the default size and the second click
it.) Submenus are still available when palettes are collapsed.
11.
To hide a palette group, choose the appropriate Hide command from the Window menu or click the group's
close box. Choosing a Hide command for any palette in a group hides the entire g
Toolbox paletteThis is the most essential of all the palettes. From it, we can select the Text or Pointer tools, activate the basic graphic tools, or choose to rotate, crop and zoom.
Use the pointer tool to select, move, and resize text objects angraphics.
Use the rotating tool to select and rotate objects.Use the line tool to draw straight lines in any direction. Use the rectangle tool to draw squares and rectangles. Use the ellipse tool to draw circles and ellipses. Use the polygon tool toUse the hand tool to scroll the page, or to preview and test hyperlinks.
Use the text tool to type, select, and edit text. Use the cropping tool to trim imported graphics. Use the constrained line tool to draw vertical or horizontal linUse the frame tools to create placeholder shapes. Use the zoom tool to magnify or reduce an area of the page.
Control PaletteAnother essential PageMaker component is tile Control Palette. This contextually sensitive panel places most of the common settings and commands within convenient reach of the user, saving multiple steps involved in activating menu commands and working within dialog boxes. It automatically changes to reflect the context of the tool that is being used.
If the Control Palette is not visible:
1.
Choose Window> Show Control Palette command.
Template paletteBy default - The Template palette appears when we launch Page Maker. This palette helps us to configure the layout parameters of our document automatically. The Template Paland 310 templates. Each category contains numerous individual templates from, which we may choose.
To display the Template Palette if is not visible:
1.
Choose Window> Plug
the palette, the first click of the zoom box returns the group to the default size and the second click
it.) Submenus are still available when palettes are collapsed.
To hide a palette group, choose the appropriate Hide command from the Window menu or click the group's
close box. Choosing a Hide command for any palette in a group hides the entire g
Toolbox palette
This is the most essential of all the palettes. From it, we can select the Text or Pointer tools, activate the basic graphic tools, or choose to rotate, crop and zoom.
Use the pointer tool to select, move, and resize text objects an
Use the rotating tool to select and rotate objects.Use the line tool to draw straight lines in any direction. Use the rectangle tool to draw squares and rectangles. Use the ellipse tool to draw circles and ellipses. Use the polygon tool to
draw polygons. Use the hand tool to scroll the page, or to preview and test
Use the text tool to type, select, and edit text. Use the cropping tool to trim imported graphics. Use the constrained line tool to draw vertical or horizontal linUse the frame tools to create placeholder shapes. Use the zoom tool to magnify or reduce an area of the page.
Control Palette
Another essential PageMaker component is tile Control Palette. This contextually sensitive panel places most of the common settings and commands within convenient reach of the user, saving multiple steps involved in activating menu commands and working within dialog boxes. It automatically changes to reflect the context of the tool that is being used.
ette is not visible:
Choose Window> Show Control Palette command.
Template palette
The Template palette appears when we launch Page Maker. This palette helps us to configure the layout parameters of our document automatically. The Template Paland 310 templates. Each category contains numerous individual templates from, which we may choose.
To display the Template Palette if is not visible:
Choose Window> Plug-
the palette, the first click of the zoom box returns the group to the default size and the second click
it.) Submenus are still available when palettes are collapsed.
To hide a palette group, choose the appropriate Hide command from the Window menu or click the group's
close box. Choosing a Hide command for any palette in a group hides the entire g
This is the most essential of all the palettes. From it, we can select the Text or Pointer tools, activate the basic graphic tools, or choose
Use the pointer tool to select, move, and resize text objects an
Use the rotating tool to select and rotate objects.Use the line tool to draw straight lines in any direction. Use the rectangle tool to draw squares and rectangles. Use the ellipse tool to draw circles and ellipses.
draw polygons.
Use the hand tool to scroll the page, or to preview and test
Use the text tool to type, select, and edit text. Use the cropping tool to trim imported graphics. Use the constrained line tool to draw vertical or horizontal linUse the frame tools to create placeholder shapes. Use the zoom tool to magnify or reduce an area of the page.
Another essential PageMaker component is tile Control Palette. This contextually sensitive panel places most of the common settings and commands within convenient reach of the user, saving multiple steps involved in activating menu commands and working within dialog boxes. It automatically changes to reflect the context of the tool that is being used.
ette is not visible:
Choose Window> Show Control Palette command.
The Template palette appears when we launch Page Maker. This palette helps us to configure the layout parameters of our document automatically. The Template Palette provides 20 categories and 310 templates. Each category contains numerous individual templates from, which we may choose.
To display the Template Palette if is not visible:
-in Palette> Show Template Palette.
the palette, the first click of the zoom box returns the group to the default size and the second click
it.) Submenus are still available when palettes are collapsed.
To hide a palette group, choose the appropriate Hide command from the Window menu or click the group's
close box. Choosing a Hide command for any palette in a group hides the entire g
This is the most essential of all the palettes. From it, we can select the Text or Pointer tools, activate the basic graphic tools, or choose
Use the pointer tool to select, move, and resize text objects an
Use the rotating tool to select and rotate objects.
Use the line tool to draw straight lines in any direction. Use the rectangle tool to draw squares and rectangles. Use the ellipse tool to draw circles and ellipses.
Use the hand tool to scroll the page, or to preview and test
Use the text tool to type, select, and edit text.
Use the cropping tool to trim imported graphics.
Use the constrained line tool to draw vertical or horizontal linUse the frame tools to create placeholder shapes.
Use the zoom tool to magnify or reduce an area of the page.
Another essential PageMaker component is tile Control Palette. This contextually sensitive panel places most of the common settings and commands within convenient reach of the user, saving multiple steps involved in activating menu commands and working within dialog boxes. It automatically changes to reflect the
Choose Window> Show Control Palette command.
The Template palette appears when we launch Page Maker. This palette helps us to configure the layout parameters of our
ette provides 20 categories and 310 templates. Each category contains numerous individual
To display the Template Palette if is not visible:
in Palette> Show Template Palette.
33
the palette, the first click of the zoom box returns the group to the default size and the second click
it.) Submenus are still available when palettes are collapsed.
To hide a palette group, choose the appropriate Hide command from the Window menu or click the group's
close box. Choosing a Hide command for any palette in a group hides the entire g
This is the most essential of all the palettes. From it, we can select the Text or Pointer tools, activate the basic graphic tools, or choose
Use the pointer tool to select, move, and resize text objects and
Use the line tool to draw straight lines in any direction.
Use the rectangle tool to draw squares and rectangles.
Use the hand tool to scroll the page, or to preview and test
Use the constrained line tool to draw vertical or horizontal lines.
Use the zoom tool to magnify or reduce an area of the page.
Another essential PageMaker component is tile Control Palette. This contextually sensitive panel places most of the common settings and commands within convenient reach of the user, saving multiple steps involved in activating menu commands and working within dialog boxes. It automatically changes to reflect the
Choose Window> Show Control Palette command.
The Template palette appears when we launch Page Maker. This palette helps us to configure the layout parameters of our
ette provides 20 categories and 310 templates. Each category contains numerous individual
in Palette> Show Template Palette.
Desktop Publishing
the palette, the first click of the zoom box returns the group to the default size and the second click
To hide a palette group, choose the appropriate Hide command from the Window menu or click the group's
close box. Choosing a Hide command for any palette in a group hides the entire g
Another essential PageMaker component is tile Control Palette. This contextually sensitive panel places most of the
Desktop Publishing
the palette, the first click of the zoom box returns the group to the default size and the second click
To hide a palette group, choose the appropriate Hide command from the Window menu or click the group's
close box. Choosing a Hide command for any palette in a group hides the entire group.
Another essential PageMaker component is tile Control Palette. This contextually sensitive panel places most of the
Desktop Publishing
2009
the palette, the first click of the zoom box returns the group to the default size and the second click
To hide a palette group, choose the appropriate Hide command from the Window menu or click the group's
Another essential PageMaker component is tile Control Palette. This contextually sensitive panel places most of the
2009
the palette, the first click of the zoom box returns the group to the default size and the second click collapses
To hide a palette group, choose the appropriate Hide command from the Window menu or click the group's
Another essential PageMaker component is tile Control Palette. This contextually sensitive panel places most of the
Desktop Publishing
2009
34
Picture Palette PageMaker's Picture palette is a graphics gallery from which we can access the clip art and images that come with Page Maker. We can also add our own clipart images to it. The Picture palette offers two styles of art:
1) Clipart, which is drawn graphic
2) Images, which are photographs.
Within the collection of graphics there are 24 categories of each style with multiple graphics from which to choose.
To display the Picture Palette if is not visible:
1. Choose Window> Show Picture Palette.
Color palette From this palette we can choose the stroke color and the fill colors that we wish to apply to the graphics.
There are two control buttons on the title bar of the Color Palette. The Exit button closes the palette and the other, the Minimize button, hides the palette's entire heading. This palette comes with 10 colors. We can add more colors.
To display the Color Palette if is not visible
1. Choose Window> Show Color Palette.
Page and Pasteboard In PageMaker, the active page of our document is situated in the center of an area called the pasteboard. Each page is surrounded by its own pasteboard, which denotes areas outside a page where we can store objects that still haven't been positioned on a page. Each spread's pasteboard also provides ample space for accommodating objects that extend beyond the edge of a page. The amount of pasteboard that is visible depends upon the view settings.
To display the Pasteboard
1. Choose View> Entire Pasteboard.
Navigating through the pages The scroll bars at the right and bottom of the PageMaker window move the document up, down, right or left when we click the appropriate scroll bar arrow, enabling us to better see the elements on the page.
In addition to the scroll bars, the Hand tool can also be used to adjust the portion of the page or pasteboard visible on the screen.
The View Menu provides several predetermined choices to view the page:
1. Zoom In: This command causes the page to enlarge. The preset magnification sequence is 25%, 50%, 75%, 100%, 200% and 400%. If we were viewing the page at 63%, clicking the Zoom In command would move the page to the next increment of magnification, 75%. Zoom In focuses on the center of the page.
Desktop Publishing
2009
35
2. Zoom Out: This command causes the page to reduce in size. The preset reduction sequences are the same as those in Zoom In: 400%, 200%, 100%, 75%, 50% and 25%.
3. Actual Size: This command supposedly presents the page in the actual size in which it will be printed.
4. Fit in Window: This command causes the entire page to be viewable in the PageMaker window.
5. Entire Pasteboard: This command causes the pasteboard to be viewable in the PageMaker window.
6. Zoom To: This command enables us to zoom to any of the six preset magnifications.
Creating a New Document We can create a new document in PageMaker 7 using two options:
1. Using a Template palette
2. Using a Document Setup
Creating a new document using Template Palette This palette is a collection of preformatted documents in a variety of types and styles that we can use as the basis of our document. Opening a document template creates a new document in which all of the essential elements are in place.
In exploring the templates available to us in PageMaker, look for the one that is close to our concept document. It is also possible that we can get an exact match. It is also likely that the templates we examine will give us additional ideas that we can add. As discussed earlier, the Template palette is open by default the first time we launch PageMaker.
To open a Template as a new document: Double click the template or choose the template with one click, and then click the Create Publication Button. The template opens as an unnamed template document. If the template contains fonts that we do not have on our system, PageMaker prompts us to select a substitute font or to accept a default font before opening a document.
The template document is a shell into which we place the appropriate information to make it our own unique design. We can rearrange the template document's layout as we wish. The first step is to replace the text. Replacing text is a very simple process.
1. Place an insertion point. Using the text tool, click in the text that we want to replace. 2. Select the entire text by choosing Edit> Select All 3. Begin typing the text or if the text is typed in a word processing document, we can import the text without
retyping it. To import the text choose File> Place. A dialog box appears. 4. Browse and double click the text file to be placed.
Similarly we can place our graphic or replace an existing graphic in the template. Almost every template uses a graphic of some sort, even if it is just a line of color or a box that indicates where we should place our logo. Several templates have a small box, called a graphic placeholder, which says Place Artwork Here
To replace a placeholder with our own artwork: 1. Using the Pointer tool, click on the graphic or the graphic placeholder to select it. A selected graphic has small
boxes called sizing handles at each corner and in the middle of each side. 2. Choose File> Place or press Control + D to open the Place dialog box. 3. Browse and locate the file. 4. Double click on the file name to open it or select the file with a single click and then click on the Open button. 5. The graphic file appears in the place of the template placeholder.
Creating and Saving a New Template in the Template Palette We can create a new document and use it as a template as PageMaker helps us to save a document as a template and store it in the Template palette. To store the document as a template follow the steps:
Desktop Publishing
2009
36
1. With the Document still open choose File> Save As command. The Save as dialog box appears. 2. Locate the folder to save the file. 3. Name the file 4. In the "Save as Type", select Template
5. Click the Save button 6. The document is saved as a template. Once the document has been saved as a template it can be added to the
template palette. 7. Open the template Palette. 8. Click the right-pointing arrow to the right of the bar. The Template Palette's shortcut menu appears. 9. Click on Add Template option 10. The Add Template dialog box appears 11. Name the template 12. Locate the template. There are two ways to locate the template 13. If the active document is a template, click the "Create from the Currently Active Document" radio button 14. If the active document is not the file we want to add to the palette, select the "Add an Existing PageMaker
Template File radio button. Then click the Browse button and locate the file 15. Once we have located the file, double click to open or select it and click the Open button. The new template will
appear in the Template Palette to the right of the template that is selected, as indicated by the surrounding yellow box.
Creating a New Document using Document Setup The primary difference between using the Template Palette and the Document Setup dialog box to create a new document is that a template comes with the document parameters already selected, whereas in Document Setup we have to select them ourselves.
To open the Document Setup dialog box, Choose File> Document Setup or press Shift + Control + P
All of the basic parameters are found in document setup dialog box. We can set the parameters for the new document or change the specifications of an existing document using this dialog box.
The Document Setup dialog box has the following options:
1) Page Size and Dimensions: a) PageMaker offers 21 preset page sizes as well as custom
settings through which we can set dimensions that are not included in the menu.
b) Click the drop-down arrow to the right of the Page Size menu box and scroll thought the selections.
c) Once a page is selected the dimensions are shown in the Dimensions area.
d) We can also specify the dimensions of our document as per our requirement from as small as ½ inch to as large as 42 inches.
2) Orientation:
a) It is the arrangement of a page in respect to the direction of the long and short edges. Tall means the short edge of the page runs horizontally and the long edges run vertically. Wide is the opposite.
3) Options:
a) This section consists of 4 selection boxes: i) Double -Sided pages
Desktop Publishing
2009
37
ii) Facing Pages iii) Adjust Layout iv) Restart page Numbering
b) Click Double-sided to set inside and outside margins to accommodate binding on pages that will be printed on two sides. This setting is particularly important in a printed document such as a book.
c) Deselect Double-sided to print the publication on one side of the paper (single-sided).
d) Click Facing Pages to display the left and right pages together (as two-page spreads); make sure that we first select Double-sided.
e) Check the Adjust Layout option to reposition and resize text, graphics, and nonprinting guides when we change page settings.
The Adjust Layout feature can save considerable time and effort when we need to revise the layout framework of a page or a whole document margins or page size, number of columns, orientation, and so on. For example, we can quickly refashion a four-column publication to a two-column format. PageMaker then revises the text and graphics on each page to match the new parameters. To print page numbers in a publication, we have to instruct PageMaker where to put the numbers and how we want them to look. Pages are numbered starting from 1, unless we specify a different starting point. PageMaker provides several options for numbering pages across two or more publications.
PageMaker won't allow more than 999 pages per single publication. Although we can add page numbers to any publication page, it is best to add them to master pages. This saves time and ensures that the numbers appear at the same place on each page. Be sure to add a page-number marker to all master pages applied in our publication (assuming we want page numbers to appear on all pages). To set the Page Numbering follows these steps:
1. Select the check box for Restart page Numbering. 2. Click the Numbers button to open the page Numbering dialog box. 3. Select anyone of the numbering schemes or enter a special prefix to appear before a page number, in the TOC
and Index Prefix box. 4. Click Ok. Clicking the Ok button closes the Page Numbering dialog box and sets the style of numbers for our
document.
5. Enter the number or letter with which our document will begin in the Start Page # box.
4) Number of Pages
a) If we know the exact number of pages our document will have, we can create those many pages at the time we create the document.
b) Enter the number in the Number of Pages box, the document appears with the selected number of pages. c) We can also add pages to an existing document. d) Any pages added here appear at the end of the document.
5) Margins Our document margins are set in four margin boxes identified as Left, Right, Top and Bottom. We can specify the margin as required.
6) Target Output Resolution
Here we can set the resolution with which our document has to be created. This setting assures that the document, which we are creating, conforms to the resolution in which the document will ultimately be produced.
Desktop Publishing
2009
38
7) Compose to Printer
The purpose of this setting is to coordinate the document with the printer from which it will eventually be produced, even if, in case of Web pages and other non-print media, the printing is just for proofing. Click the drop down menu to the right of the Compose to printer menu box and selecting the printer to which we wish to compose the document.
Once all these settings are specified, click the OK button. The Document Setup dialog box disappears and is replaced by our document.
Managing Documents Layout Layout, the parameters of our page and the way we arrange it, is very important for the quality of the document, whether we create a print piece, a Web page, or some other type of a document. The layout of the document can be even more important than the text or graphics of the page. There are two views we may use in PageMaker.
1. The default view is the Layout View. 2. The other view is the Story Editor.
Working with Columns We get to see large amount of text set into multiple columns in newspaper, magazines, newsletters and many other print publications. In PageMaker column guides are a part of the layout grid, into which all elements of our page designs are placed. We can also place graphic in the column grid or place across column guides. When we place columns guides on a PageMaker page, the guides appear only on that one page but if we place them on the master page, they appear throughout the document.
1. Open the page or the master page to insert the grid. 2. Choose Layout> Column Guides. 3. The Column Guides dialog box appears. 4. Enter the number of columns. The maximum number of columns we can create is 20. 5. Enter the space between columns. The space between columns is also called gutter or columnar gutter. The
default is 0.167 inches. 6. Click Ok.
Ruler Horizontal and vertical rulers appear on the left and upper edges of the PageMaker window by default. To hide the rulers:
1. Choose View> Hide Rulers.
By default, the rulers are aligned with the zero point. The beginning measurement of the ruler is at the upper left comer of a single page. On facing pages the zero point rests between the two pages and the ruler runs right to left on the left page and left to right on the right page. We can move the zero point. To reposition the zero, just click anywhere in the area where the horizontal and vertical rulers meet and drag to the desired location. Keep in mind, when we drag the zero, we are moving it both vertically and horizontally. We can lock the zero by choosing View> Zero Lock.
Ruler Guides: Ruler Guides are also called nonprinting guides or guides. They are pale blue lines that we can position anywhere on the page. We can use them to align object horizontally or vertically. If we place guides in master pages, they appear on all the other pages, but if we position the guides on a particular page other than a master page, then they are seen only on that page. We can manually drag a ruler guide and place it on the desired location.
Desktop Publishing
2009
39
Chapter 10
Using PageMaker for Graphics
Objectives: 1. Introduction 2. Using Graphics 3. Layers 4. Applying Colors To Graphics 5. Transforming Graphics 6. Graphics In Frame 7. Cropping And Masking Graphics 8. Creating Text 9. Transforming Text 10. Editing And Formatting Text 11. Managing Text As An Object 12. Using Text Wrap 13. Assignment 14. Summary
Using Various Tools for Creating Graphics
Working with Line Tool We can draw a line using the Line tool and the Constrained Line tool. The Line tool draws a line at any angle on the page, while the constrained line tool draws only the horizontal, vertical or diagonal lines.
Creating a line in PageMaker:
1. Select the Line tool. The mouse pointer changes to a cross icon. 2. Place the cross where we want the line to begin. Click and drag the mouse to create a line.
Making a line longer or shorter:
1. Select the Pointer tool. The mouse pointer changes to an arrow. 2. Select the line by clicking on it. Thereafter selected sizing handles, small black boxes, will appear at each of the
line. 3. Click and drag the sizing handles to make the line longer or shorter.
Adjusting the line weight:
Line weight is measured in points, just like text. A very fine line may be I point or even 1/2 point width. Bolder lines are usually 8 points or less, but line weight can be adjusted to as much as 800 points.
1. Select the Pointer tool and click on the line if it is not selected. 2. Choose Element> Stroke. The Stroke menu appears. 3. Choose any of the stroke weight from the menu by clicking on it. 4. Once we select the weight that weight is applied to the selected line and the stroke menu closes. 5. If the line weight we want is not shown on the Stroke menu, click the menu's Custom command 6. In the resulting dialog box, enter the value of the weight desired. 7. Then click the OK button. 8. Click the Transparent Background option if we want objects placed behind a patterned stroke to show through
the spaces in the pattern otherwise, the spaces in the pattern are opaque. 9. Click the Reverse Stroke option to draw a paper-colored stroke or outline of a shape on a contrasting black,
shaded, or colored background.
Desktop Publishing
2009
40
Setting the line style:
Each of the PageMaker line styles may be set in any weight up to 800 points. 1. With the Pointer tool click on the line if it is not selected. 2. Choose Element> Stroke. 3. Select the line style.
Moving a line:
1. Select the line with the Pointer tool. 2. Grab the line with the mouse and drag it to a new location. We can apply similar options to a rectangle or an
ellipse. In the case of rectangle they are automatically created with square corners, but we can soften the effects by applying rounded corners to the rectangle. To do so:
3. Select the rectangle with the Pointer tool. 4. Then choose Elements> Rounded Corners, the rounded corner dialogue box appears. 5. Select anyone of the six styles and click on the OK button.
Working with Polygon Tool Page Maker provides the capability to establish the number of sides we want a polygon to have, as well as the capacity to inset the sides of the figure, creating a star. The default polygon is a hexagon, a figure with six sides.
1. Select the Polygon tool. 2. Click and drag the mouse to create a six-sided polygon. Hold down SHIFT while dragging the mouse to
constrain the sides of the polygon to be equal in length. 3. Next choose Element> Polygon Settings. 4. Adjust the number of sides. 5. Then adjust the inset value as desired. The percentage of insets possible ranges from 0 to 100. A percentage of
0 establishes straight sides. A value of 100 percent eliminates the side's altogether and presents a star seemingly composed of straight crossed lines.
6. Click on OK.
Creating a free form polygon
1. Click on the Polygon tool 2. Move to a new location and click again. A line segments forms between the two locations. 3. Continue to move the mouse and click where we want the line segment to end. 4. The Polygon tool continues to create line segments until one of these three things happen: 5. We close the polygon at the beginning of the first line segment. A closed form is created. 6. We double-click with the Polygon tool or press the ESC key. The line is released and the form remains open. 7. We press any key on our keyboard except for the BACKSPACE, DELETE or ESC. The form will then close with a
line segment between the last click and the beginning point.
Working with Layers
Objects in PageMaker can be put on one or more layers. Layers are like transparent sheets of film that are stacked on top of each other. We can see through them to any other visible layers as far as any opaque objects block the view of objects on lower layers and when all viewed together, the total look is achieved. By using multiple layers, we can create and edit specific areas or kinds of content in our publication without affecting other areas or kinds of content. By default a new document contains only one layer, it's called [Default], and it cannot be removed or renamed. However we can add and delete layer whenever required. Within each layer, objects are placed in a stacking order i.e. the order in which the objects are placed on the layer, with the first item to the back and the newest item to the front.
Working with Layer Palette The Layer Palette is used to create, edit, lock and delete the layers. It also lets us hide and unhide the layers.
Desktop Publishing
2009
41
To display the Layer Palette
Choose Window> Show Layers or press Control + 8 (Windows) or Command + 8 (Mac OS).
Using the Layers Palette:
1. To select the layer click on it in the Layers Palette 2. The selected layer on the Layer Palette is highlighted and a pencil icon appears to the right, indicating that it is
the current layer.
Showing or Hiding a Layer
1. To show or hide a layer select the Show/ Hide box to the left of the layer name. 2. A hidden layer's box is blank, while a visible layer has an eye icon in the box. 3. The objects on a hidden layer do not show on a publication and will not print.
Locking a Layer 1. To lock a layer click on the Lock / Unlock box for that layer. 2. The Lock I Unlock box for an unlocked layer is blank, while a locked layer's box shows a pencil with a line
through it. 3. We can select a locked layer but we cannot make changes to it. We need to unlock the layer before making any
changes.
Creating a New Layer
1. Click on the "New" button at the bottom of the layer palette or click on the arrow on the right side of the palette in line with the Layers tab.
2. Open the New Layer Dialog box. 3. Name the Layer. Select a color. 4. Select or deselect the Show Layer option to display or hide the layer. A hidden layer does not print or cannot be
edited. Select or deselect the Lock Layer option. 5. Click on OK. 6. The new layer is shown in the Layer Palette.
To delete a layer
1. With the layer palette open, select the layer or layers to be deleted. 2. Open the Layers palette menu by clicking on the arrow on the right side of the palette. 3. Select Delete. 4. Move Items to option, enables us to choose a layer to which we want to move all the objects on the layer we
are deleting. 5. Click the drop-down arrow to select the appropriate layer. Click on OK
Note: Delete Items on all Pages from Layer(s) option, deletes the objects contained in the layer or layers we are deleting, along with the layers themselves.
To rearrange a layer
We can change the order of a layer by dragging the name of the layer to a new location.
To merge a layer
1. Select the layers to be merged 2. Open the Layers palette menu. Select the layers to be merged 3. Select the Merge command 4. The objects from all of the layers are moved to the target layer and the other selected layers are deleted.
Desktop Publishing
2009
42
Applying Colors to Graphics Simple graphics have two components that are subject to color: the outline also known as stroke and the interior space created by the outline, generally referred to as the fill.
Applying Stoke
First let us see how to color lines using the Color Palette. In order to apply color to a line, it has to be selected first. 1. Using the Pointer tool click on the line to select it. To select the outline of a simple graphic, click on the outline
and eight sizing handles appear around the graphic. 2. Choose Window> Show Colors, to display the Color palette if it is already not open. 3. Select the Line Color application box 4. Click on the desired color form the Color palette to apply it to the line.
Applying tint to a line
1. Using the Pointer tool, click on the line to select it if it is already not selected. 2. Select any color by click on the color list in the Colors Palette. 3. Click the drop-down menu to the right of the Tint box. 4. The color tint menu appears. 5. Select the tint percentage.
Another technique for applying color to a line:
1. Use the Fill and Stroke dialog box. 2. Using this box we can select the line weight and style at the same time. Let us see how to do this: 3. Select the line. 4. Choose Element> Fill and Stroke. 5. The dialog box is divided into two parts. The left half provides options for the fills and the right half provides
settings for the selected line. 6. From the right half select the stroke, the color and the tint percentage. 7. Click OK to apply the tint to the line.
Applying Fills A fill is the space inside a graphic that is surrounded by an outline. There are 4 types of fills: None, Paper, Solid and Pattern.
Apply fills using the color palette:
1. Using the pointer tool click on the graphic to select it if it is already not selected 2. Just below the tab at the top of the Colors palette are three small boxes. Select the third box, because we want
to color the fill and the outline with the same color. 3. Click on the color
a. None - No Fill b. Paper- A paper fill on first glance may look like it has no fill. However, a paper fill provides a solid
white fill that is opaque. This is particularly useful when we want to block the view of another element. c. Solid - This fill applies a solid block of color to our graphic. d. Pattern - This helps us to full our graphic with wide selection of patterns.
Apply fill to a graphic using the Fill and Stroke Dialog box
1. Using the pointer tool click on the graphic to select it if it is already not selected. 2. Choose Element> Fill and Stroke 3. The Fill and Stroke dialogue box appears. 4. Select the Fill pattern, color and a tint if we wish. 5. Click OK.
Desktop Publishing
2009
43
Transforming Graphics
Placing a graphic in document and then transform it. 1. Choose File> Place. 2. Browse and locate the graphic and double click on the graphic to place it or select the graphic and click on the
Open button.
To skew / rotate a graphic
1. Select the Graphic. 2. Choose Window> Show Control Palette, if it is already not open. 3. Select a reference point. Click a point on the proxy reference in the: Control Palette. 4. Specify a skew / rotate angle. 5. Click on the Apply button in the Control Palette or press Enter. The skew / rotate is applied.
To flip a graphic
1. Select the graphic 2. Click on anyone of the flip horizontal or vertical button
Using Frames in Graphics The graphic placed in a frame takes on the shape of the frame. Frames can be arranged, modified or transformed like any other objects. Although frames, like simple graphics, are not subject to cropping, the graphics that they contain can be adjusted in a cropping-like procedure to show only the portions of the picture that we want to see.
Placing a graphic in a frame 1. Select the Frame tool by choosing from Rectangle, Ellipse and Polygon. 2. Click and drag. 3. Choose File> Place, to open the Place dialog box. 4. Locate the graphic. 5. Select the Place within Frame option. 6. Select the Graphic and click on Open or double-click on the graphic. 7. Using the crop tool, adjust the portion of the graphic, which we want to be visible.
Attaching an existing graphic to a frame
Select the frame.
Next, holding down SHIFT key, select the existing graphic.
Choose Element > Frame> Attach Content.
Frame Options
Once we have placed a graphic in a frame, we may need to make some adjustments to the graphic. The settings in the Frame Options dialog box help us to do so:
1. Choose Element > Frame> Frame Options. 2. Select Vertical and Horizontal alignment to make adjust the graphic in the frame. 3. Next select one of the three Fitting options.
Clip Content to Fit Frame
If the graphic is larger than the frame, this option crops the graphic to fit within the frame. That is, it cuts away parts of the graphic to show only what will fit in a frame. If the graphic is smaller than the frame, the graphic remains the same size and occupies just a portion of the frame.
Size Frame to Fit Content
This option changes the size of the frame so that it encloses the graphic.
Desktop Publishing
2009
44
Scale Content to Fit Frame
This option keeps the entire picture intact, but sizes it to fit the frame. Click on OK to apply the selections.
Cropping and Masking Graphics When we place a graphic from another document or program, we can crop the object to remove parts of the picture surrounding box that we don not want.
To crop a graphic: 1. Select the graphic. 2. Select the Crop tool from the tools palette. 3. Crop the Object
If we want to move the graphic within the frame created by the crop, use the Cropping tool and click in the center of the graphic and drag. The mouse pointer becomes a hand icon and the picture repositions within IJ the frame. Once a graphic is cropped, it will remain in that configuration, but the cropping can always be changed or the graphic repositioned within the crop boundaries. When we mask an object, we cover part of it so that only a portion shows through a simple graphic shape.'" Any objects, including text, can be masked with on exception.
To mask an object 1. Using a simple graphic tool, draw the shape we want to use as a masking object. 2. Place the mask over the object, which is to be mask. 3. Holding down the Shift key, select the mask and the object 4. Choose Element > Mask. 5. The mask is applied and blocks out everything but what is contained in the shape of the mask.
Creating text To place text into a PageMaker document, we first have to create a text box. There are two ways to create a text box. The first enables PageMaker to create the text box from existing document parameters. The second way is to drag to create the box to our own specifications.
To allow PageMaker to create a text box Select the Text tool and click on the page at the vertical location where we want the text box to begin. PageMaker establishes the box between two existing margins.
To drag to create a text box Select the text tool and click in the location where we want the text box to begin and drag to the width.
Transforming text Once created, we can make changes to the text box in many ways. We can stretch the text box to increase or decrease the width. We can also move the text box to another location.
To resize a text box: 1. Select the text box. 2. Grab one of the sizing buttons on either side of the top or bottom border using the Pointer tool. 3. Drag to the desired width.
To move the text box: 1. Select the text. 2. Using the Pointer tool, click anywhere within the text box and drag it to the new location.
Desktop Publishing
2009
45
Editing and formatting text Editing text in PageMaker is very simple task. Here we will discuss making corrections and spell checking.
Making Corrections We can make correction by deleting characters or by replacing them.
To make corrections by deleting characters:
Place the insertion point to the right of the text we wish to eliminate and press the "Backspace key until the unwanted text is no long there. The "Backspace" key removes the text to the left of the insertion point.
OR
Place the insertion point to the left of the text we wish to eliminate and press the "Delete" key until the unwanted text is no long there. The "Delete" key removes the text to the right of the insertion point.
To make corrections by replacing characters:
Delete the unwanted text, then with the insertion point in the place where the unwanted text was eliminated, type the new text. The new text is inserted in the old text's place.
OR
Highlight the unwanted text. Begin typing the new text. The old text disappears with the first keystroke and the new text is inserted in its place.
Checking Spellings: We can spell check one story (text box), every story in a document, or a selection of text within a story we can even direct PageMaker to check all PageMaker documents that are open. Spell Checking works by checking each word in our document against the PageMaker dictionary. If the word we have written is not located the dictionary, the Spell Check brings that word up for our attention.
To do Spell Check:
1. Click in the text box. 2. Select the options to use. 3. Click the Spelling button on the PageMaker tool bar.
PageMaker opens the story in the separate window. The Spelling dialog box also opens.
1. Activate the Spelling dialog box. 2. Select the publication to check. 3. Select the options as selected text, Current story or All stories as desired. 4. Click on the Start button on the Spelling dialog box to start the Spell Check.
Now let us see how formatting is done in Page Maker. There are ways to format text in PageMaker. The basic are alignment, font face, font size and text effects.
To format the text: 1. Select the text. 2. Select anyone of the alignments like left, center, right, justify or force justify. 3. Next select Type> Font and select the desired font. 4. Next select the Type> Size and define the font size.
Desktop Publishing
2009
46
5. Next select Type> Type Style. A menu appears listing Normal and five text effects: Bold, Italics, Underline, Strikethrough and Reverse. Select the style as desired.
The same formatting can be done using the Control palette or using the Character Specifications Dialog box choosing Type> Character.
Managing text as an object Objects are specifically graphics, text boxes and frames. Now we will discuss importing text form another source, flowing the text from column to column and placing text into simple graphic shapes called frames.
To import text 1. Open the document on which we wish to display text. 2. Select File> Place. 3. Browse and locate the file to place. 4. Select the necessary options and click on the Open button or double-click on the file name. 5. Click in the document between the margins that we want to contain our text. The text automatically fills the
space between the margins or clicks and drags the mouse pointer to create the parameters of the text box that holds our text.
Manager Text Auto flow If we import short text boxes, at times they are completed in one page or in a column. But if we are working with long text document, one that continues from one page to another or one column to another, it is important to know how to manage text flow. PageMaker provides a convenient feature; Auto flow, which can automatically flow long text, boxes from column to column and on to additional pages if needed. The text is placed in one text box divided into column-length sections that are threaded; that is, they are connected in the appropriate order.
Let us see how to do it:
1. Open the document where we want to place the text. 2. Select Layout > Auto flow.
A checkmark besides the Auto flow command indicates that it is selected.
1. Select File > Place. 2. Browse and locate the file to place. 3. Select the necessary options and click on the Open button or double-click on the file name. 4. Controlling text manually
The benefit of text floe is that it places text automatically, in one rapid process, into columns and pages. But at times we may want only one or two columns of text on first page and the other one the later page. In such a case instead of using Auto flow, we can manually place the text.
To manually place the text:
1. Open the document where you want to place the text. When you place a text with the mouse pointer that looks like a page of text, the text flows only to the end of the column in which it is placed. The text box indicates that there is more unplaced text by the presence of a red arrow in the bottom.
2. Click on the red arrow. The mouse pointer again looks like a page of text. 3. Move the pointer to the location of the text continuation and click. Again the text will flow only to the end of the
column in which it is placed. If more text remains. Click on the red arrow again and repeat until all text is placed.
Using text frames PageMaker provides an exceptional way to display text: a special object called a frame. Frames come in the same shapes as simple graphics, but have two capabilities now available in graphics.
Desktop Publishing
2009
47
1. Frames hold content, either text or graphics, or can serve as placeholders for content. 2. Text frames, even placeholder frames with no text content, can be threaded just like text boxes s that a story
can flow form one frame to another.
To create text frames: 1. Click on the Frame tool in the toolbox palette i.e. rectangle, ellipse or a polygon. 2. Click and drag to draw a frame. 3. Customize the frame as desired by adjusting the line style and weight or resize and move the frame 4. Using the text tool click inside the frame and place the text.
It is a very common practice in creating quality graphic designs to layout an entire piece using a layout grid and frames as placeholders before adding any text or even graphics. Not only does that allow us to achieve balance on our page before adding any copy, but also we can actually create the text to fit the space available. To use frames as placeholders, just create the frames, but do not enter the text. Frames without text shown the none=printing X to identify their use as a placeholder.
Threading Frames Although text boxes are threaded automatically during the placement process, frames must be connected manually. Frames may be threaded even if they are being used as placeholders. Once text is added to placeholder frames, it will flow from one frame to another to which it is joined. All frames do not have to be threaded, just those through which we want he story to flow.
To thread frames: 1. Select the frame.
2. Click the bottom window shade handle of the selected frame. 3. The mouse pointer changes to the thread icon. 4. Click anywhere on the frame that we want to thread.
The frames are threaded
To change the threading order:
1. Select the frame. 2. Press Control + Shift (Windows) or Command + Shift (Mac OS) and click on the top or bottom window shade
handle. Clicking on this breaks the connection with the previous frame. 3. Again click the bottom window shade handle. 4. Click on the next frame we wish to connect.
Using text wrap Text can be caused to warp in a rectangular shape around the graphic or be aligned with the shape of a graphic.
Applying text wrap to an object.
Once the text wrap criteria have been attached to an object, the object may be placed in any text box or a text box may be added around it with the same results.
To add text wrap to an object: 1. Select the graphic. 2. Choose Element > Text Wrap. 3. Select the Warp option. 4. Select a Text Flow option. 5. Specify the Standoff values.
Desktop Publishing
2009
48
The Standoff values determine the space between the graphic and the text. 1. Select the Wrap Text on the Same Layer Only box if we want the other layers to ignore the Text Wrap
command. 2. Click on the Ok button. 3. Create a Custom Wrap:
If we want the text wrap to hug the shape of an object, we can customize the wrap to fit it as closely as we want.
To do so:
1. First apply Text Warp. 2. Add new boundary handles by clicking on the boundary where we want the handles to appear. 3. Then drag handles or line segments to create the standoff as we desire.
Assignment
Browse the My tutorials folder and open "First.pmd" file, which we had created in the earlier session
Double click on the first page to open it.
Choose Layout > Column Guides.
In the Number of Columns box, insert 1. o Notice that the first page has -only one column now. The remaining page remains unaffected.
Next choose File > Place.
Browse and locate the file "About PM.txt" in the My tutorials folder.
Double click on the file to open it.
Format the text to make it look attractive.
Select the Polygon tool from the toolbar and drag to make a polygon.
Next choose File > Place, browse to the My tutorials folder and double click on the file "PM image". o Notice that the file is place in the polygon. Using the crop tool adjust the file in the polygon.
Next choose Element > Text Wrap.
Select the second Warp option and the third Text Flow option.
Click on Ok.
Next add new boundary handles by clicking on the boundary where we want the handles to appear.
Then drag handles or line segments to create the standoff close to the shape.
Next select the text tool and click below the horizontal ruler, which we have placed below 9 inches.
Type My First PageMaker file.
Format the text as desired using the control palette.
Double Click on page 2-3 to open it.
Next choose Layout > Auto flow.
Then choose File > Place.
Browse and locate the file "Information.txt" in the My tutorials folder. o Notice that the mouse pointer change.
Click in the first column of the left hand side page o Notice that the text flows in other pages also and two more pages are added at the end of
The document to adjust the entire text.
Next double click on the 4-5 pages to open it.
Choose Layout > Column Guides.
Column Guides dialog box opens.
Select both the options, Set left and right pages separately and Adjust layout.
In Number of Columns box, set the left page to 2 and let the right page be 3.
Click on OK. o Notice that the 4" page has 2 columns now and the text is also adjusted accordingly from three
Columns to two columns.
Choose File > Save, to save the file.
Printing Whether we are providing a multicolored document to an outside service provider, or just sending a quick draft of a document to an inkjet or laser printer, knowing a few basics about printing will make the print job go more smoothly, and help to ensure that the finished document appears as intended.
Desktop Publishing
2009
49
Types of printing
When we print a file, PageMaker sends it to a printing device, either to be printed directly on paper or to a digital printing press, or to be converted to a positive or negative image on film, in the latter case, the film can then be used to create a master plate for printing by a commercial press.
Types of images The simplest types of images, such as text, use only one color in one level of gray. A more complex image is one with color tones that vary within the image. This type of image is known as a continuous ¬tone image. A scanned photograph is an example of a continuous-tone image.
The Print Process
Let us discuss the essential steps to sending a publication to print on the desktop printer:
1. Choose File> Print. The print dialog box opens. 2. Select a printer. The default printer is automatically selected as the target printer. We can also select some
other printer from the drop-down menu. 3. If we want to select a postscript printer, select a PostScript Printer Description (PPD). 4. When a PostScript printer is selected, a second box opens beneath the printer box for selection of a PPD. Select
the PPD that is appropriate for the printer. 5. Define the number of copies we wish to print. 6. Select Collate if we wish to print one complete copy of the document before printing another. If it is deselected,
each page will print the required number of copies before going on to the next page. 7. Select reverse to change the order in which the document pages are printed. 8. Select this option when we want our document to be printed rapidly but do not require high resolution or for the
graphics to be displayed. 9. In the Pages box, define the number of pages to be printed. 10. Select the "Ignore Non-Printing Settings", to print the nonprinting objects. 11. Select the Print option to print blank pages. When this option is deselected the blank pages in our document will
not be selected. 12. Select the Book option, if we have a book to be printed. We have two additional options in this.
a) Print All Publications in Book: With this option selected the entire book list prints. If it is deselected, only the active document prints.
b) Use Paper Settings of Each Publication: If we choose a PostScript printer, select this option. 13. Select the appropriate preview to select a tall or a wide orientation for the document. 14. Click on the Print button to execute the printing process.
Exercise 1. We can draw a line using the______________ and the _________ 2. Objects in PageMaker can be put on one or more layers.(true / false) 3. Simple graphics have two components that are subject to color: the outline also known as stroke and the
interior space created by the outline, generally referred to as the fill. .(true / false) 4. The graphic placed in a frame does not take the shape of the frame. (true / false) 5. When we mask an object, we cover part of it so that only a portion shows through a simple graphic shape. (true
I false)
Answers 1. Line tool, constrained Line tool. 3. True 4.True 2. False 3. True
Desktop Publishing
2009
50
Chapter 11- Font installation
Contents
1. Systems Requirements: Hardware and Software. 2. What You Can Do with Dzongkha Unicode Tools? 1. How-To Install Dzongkha Unicode Fonts. 2. How-To Install and Configure Keyboard Driver. 3. How-To Use Dzongkha Keyboard Layout. 4. How-To Create Dzongkha Word Document. 5. How-To Set Browser to View Dzongkha Web Pages. 6. How-To Use Unicode Converter. 7. How-to install Lepcha & Limboo font
Systems Requirements: Hardware and Software
Hardware
1. Computer and processor: personal computer with an Intel Pentium 233-MHz or faster processor (Pentium III recommended)
2. Memory: 128 MB RAM or greater. a. Hard disk (for office 2003): 260 MB of available hard disk space; optional installation files cache
(recommended) requires an additional 250 MB of available hard-disk space. b. Hard disk (for word 2003): 150 MB of available hard-disk space; optional installation files cache
(recommended) requires an additional 200 MB of available hard-disk space. 3. Drive: CD-ROM or DVD drive. 4. Display: Super VGA (800x600) or higher resolution monitor.
Software 1. Operating System: Microsoft Windows 2000 with Service Pack 3 (SP3), Windows XP, or later. 2. Office Suite: Office 2003 Professional Edition or individual office packages (Office Word 2003 only). The
Professional edition of Office 2003 is not required unless someone needs to use the premium applications included in the Professional edition (e.g. Access).Others needed resources are available via download from the DIT website (or on CD): a. Unicode Dzongkha fonts. b. Standard Dzongkha keyboard. c. Converter from legacy Dzongkha formats to Unicode.
What You Can Do with Dzongkha Unicode Tools?
What you can do? 1. You can create Dzongkha document in Word, accounting in Excel, databases in Access and publishing documents in Publisher. 2. You can create Dzongkha text messages and email to another person over a network using MS Outlook. 3. You can create web pages and view them on browsers such as Internet Explorer and Mozilla. 4. You can convert legacy documents formats into Unicode. 5. You can share, import and export Dzongkha documents from one platform to another platform (e.g., from PC to Apple computer) 6. You can create Dzongkha text files using latest version of Note Pad available in Win XP.
What you cannot do?
How
Step1.
2.
What you cannot do?1. You cannot do mathematical computation with Dzongkha numerals in Excel.2. You cannot name file names3. There is no support for querying the database objects created in Dzongkha.
How-To Install Dzongkha Unicode Fonts
Step-By-Step:1.
Right clicksLink As on the
a. A dialogue box wilchoose a Choose the folder of your choice and click Save button.
b. ifopens
2.
Now, you extract the folder.
1. a.
b.
2. a.
b.
What you cannot do?You cannot do mathematical computation with Dzongkha numerals in Excel.You cannot name
the documents files using Dzongkha (document files
names). There is no support for querying the database objects created in Dzongkha.
To Install Dzongkha Unicode Fonts
Step:
clicks
on the download hyperlink and click Link As on the popup menu
A dialogue box wilchoose a directory or folder to saveChoose the folder of your choice and click Save button.
if
the downloaded files are ZIP files, thopens
the files with the Now, you extract the
a.
Right click on the download hyperlink and click Save Link As on the
b.
A dialogue box will pop up where you can choose a directory or folder to savefolder of your choice and click Save button.
a.
If the downloaded files arthe files with the
b.
Now, you extract the files in the same directory and folder.
What you cannot do?
You cannot do mathematical computation with Dzongkha numerals in Excel.
the documents files using Dzongkha (document files
There is no support for querying the database objects created in Dzongkha.
To Install Dzongkha Unicode Fonts
he download hyperlink and click popup menu.
A dialogue box will pop up where you can directory or folder to save
Choose the folder of your choice and click Save button.
the downloaded files are ZIP files, ththe files with the ZIP program
Now, you extract the files in the same directory and
Right click on the download hyperlink and click Save Link As on the popup
A dialogue box will pop up where you can choose a directory or folder to savefolder of your choice and click Save button.
If the downloaded files arthe files with the ZIP programNow, you extract the files in the same directory and folder.
You cannot do mathematical computation with Dzongkha numerals in Excel.the documents files using Dzongkha (document files
There is no support for querying the database objects created in Dzongkha.
To Install Dzongkha Unicode Fonts
he download hyperlink and click
l pop up where you can directory or folder to save
the files. Choose the folder of your choice and click
the downloaded files are ZIP files, thZIP program.
files in the same directory and
Right click on the download hyperlink and click popup
menu.
A dialogue box will pop up where you can choose a directory or folder to save
the files. Choose the folder of your choice and click Save button.
If the downloaded files are ZIP files, then open ZIP program.
Now, you extract the files in the same directory and folder.
51
You cannot do mathematical computation with Dzongkha numerals in Excel.the documents files using Dzongkha (document files
There is no support for querying the database objects created in Dzongkha.
To Install Dzongkha Unicode Fonts
he download hyperlink and click Save
l pop up where you can the files.
Choose the folder of your choice and click
the downloaded files are ZIP files, then
files in the same directory and
3. Copy and paste the Dzongkha Unicode Fonts in the Fonts Folder either byFonts folder
4. Finally, you have successfully installed the fonts and it is now ready to be usedapplications.
How-To Install and Configure Keyboard Driver
Step-By-
Step:
Right click on the download hyperlink and click
A dialogue box will pop up where you can choose the files. Choose the
folder of your choice and click Save button.
e ZIP files, then open
Now, you extract the files in the same directory and folder.
Desktop Publishing
You cannot do mathematical computation with Dzongkha numerals in Excel.the documents files using Dzongkha (document files should be
There is no support for querying the database objects created in Dzongkha.
Copy and paste the Dzongkha Unicode Fonts in the Fonts Folder either by
opening the Control Panel and the Fonts folder or: \WINNT
Finally, you have successfully installed the fonts and it is now ready to be usedapplications.
To Install and Configure Keyboard
Right click on the download hyperlink and click
A dialogue box will pop up where you can choose the files. Choose the
e ZIP files, then open
Now, you extract the files in the same directory and folder.
Desktop Publishing
You cannot do mathematical computation with Dzongkha numerals in Excel.
should be
saved using English
There is no support for querying the database objects created in Dzongkha.
Copy and paste the Dzongkha Unicode Fonts in the opening the Control Panel and the
WINNT\System32\
Finally, you have successfully installed the fonts and it is now ready to be used
in Windows 2003 Office
To Install and Configure Keyboard
Desktop Publishing
2009
saved using English
Copy and paste the Dzongkha Unicode Fonts in the opening the Control Panel and the
Fonts folder.Finally, you have successfully installed the fonts and
in Windows 2003 Office
To Install and Configure Keyboard
2009
saved using English
Copy and paste the Dzongkha Unicode Fonts in the opening the Control Panel and the
folder.
Finally, you have successfully installed the fonts and in Windows 2003 Office
To Install and Configure Keyboard
3.
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
How-To Use Dzongkha Keyboard Layout
Step-
unshift state
3.
Double click on the Microsoft Installer with file extension .MSI to install keyboard dynamic link libraries called kbd_Dz.DLL will Win2K andBHUT.DLL)
a.
1. For Win2K: To use DRegional Options icon.
b.
2. For XP: Open Control Panellanguages .
c.
For Win2K: Click on the Input Llanguage Settings
d.
1.
2.
3.
4.
e.
For Win2K and XP: Clickconfiguration, Input Language Bar Settings will appear
f.
Before you begin typing text in word document, you must select the languagethere sele
g.
If you have successfully done the above steps, you are now ready to useblah blah blah....... on the word document
To Use Dzongkha Keyboard Layout
-By-Step:
unshift state
Double click on the Microsoft Installer with file extension .MSI to install keyboard dynamic link libraries called kbd_Dz.DLL will Win2K and
C:\Windows
BHUT.DLL)
For Win2K: To use D
Regional Options icon.For XP: Open Control Panel
languages .
For Win2K: Click on the Input Llanguage Settings
1.
For Win2K: Click on Add tab and select the Input language , Input Method is dimmed by default. It means that
layout is selected. Press OK .2.
For Win2K: Highlight the keyboard under Tamil Language and click Dzongkha keyboard layout.
3.
For XP: Click on the Add tab and select the Input Language . dimmed by default. It means that for specific language, selected. Press OK.
4.
For XP: Highlight the keyboard under Icelandic Language and click Dzongkha keyboard layout.
For Win2K and XP: Clickconfiguration, Input Language Bar Settings will appear Before you begin typing text in word document, you must select the language
select the Dzongkha keyboard layout.If you have successfully done the above steps, you are now ready to useblah blah blah....... on the word document
To Use Dzongkha Keyboard Layout
Step:
unshift state
Double click on the Microsoft Installer with file extension .MSI to install keyboard dynamic link libraries called kbd_Dz.DLL will
Windows\system32\ in XP. (Note: Do not use the older version of
For Win2K: To use Dzongkha Keyboard, open the Control Panel Regional Options icon.
For XP: Open Control Panel , Date, Time, Languages and
For Win2K: Click on the Input Locales and Change tabs.
For Win2K: Click on Add tab and select the Input language , Input Method is dimmed by default. It means that
layout is selected. Press OK .For Win2K: Highlight the keyboard under Tamil Language and click Dzongkha keyboard layout.
For XP: Click on the Add tab and select the Input Language . dimmed by default. It means that for specific language, selected. Press OK.
For XP: Highlight the keyboard under Icelandic Language and click Dzongkha keyboard layout.
For Win2K and XP: Click
Apply to make the changes effective. Once configuration, Input Language Bar Settings will appear Before you begin typing text in word document, you must select the language
the Dzongkha keyboard layout.If you have successfully done the above steps, you are now ready to useblah blah blah....... on the word document
To Use Dzongkha Keyboard Layout
52
Double click on the Microsoft Installer with file extension .MSI to install keyboard dynamic link libraries called kbd_Dz.DLL will
in XP. (Note: Do not use the older version of
zongkha Keyboard, open the Control Panel
Date, Time, Languages and
ocales and Change tabs.
For Win2K: Click on Add tab and select the Input language , Input Method is dimmed by default. It means that
layout is selected. Press OK .
For Win2K: Highlight the keyboard under Tamil Language and click Dzongkha keyboard layout.
For XP: Click on the Add tab and select the Input Language . dimmed by default. It means that for specific language,
For XP: Highlight the keyboard under Icelandic Language and click Dzongkha keyboard layout.
Apply to make the changes effective. Once configuration, Input Language Bar Settings will appear Before you begin typing text in word document, you must select the language
the Dzongkha keyboard layout.
If you have successfully done the above steps, you are now ready to useblah blah blah....... on the word document
window.
To Use Dzongkha Keyboard Layout
Double click on the Microsoft Installer with file extension .MSI to install keyboard dynamic link libraries called kbd_Dz.DLL will get installed
in XP. (Note: Do not use the older version of
zongkha Keyboard, open the Control Panel
Date, Time, Languages and Regional Options
ocales and Change tabs.
For Win2K: Click on Add tab and select the Input language , Input Method is dimmed by default. It means that
For Win2K: Highlight the keyboard under Tamil Language and click
For XP: Click on the Add tab and select the Input Language . dimmed by default. It means that for specific language,
For XP: Highlight the keyboard under Icelandic Language and click
Apply to make the changes effective. Once configuration, Input Language Bar Settings will appear on theBefore you begin typing text in word document, you must select the language
If you have successfully done the above steps, you are now ready to usewindow.
Desktop Publishing
Double click on the Microsoft Installer with file extension .MSI to install the keyboardget installed
in C:\\
in XP. (Note: Do not use the older version of
zongkha Keyboard, open the Control Panel and either
Regional Options
For XP: Click on Details tab to open the
For Win2K: Click on Add tab and select the Input language , Input Method is dimmed by default. It means that for specific
For Win2K: Highlight the keyboard under Tamil Language and click
For XP: Click on the Add tab and select the Input Language . dimmed by default. It means that for specific language, by default
For XP: Highlight the keyboard under Icelandic Language and click
Apply to make the changes effective. Once on the
Status Bar.
Before you begin typing text in word document, you must select the language
If you have successfully done the above steps, you are now ready to use
Desktop Publishing
the keyboard
driver. The
\WINNT\Systems32 in XP. (Note: Do not use the older version of keyboard software
and either
open the Keyboard or the
Regional Options
and pick a task Add other
For XP: Click on Details tab to open the
For Win2K: Click on Add tab and select the Input language , the Keyboardfor specific
language, specific keyboard
For Win2K: Highlight the keyboard under Tamil Language and click
For XP: Click on the Add tab and select the Input Language . The Keyboardby default
specific keyboard is
For XP: Highlight the keyboard under Icelandic Language and click
Apply to make the changes effective. Once you done
Before you begin typing text in word document, you must select the language
that you added and from
the Dzongkha keyboard. Type
Desktop Publishing
2009
driver. The Systems32\ folder in
keyboard software
called
open the Keyboard or the
and pick a task Add other
For XP: Click on Details tab to open the
the Keyboard
Layout or language, specific keyboard
For Win2K: Highlight the keyboard under Tamil Language and click Add to add the
The Keyboard
Layout is specific keyboard is
For XP: Highlight the keyboard under Icelandic Language and click Add to add the
you done
with Keyboard
that you added and from
the Dzongkha keyboard. Type
2009
folder in called
open the Keyboard or the
and pick a task Add other
For XP: Click on Details tab to open the
Layout or language, specific keyboard
add the
Layout is specific keyboard is
add the
with Keyboard
that you added and from
the Dzongkha keyboard. Type
Technology.1. The keyboard design layout has six levels of states: Unshiftstate, Shift state,
Alt + Ctrl state, Alt + Ctrl + Shift state, Caps state and Caps + Shift state. This issupported by KBD_DZ.DLL keyboard driver.2. nothing but a graphical mapping of set ofDzongkha characters onto the
Keys on the Keyboard. Therefore, it is importantfor any users to clearly identify the Keys for each DzongkhaCharacters that can be achieved by using different levels of Keyboard State .3.
specific Dzongkha character denotes that, when you type
characters, it can accept a single character or a group ofcharacters above or below it. This is nothing but stacking of characters above or below the base characters.
caps state & caps+shift state
Technology.
The keyboard design layout has six levels of states: Unshift
state, Shift state,
Alt + Ctrl state, Alt + Ctrl + Shift state, Caps state and Caps + Shift state. This issupported by KBD_DZ.DLL keyboard driver.
2. The Keyboard Layout Design is nothing but a graphical mapping of set ofDzongkha characters onto the
Keys on the Keyboard. Therefore, it is important
for any users to clearly identify the Keys for each DzongkhaCharacters that can be achieved by using different levels of Keyboard State .
The dotted circle above and below specific Dzongkha character denotes that, when you type
haracters, it can accept a single character or a group ofcharacters above or below it. This is nothing but stacking of characters above
below the base characters.
caps state & caps+shift state
The keyboard design layout has six levels of states: Unshift
Alt + Ctrl state, Alt + Ctrl + Shift state, Caps state and Caps + Shift state. This issupported by KBD_DZ.DLL keyboard
The Keyboard Layout Design is nothing but a graphical mapping of set ofDzongkha characters onto the
Keys on the Keyboard. Therefore, it is
for any users to clearly understandidentify the Keys for each DzongkhaCharacters that can be achieved by using different levels of Keyboard State .
The dotted circle above and below specific Dzongkha character denotes that,
haracters, it can accept a single character or a group of
characters above or below it. This is nothing but stacking of characters above
below the base characters.
caps state & caps+shift state
The keyboard design layout has six levels of states: Unshift
Alt + Ctrl state, Alt + Ctrl + Shift state, Caps state and Caps + Shift state. This is
supported by KBD_DZ.DLL keyboard
The Keyboard Layout Design is nothing but a graphical mapping of set of
Keys on the Keyboard. Therefore, it is
understand
and identify the Keys for each Dzongkha
Characters that can be achieved by using different levels of Keyboard State .
The dotted circle above and below specific Dzongkha character denotes that,
haracters, it can accept a single
characters above or below it. This is nothing but stacking of characters above
caps state & caps+shift state
The keyboard design layout has six levels of states: Unshift
53
The keyboard design layout has six levels of states: Unshift
Desktop Publishing
shift state
alt+ctrl shift
alt+ctrl+shift state
Desktop Publishing
shift state
alt+ctrl shift
alt+ctrl+shift state
Desktop Publishing
2009
alt+ctrl+shift state
2009
How-To Create Dzongkha Word Document
Step-
1. Click on Start Choose blank document to create a
2. Change the Input Method to Dzongkha and choose the Dzongkha font called Wandi29 Toolbar. If you are using old version key
3. Set the Font Size to 24 Points, Dzongkha text at 12 Points of font legibly.
4. You are now re5. Save your document file using the English file name. That means you have
from the Dzongkha mode . If you happen to will get
How-To Set Browser to View Dzongkha Web Pages
Step-
1. Open Internet Explorer and Click on Tools Dzongkha web
2. Set the language script to Tibetan and web page font to Wangdi29 .3. Next, click on View 4. Type the Universal Resource Locator (URL) or web address and press5. If you don t set the
viewers.
How-To Use Unicode Converter
Step-
1. Unicode converters convert legacy documents such as WORDPERFECT (DOS),JAMYANG and KUENSEL 98 into Unicode documents. Documents can be imported and exported to other OperatingMackintosh, as well.
2. Right click on the download hyperlink and click Save Link As on the popmenu.
3. A dialogue box will pop up where you can choose a directory or folder to saveyour choice and click Save button.
4. If the downloaded files are ZIP files, then open the files witprogram.
5. Now, you extract the files in the same directory and folder.
6. Double click on Setup file with .EXE extension to install the converter.7. Click OK to Install the Unicode Converter and follow the setup 8. O
Converter_1.04.EXE file to run the Converter.
To Create Dzongkha Word Document
-By-Step:
Click on Start Choose blank document to create aChange the Input Method to Dzongkha and choose the Dzongkha font called Wandi29 Toolbar. If you are using old version keySet the Font Size to 24 Points, Dzongkha text at 12 Points of font legibly.
You are now reSave your document file using the English file name. That means you have from the Dzongkha mode . If you happen to will get corrupted and
To Set Browser to View Dzongkha Web Pages
-By-Step:
Open Internet Explorer and Click on Tools Dzongkha web Set the language script to Tibetan and web page font to Wangdi29 .Next, click on View Type the Universal Resource Locator (URL) or web address and pressIf you don t set the viewers.
To Use Unicode Converter
-By-Step:
Unicode converters convert legacy documents such as WORDPERFECT (DOS),JAMYANG and KUENSEL 98 into Unicode documents. Once converted todocuments. Documents can be imported and exported to other OperatingMackintosh, as well.Right click on the download hyperlink and click Save Link As on the popmenu.
A dialogue box will pop up where you can choose a directory or folder to save
the files. Choose the folder of your choice and click Save button.If the downloaded files are ZIP files, then open the files witprogram.
Now, you extract the files in the same directory and folder.Double click on Setup file with .EXE extension to install the converter.Click OK to Install the Unicode Converter and follow the setup Open the directory or folder where you have installed the converter programs.Converter_1.04.EXE file to run the Converter.
To Create Dzongkha Word Document
Step:
Click on Start
Program Files
Choose blank document to create aChange the Input Method to Dzongkha and choose the Dzongkha font called Wandi29 Toolbar. If you are using old version keySet the Font Size to 24 Points, Dzongkha text at 12 Points of font
You are now ready to type Dzongkha text on the Document Window .Save your document file using the English file name. That means you have from the Dzongkha mode . If you happen to
corrupted and
may not be able to open later.
To Set Browser to View Dzongkha Web Pages
Step:
Open Internet Explorer and Click on Tools Dzongkha web pages. Set the language script to Tibetan and web page font to Wangdi29 .Next, click on View
Encoding Type the Universal Resource Locator (URL) or web address and pressIf you don t set the encoding into UTF
To Use Unicode Converter
Step:
Unicode converters convert legacy documents such as WORDPERFECT (DOS),JAMYANG and KUENSEL 98 into documents. Once converted to
documents. Documents can be imported and exported to other OperatingMackintosh, as well.
Right click on the download hyperlink and click Save Link As on the pop
A dialogue box will pop up where you can choose a directory or folder to
files. Choose the folder of your choice and click Save button.If the downloaded files are ZIP files, then open the files with the ZIP
Now, you extract the files in the same directory and folder.
Double click on Setup file with .EXE extension to install the converter.Click OK to Install the Unicode Converter and follow the setup
pen the directory or folder where you have installed the converter programs.Converter_1.04.EXE file to run the Converter.
To Create Dzongkha Word Document
Program Files
Microsoft Office
Choose blank document to create a
document from the scratch.Change the Input Method to Dzongkha and choose the Dzongkha font called Wandi29 Toolbar. If you are using old version keyboard driverSet the Font Size to 24 Points, Dzongkha text at 12 Points of font
ady to type Dzongkha text on the Document Window .Save your document file using the English file name. That means you have from the Dzongkha mode . If you happen to
may not be able to open later.
To Set Browser to View Dzongkha Web Pages
Open Internet Explorer and Click on Tools
Set the language script to Tibetan and web page font to Wangdi29 .Encoding
Unicode (UTFType the Universal Resource Locator (URL) or web address and press
encoding into UTF-8 , the page displayed will have
To Use Unicode Converter
Unicode converters convert legacy documents such as WORDPERFECT (DOS),JAMYANG and KUENSEL 98 into documents. Once converted to
Unicode, you can perform cut, copy, paste and editing operations to thedocuments. Documents can be imported and exported to other Operating
Right click on the download hyperlink and click Save Link As on the pop-up
A dialogue box will pop up where you can choose a directory or folder to
files. Choose the folder of your choice and click Save button.
If the downloaded files are ZIP files, h the ZIP
Now, you extract the files in the same
Double click on Setup file with .EXE extension to install the converter.Click OK to Install the Unicode Converter and follow the setup
pen the directory or folder where you have installed the converter programs.Converter_1.04.EXE file to run the Converter.
54
To Create Dzongkha Word Document
Microsoft Office
Microsoft Office Word2003 to open MS Word application.
document from the scratch.Change the Input Method to Dzongkha and choose the Dzongkha font called Wandi29
board driver, choose Tibetan (Bhutan) as your Input Method .Set the Font Size to 24 Points, Dzongkha text at 12 Points of font
ady to type Dzongkha text on the Document Window .Save your document file using the English file name. That means you have from the Dzongkha mode . If you happen to save your
may not be able to open later.
To Set Browser to View Dzongkha Web Pages
Open Internet Explorer and Click on Tools
Internet Options
Set the language script to Tibetan and web page font to Wangdi29 .Unicode (UTF-8) to select the encoding
Type the Universal Resource Locator (URL) or web address and press8 , the page displayed will have
Unicode converters convert legacy documents such as WORDPERFECT (DOS),JAMYANG and KUENSEL 98 into Unicode, you can perform cut, copy, paste and editing operations to the
documents. Documents can be imported and exported to other Operating
Double click on Setup file with .EXE extension to install the converter.Click OK to Install the Unicode Converter and follow the setup
pen the directory or folder where you have installed the converter programs.Converter_1.04.EXE file to run the Converter.
To Create Dzongkha Word Document
Microsoft Office Word2003 to open MS Word application. document from the scratch.
Change the Input Method to Dzongkha and choose the Dzongkha font called Wandi29 , choose Tibetan (Bhutan) as your Input Method .
Set the Font Size to 24 Points, Dzongkha text at 12 Points of font
ady to type Dzongkha text on the Document Window .Save your document file using the English file name. That means you have
save your
file using Dzongkha name, it is more likely t
To Set Browser to View Dzongkha Web Pages
Internet Options - Fonts tab for
Set the language script to Tibetan and web page font to Wangdi29 .8) to select the encoding
Type the Universal Resource Locator (URL) or web address and press8 , the page displayed will have
Unicode converters convert legacy documents such as WORDPERFECT (DOS),JAMYANG and KUENSEL 98 into Unicode, you can perform cut, copy, paste and editing operations to the
documents. Documents can be imported and exported to other Operating
Double click on Setup file with .EXE extension to install the converter.Click OK to Install the Unicode Converter and follow the setup instructions until
pen the directory or folder where you have installed the converter programs.
Desktop Publishing
Microsoft Office Word2003 to open MS Word application.
Change the Input Method to Dzongkha and choose the Dzongkha font called Wandi29 , choose Tibetan (Bhutan) as your Input Method .
Set the Font Size to 24 Points, Dzongkha text at 12 Points of font size appears
ady to type Dzongkha text on the Document Window .
Save your document file using the English file name. That means you have to revertfile using Dzongkha name, it is more likely t
To Set Browser to View Dzongkha Web Pages
Fonts tab for
setting the web browser to view
Set the language script to Tibetan and web page font to Wangdi29 .
8) to select the encoding
model.
Type the Universal Resource Locator (URL) or web address and press
Enter .
8 , the page displayed will have
Strange Texts , which is unreadable to
Unicode converters convert legacy documents such as WORDPERFECT (DOS),JAMYANG and KUENSEL 98 into Unicode, you can perform cut, copy, paste and editing operations to the
documents. Documents can be imported and exported to other Operating
Double click on Setup file with .EXE extension to install the converter.
instructions untilpen the directory or folder where you have installed the converter programs.
Desktop Publishing
Microsoft Office Word2003 to open MS Word application.
Change the Input Method to Dzongkha and choose the Dzongkha font called Wandi29 on the Formatting , choose Tibetan (Bhutan) as your Input Method .
size appears
to be very small to be read
to revert
back to English mode file using Dzongkha name, it is more likely t
setting the web browser to view
Strange Texts , which is unreadable to
Unicode converters convert legacy documents such as WORDPERFECT (DOS),JAMYANG and KUENSEL 98 into Unicode, you can perform cut, copy, paste and editing operations to the
Systems, for example Apple
instructions until
you are done.pen the directory or folder where you have installed the converter programs.
Double click on Unicode
Desktop Publishing
2009
Microsoft Office Word2003 to open MS Word application.
on the Formatting , choose Tibetan (Bhutan) as your Input Method .
to be very small to be read
back to English mode file using Dzongkha name, it is more likely that your file
setting the web browser to view
Strange Texts , which is unreadable to
Unicode converters convert legacy documents such as WORDPERFECT (DOS),JAMYANG and KUENSEL 98 into Unicode, you can perform cut, copy, paste and editing operations to the
Systems, for example Apple
you are done.
Double click on Unicode
2009
Microsoft Office Word2003 to open MS Word application.
on the Formatting
to be very small to be read
back to English mode hat your file
setting the web browser to view
Strange Texts , which is unreadable to
Unicode converters convert legacy documents such as WORDPERFECT (DOS),JAMYANG and KUENSEL 98 into Unicode, you can perform cut, copy, paste and editing operations to the
Systems, for example Apple
Double click on Unicode
9.
10.11.
12.13.
How1.2.4.5.6.7.
Lepcha keyboard layout
Unshift state
9.
Click on the Set Source File button to select the source file. This source file isare going to convert into Unicode.
10.
Click on the Set Output File button to save the source file as a Unicode File.
11.
Select the Source File Format by click on the Combo Button . The sourceGelong Rinchen, Druk 98,
12.
Click on the Convert button to starting converting the source file into
13.
Finally, you are now ready to open the Unicode file that you have convertedperform all document operations such as Cut,
How
to installation1.
Go to control panel then double click on font icon and open the font window2.
Click the install new font from file menu.4.
Then open the Add Font dialog box5.
Select the6.
You can see list of 7.
Click OK
Lepcha keyboard layout
Unshift state
Click on the Set Source File button to select the source file. This source file isare going to convert into Unicode.Click on the Set Output File button to save the source file as a Unicode File.Select the Source File Format by click on the Combo Button . The sourceGelong Rinchen, Druk 98,Click on the Convert button to starting converting the source file intoFinally, you are now ready to open the Unicode file that you have convertedperform all document operations such as Cut,
to installation
Lepchao to control panel then double click on font icon and open the font window
the install new font from file menu.open the Add Font dialog box
Select the
drive where the font situated then select the folder where the font file is present.can see list of font,
Lepcha keyboard layout
Click on the Set Source File button to select the source file. This source file isare going to convert into Unicode.
Click on the Set Output File button to save the source file as a Unicode File.Select the Source File Format by click on the Combo Button . The sourceGelong Rinchen, Druk 98,
Jamyang, etc.
Click on the Convert button to starting converting the source file intoFinally, you are now ready to open the Unicode file that you have convertedperform all document operations such as Cut,
Lepcha
& Lo to control panel then double click on font icon and open the font window
the install new font from file menu.open the Add Font dialog box
drive where the font situated then select the folder where the font file is present.font,
select the font file from the list of
Lepcha keyboard layout
Click on the Set Source File button to select the source file. This source file is
Click on the Set Output File button to save the source file as a Unicode File.Select the Source File Format by click on the Combo Button . The source
Jamyang, etc.
Click on the Convert button to starting converting the source file intoFinally, you are now ready to open the Unicode file that you have convertedperform all document operations such as Cut,
Pa
& Limboo font.o to control panel then double click on font icon and open the font window
the install new font from file menu.
drive where the font situated then select the folder where the font file is present.select the font file from the list of
55
Click on the Set Source File button to select the source file. This source file is
Click on the Set Output File button to save the source file as a Unicode File.Select the Source File Format by click on the Combo Button . The source
Click on the Convert button to starting converting the source file intoFinally, you are now ready to open the Unicode file that you have converted
Paste, Copy, Edit, etc. to make changes to it.
font.
o to control panel then double click on font icon and open the font window
drive where the font situated then select the folder where the font file is present.select the font file from the list of font.
Desktop Publishing
Click on the Set Source File button to select the source file. This source file is
Click on the Set Output File button to save the source file as a Unicode File.Select the Source File Format by click on the Combo Button . The source
Click on the Convert button to starting converting the source file into
Unicode file.
Finally, you are now ready to open the Unicode file that you have convertedste, Copy, Edit, etc. to make changes to it.
o to control panel then double click on font icon and open the font window
drive where the font situated then select the folder where the font file is present.font.
Desktop Publishing
Click on the Set Source File button to select the source file. This source file is
the legacy document th
Click on the Set Output File button to save the source file as a Unicode File.
Select the Source File Format by click on the Combo Button . The source
file format may be WordPerfect ,
Unicode file.
Finally, you are now ready to open the Unicode file that you have converted
from the legacy document and ste, Copy, Edit, etc. to make changes to it.
o to control panel then double click on font icon and open the font window.
drive where the font situated then select the folder where the font file is present.
Desktop Publishing
2009
the legacy document th
file format may be WordPerfect ,
from the legacy document and ste, Copy, Edit, etc. to make changes to it.
drive where the font situated then select the folder where the font file is present.
2009
the legacy document that you
file format may be WordPerfect ,
from the legacy document and
Shift state
Limboo keyboard
Shift state
Limboo keyboard
Limboo keyboard
layout
layout
56
Desktop Publishing
Desktop Publishing
Unshift state
Shift state
Desktop Publishing
2009
Unshift state
Shift state
2009